JP2024004644A - Heating cooker and heating cooking system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker and a heating cooking system that are highly convenient for users and can accurately acquire recipe data from a communication terminal.SOLUTION: A heating cooker and a heating cooking system includes a plurality of specific input keys specified for each cooking menu, notification means having a display screen, and a control device that executes heating cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source. This control device successively executes a key identification step of detecting that a specific input key has been operated after a main power is turned on, and a confirmation step in which when a notice signal A for a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, it is executed to determine whether a specific input key specified for the specific cooking menu has been operated before or after the notice signal A is received, and display operation information of the specific input key on a display screen. When it is confirmed in the confirmation step that a specific input key has been operated, selection information A is transmitted after a notice signal A is received.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

The present disclosure relates to a heating cooker that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot placed on a top plate, and a heating cooking system that uses the heating cooker.

There are roughly three types of heating cookers based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type", which is installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed at a predetermined position on kitchen furniture, such as a gas table (also referred to as a "gas combustion table"). The third type is a small and portable "tabletop type" that can be placed anywhere on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in" heating cookers that are equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular as they can be used for various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to general kitchen furniture standards, and there is more freedom in design compared to "stationary" or "tabletop" types. The degree of difficulty is much lower, and the difficulty level of making a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in heating cooker, multiple heating ports are placed on the top of the main unit, and the heating ports perform induction heating. However, there are devices that are equipped with a "heating chamber" (hereinafter collectively referred to as a "heating chamber") and that heat cooking is performed by introducing microwaves from a microwave heating source into the heating chamber (for example, see Patent Document 1). ). A device equipped with a plurality of heating sources with different heating principles is called a composite cooking device.

JP 2021-177467 (Page 1, Figure 135) JP 2015-158345 (Page 1, Figure 15)

As proposed in Patent Document 1 mentioned above, in the case of a composite heating cooker, the number of heating means and input operation units increases, making it more complicated for the user to individually set one cooking menu. .
Therefore, it has been proposed to transmit recipe data from a smartphone (communication terminal) to each heating source of a cooking device and cook using the recipe data, as shown in Patent Document 2.
However, in order to set recipe data to the cooking device via a communication terminal, the user must consider the timing of communication between the cooking device and the communication terminal and the selection of the heating source to be used each time. There is a need to. Furthermore, in the case of a cooking menu in which a single cooking is performed using a plurality of heating means, there is a concern that the user may become confused about how to operate the input operation section. However, the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not yet have sufficient countermeasures for these problems. This may confuse the user and may also cause a failure in data communication for the cooking menu. In other words, it is necessary to notify the user in a timely manner depending on the state of cooperation between the cooking device and the communication terminal.

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker and heating cooking system in which various cooking menus can be set on the heating cooker from a communication terminal by improving user operability. There is a particular thing.

The heating cooker according to the first disclosure includes:
It has a specific input key determined for each cooking menu, a notification means, and a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When a notice signal for a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, is the specific input key defined by the specific cooking menu operated before or after receiving the notice signal? a confirmation process to determine whether
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting selection information after receiving the notice signal;
This configuration is characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the second disclosure includes:
It has a specific input key determined for each cooking menu, a notification means, and a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) remembering that the specific input key was operated;
(2) If a preview signal of the cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, determine whether a specific input key defined in the cooking menu has been operated before receiving the preview signal;
If a specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the notice signal has been operated before receiving the notice signal, transmit selection information;
This configuration is characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the third disclosure includes:
a first unit incorporating a first operation section, a first display section, a first communication section, a heating source, and a storage means;
a second unit capable of performing a cooking operation using the heat source in a first state placed on the first unit;
Equipped with
The second unit includes a second display section, a second operation section, a second communication section, a wireless communication section that performs wireless communication with an external communication device, a storage means, and a sub-control device. , has
The first unit includes a main controller that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section,
The first operation section and the second operation section each have a specific input key,
At least one of the storage means of the first unit or the storage means of the second unit has correspondence information that specifies the specific input key for each cooking menu,
After the main power is turned on, the sub-control device
(1) a detection step of detecting that one of the specific input keys has been operated;
(2) If a notice signal for the cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input key defined in the cooking menu is operated before the notice signal is received, or the notice signal a confirmation step of determining whether or not the information has been operated after receiving the information;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting selection information from the wireless communication unit after receiving the notice signal;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The cooking system according to the fourth disclosure includes:
A heating cooker having a communication unit and a plurality of specific input keys for permitting reception of recipe data regarding the food to be cooked via the communication unit;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal is
(1) Displaying the first screen and the second screen sequentially on the terminal side display unit,
(2) displaying recipe data regarding the selected cooking item on the first screen;
(3) When the recipe data displayed on the first screen is selected, the display is switched to the second screen, and the specific input key to be operated before receiving the recipe data is shown on the second screen. Display preview information,
(4) displaying on the second screen an input key for transmitting the selected recipe data;
(5) When the input key is operated, setting information regarding the recipe data selected on the first screen is transmitted to the cooking device;
The heating cooker, after turning on the main power,
(1) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When the preview information of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received from the communication terminal, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is pressed before or after receiving the preview signal. a confirmation step of determining whether or not it has been manipulated after receiving;
Execute sequentially,
When the heating cooker confirms that the specific input key has been operated in the confirmation step, transmitting selection information;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the fifth disclosure includes:
a first unit incorporating a first operation section, a first communication section, and a heating source;
a second unit that can be heated by the heat source in a first state placed on the first unit;
The second unit includes a second display section, a second input section, a second communication section, and a wireless communication section that performs wireless communication with an external communication device,
The second input section has a specific input key,
The first unit includes a main controller that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section,
When the second unit receives preview information from the wireless communication unit after completing the preparation state through communication between the first communication unit and the second communication unit in the first state, the second unit 2 displaying information regarding the operation of the specific input key on the display unit, and transmitting selection information from the wireless communication unit when the specific input key is operated in the state;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the sixth disclosure includes:
A first heating means and a second heating means capable of heating and cooking at a plurality of heating locations, respectively;
a plurality of input operation units provided for each heating location;
specific input keys respectively arranged on the input operation section;
at least one display section disposed on each of the input operation sections;
A control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source,
The specific input key is determined for each cooking menu,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) displaying a standby initial screen on at least one of the display units;
(2) Displaying on the standby initial screen at least one piece of information about the specific input key that requires an input operation when starting acquisition of the recipe data;
(3) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key displayed on the standby initial screen has been operated;
(4) a confirmation step of determining whether or not a specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu has been operated when a preview signal of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received;
Execute sequentially,
Furthermore, if it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, after receiving the notice signal on the display section corresponding to the input operation section where the input key is arranged, The control device displays at least one of information indicating that selection information has been transmitted or information indicating a receiving process of the recipe data;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

According to the present disclosure, there is provided a heating cooker that can be used in conjunction with a communication terminal to support a wide range of various types of heating cooking and that contributes to improving the efficiency of user input operations and reducing the input load, and heating cooking using the heating cooking device. system can be provided.

FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram of a heating cooking system showing Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the installed state of the heating cooker in Embodiment 1 of FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section and a central operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a left display section, a left heating power display section, and a left operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a right display section, a right heating power display section, and a right operation section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, and a central heating status display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view showing an example of the operation of the central display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device and an input operation section (central operation section) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing all types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; The classification table of the control menu of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the complex cooking mode and the correspondence of input keys in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. Explanatory diagram 1 showing the operation of the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation section and the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the operation of the input operation section and the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in the figure. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; Explanatory drawing 1 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. Explanatory drawing 2 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a modification example showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the input operation section and the central display section and a display example of the cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; 3 is a list showing various cooperative cooking menus in cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; Explanatory diagram showing operation example 1 of cooperative preheating cooking mode among the cooperative cooking modes shown in FIG. 25. Explanatory diagram showing operation example 2 of cooperative preheating cooking mode among the cooperative cooking modes shown in FIG. 25. 26 is a step explanatory diagram showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25. FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before shifting to a cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; Flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after turning on the main power in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the input process after turning on the main power in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. Flowchart 1 showing the input process in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. Flowchart 1 showing the input process in the case of complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. Flowchart 1 showing the input process in the individual cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps when cooking by acquiring recipe data using the central operation unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33. Flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing the basic operation of the control device in the voice input mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33. FIG. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the initial standby screen of the central display section at startup in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33; FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of the central display section showing the situation before starting cooking by the first heating means in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33; Flowchart 1 showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33 before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode by acquiring recipe data. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the central display section and the central operation section before acquiring recipe data from the outside and shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking menu and the operations of the input operation unit when recipe data is acquired from the outside in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking menu and the operations of the input operation unit in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 47 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 46. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section when acquiring recipe data in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. 47 is a time chart showing a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 46. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation for displaying food components and nutritional components before transitioning to a heating cooking operation in a cooperative cooking mode using recipe data acquired from an external source. 1 is a block diagram showing the main internal configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) used in the cooking system of Embodiment 1. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53. 54 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53. 54 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53. FIG. Explanatory diagrams 3 and 4 show display operations of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the cooperative operation of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) and a cooking device in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. Time chart 2 showing the cooperative operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) and the cooking device in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. Time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) and the cooking device in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, and a central heating status display section of the cooking device used in the heating cooking system of Embodiment 2. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents on the terminal side display section of the communication terminal used in the heating cooking system shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 63 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device and the central operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 63 is a plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, left and right operation sections, and a central heating status display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 63 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section, central operation section, and central heating status display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 62. Explanatory drawing 1 showing a specific example of a display on the heating cooker side that displays that recipe data for one cooking menu has been received from a communication terminal. Explanatory drawing 2 showing a specific display example on the heating cooker side that displays that recipe data for one cooking menu is being received from a communication terminal. Explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal side display section of the communication terminal used in the heating cooking system shown in FIG. 62. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a modification of display contents on the terminal-side display unit shown in FIG. 69; Explanatory diagram 2 showing display contents on the terminal-side display section shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing display contents on the terminal side display section shown in FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram of a heating cooking system according to a third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the central portion of the cooking device used in the heating system of FIG. 73. 75 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the second unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 74. FIG. FIG. 75 is an enlarged view 1 of the input operation section and the display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 when viewed from the front (front) side. 74 is a plan view illustrating the cooking device shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above; FIG. 73 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, the operations of the cooking device and communication terminal used in the heating system of FIG. 72. FIG. 75 is a plan view 2 of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. FIG. 74 is a plan view 3 of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. FIG. 75 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation section and the display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 when viewed from the front side. FIG. 7 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a central portion of a heating cooker used in a heating cooking system according to a fourth embodiment. 84 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, the operations of the cooking device and the communication terminal used in the heating system of FIG. 83. 12 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, operations between a cooking device and a communication terminal used in the heating cooking system of Embodiment 5. FIG. 86 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section, central operation section, and central heating status display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85; 86 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 85;

Hereinafter, a heating cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following explanation, terms indicating directions (for example, "top", "bottom", "right", "left", "front", "back", etc.) are used to facilitate understanding. is for illustrative purposes only. Furthermore, in each figure, the same reference numerals are the same or equivalent, and this is common throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite heating cooker equipped with multiple types of heating means will also be simply referred to as a "heating cooker."
In addition, a cooking device equipped with a cooking space such as an inner pot, such as a rice cooker equipped with one heating means (for example, an induction heating coil or a sheathed heater), is also called a cooking device. For example, in such a rice cooker, even if there is only one heating means, it is possible to cook regular white rice and multiple types of food such as porridge, and there are also several ways to cook rice. You may have more than that. Such rice cookers are equipped with multiple input keys (touch-type keys, push-button keys, etc.) that allow selection of various foods to be cooked and cooking modes, and one of the challenges is to improve the operability of the user US. It has become.

In the following explanation, "an object to be heated placed on the top plate" refers to cases in which an object to be heated, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3, which will be described later. ), etc., the meaning includes both cases where the object to be heated is placed on a support member such as a trivet placed above the top plate and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the object to be cooked housed inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. It may also be one that uses radiant heat or steam.

In the first embodiment, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there is no restriction on the microwave oscillation principle or method, such as a microwave oscillator using a semiconductor element. Further, a plurality of heating sources may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to show the difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not imply any superiority or inferiority relationship.
In addition, in the first embodiment, a heating source using a radiant electric heat source (sheathed heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but other forms and methods may be used. It may also be a heating source that generates heat.

The third heating means HM3 is capable of heating and cooking in one heating chamber 6. It is also possible to use a plurality of heat sources having different heating principles, such as a heat source composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Further, as the heat source for heating the heating chamber 6, an induction heating source may be used. A steam generator (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam) may also be used.

Furthermore, the third heating means may be either a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heating source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and raises the atmosphere of the internal space to a high temperature. good.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that becomes high temperature using an induction heating method is placed in the heating chamber, and this heat generating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or heats the air inside the heating chamber 6. It's okay.

As a typical example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) mentioned in Embodiment 1, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are made into a bundle, and this bundle is twisted into multiple pieces. However, there is one that is constructed by winding it in a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is a structure made by winding about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm. There is also a proposal to construct the annular conductor made of a flat conductive material and formed into an annular shape.
Any of these forms corresponds to an "IH coil" which is the main part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source).

In this Embodiment 1, "cooperative cooking" refers to two or more cooking methods in which one cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) is heated at different locations, and the heating operation conditions can be set independently. This refers to cooking that uses a heating source.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where a plurality of heating means are used at different times. For example, in the process of completing one cooking process, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and the cooking is completed by heating with an IH coil at the moved location. This is a type of "cooperative cooking".

In addition, the food to be cooked is heated inside the heating chamber 6 using a gas combustor (burner), and then the food is moved onto the top plate 3 and heated using a gas combustor (burner) or an induction heating source. Heating food to improve the perfection of cooking is also a type of "cooperative cooking."

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking without touching or pressing the button or operation surface of an input switch (input key).
Types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2."

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as "common key") that is compatible with both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "voice input only key") 180 dedicated to voice input, which will be described later.

If one input operation unit has multiple input keys and one of them is provided with the above-mentioned "dual-purpose key", when the multi-purpose key changes to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1", other than this multi-purpose key There are two cases in which the input function of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 1A"), and a case in which it is not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 1A"). There are two types (referred to as "voice input mode 1B"). All of these correspond to the "voice input mode 1" here.

When the "voice input only key" 180 is pressed while performing touch input using an input key (for example, 153M or 153L) on one input operation unit, "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after selecting voice input mode 2, the input function of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is There are two types: a case in which the control pattern is not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2B") and a case in which it is not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2B"). Both correspond to the "voice input mode 2" here.

In the first embodiment, there are a total of three input operation sections 15: a central operation section 15M, a left operation section 15L, and a right operation section 15R.
The central operation section 15M may be referred to as a "shared operation section." Further, the left operating section 15L and the right operating section 15R may be referred to as "individual operating sections".

The individual operation units 15L and 15R are provided with first specific input keys 152L and 152R, respectively.
The shared operation section 15M has a second specific input key 153M. In the first embodiment, the input key 154M is also set as the second specific input key, but one input operation section (in this case, the shared operation section 15M) must be provided with at least one specific input key. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the following description will be made on the premise that there is only one specific input key 153M on the shared operation section 15M.

When each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) is inputted, it generates individual selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) corresponding to the specific input key. That is, since mutually different selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is generated, the input key identification unit 15A of the input operation unit 15 can uniquely identify which specific input key has been operated. The selection information of the specific input key 152L is 202A. The selection information of the specific input key 152R is 202B. The selection information of the specific input key 153 is 202C.
Thereby, the control device 40 can also determine from the input information from the input operation unit 15 which specific input key (152L, 152R, and 153M) has been operated. Note that if the specific input key itself does not have a function to generate the specific selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), the input operation unit 15 in which the specific input key is arranged will generate the following information for each specific input key: A unique identification number (code) may be assigned and identification information of each specific input key may be transmitted to the control device 40 side.
In the following description, selection information A uses 202 as a representative code. In other words, the reference numeral 202 includes all of the selection information 202A to 202C, and may also mean any one of them.

When the recipe data CD is acquired and the individual operation units 15L, 15R are operated to heat cooking, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R are selectively operated, and the storage device of the control device 40, which will be described later, is stored. A first cooking program is selected from 42. This "first cooking program" drives the first heating means HM1 to perform induction heating cooking. Individual cooking menus belonging to the first cooking program are displayed on the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R, respectively. Note that the first specific input keys 152L and 152R also serve as keys that are pressed when selecting a control menu to be performed on the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R, as will be described later. However, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R may be changed to other input keys (for example, 153R, 153L), and may also serve as input keys for selecting the left and right heating ports 4L, 4R. Further, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R may also serve as input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, 155R for instructing increase/decrease of heating time, heating power, etc. Furthermore, they may also serve as input keys 153L and 153R for selecting a heating port.

When the recipe data CD is acquired and the shared operation section 15M is operated to perform heating cooking, the second specific input key 153M is selectively operated so that the second data is stored from the storage device 42 of the control device 40, which will be described later. A cooking program is selected.
This "second cooking program" executes heating cooking by driving a combination of two groups: the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3. . Specifically, individual cooking menus belonging to "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later, can be executed. This cooperative cooking mode KM1 has two or more cooking steps. The cooking menu can be selected using the central operation section 15M while viewing the central display section 16M. Note that, before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, input keys other than the second specific input key 153M are also used to set control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.).
By selectively operating the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program is selected from the storage device 42 of the control device 40, and the display section 16 displays the names of cooking menus that can be executed by the second cooking program. Identification information 167 can be displayed.

Further, the "second cooking program" includes one in which the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are individually driven to perform heating cooking. For example, it is also possible to conduct induction heating at a specific heating port (center heating port 4C) or to perform cooking using only microwave heating in the heating chamber 6.

"Recipe data" CD refers to data used to control the cooking device 1 in order to heat cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, and control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, heating power, target temperature, heating cooking time, etc.). , all included.

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process or order, and only includes some data for executing a cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak). It is something.
For example, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode described below, information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means, information on the heating port, etc.), information on the cooking process, information on the driving This does not include information indicating the order of heating means.
In this case, the data mainly consists of commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the heating cooker 1 is configured based on the premise of cooking for one person, for example, the recipe data CD stored in the heating cooker 1 is The control conditions (for example, one parameter, heating time) may be changed using a built-in program so as to correspond to servings for one person or four people.

In the following embodiments, the forms of the recipe data CD as described above will not be specifically explained.
The "display screen" in the following embodiments includes a liquid crystal display screen using a liquid crystal display element (liquid crystal panel) and a display screen using other light emitting methods (organic EL panel, etc.).
It also includes a "pop-up screen" that automatically appears on the display screen. A "pop-up" is a separate window that automatically launches (starts and starts displaying) on the screen of an Internet browser (also called a "web browser").
For example, in the terminal-side display section (display screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200, which will be described later, a first screen 216A, a second screen 216B, etc. will be described, but they may be configured as pop-up screens.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of cooking system)
Embodiment 1 according to the present disclosure is described in FIGS. 1 to 61.
FIG. 1 will be explained.
The heating cooking system of the first embodiment includes a heating cooking device 1 and a smartphone 200 (also referred to as a high-performance communication terminal, but in the following description, a smartphone 200 (also referred to as a high-performance communication terminal), which has a function of performing wireless communication between the heating cooking device 1 and the heating cooking device 1. The cloud server 300 is configured to include a "communication terminal") and a cloud server 300. Note that the communication terminal 200 may be other than a smartphone, and may be, for example, a tablet terminal with a communication function, a personal computer, or the like. In the first embodiment, these devices are collectively referred to as communication terminal 200.

The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with a wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) installed in a house (not shown) where the cooking device 1 is used.

The cooking device 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD1 through wireless communication 330 with the communication terminal 200. Note that the recipe data CD2 acquired by the cooking device 1 via the cloud server described later will be described later.
The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication 330 with the cooking device 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The communication terminal 200 accesses the cloud server 330 in an external space via the wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) and a network NW such as the Internet. The cloud server 300 includes at least one recipe data providing server 301.

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 that stores recipe data for executing various cooking processes, and the communication terminal 200 accesses a recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301. Then, various recipe data CD1 are acquired (downloaded) from the recipe DB 302.

As will be explained in detail later, the recipe data CD1 includes information on heating means and control conditions (such as heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that a specific food (for example, "hamburger steak") can be cooked in the cooking device 1. (Including, but not limited to, any one of the commands (command data)). However, as described above, only the unique data identifying the recipe data CD1 may be used.

In the following explanation, recipe data (also referred to as "cooking implementation data") may be explained using codes such as CD1, CD2, etc. However, these codes do not necessarily mean that the contents of the recipe data are different, but are the same. In some cases. These codes (CD1, CD2) are attached based on the sender of the recipe data to facilitate understanding. In addition, when using a reference numeral uniformly for recipe data, "CD" is used.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) formed inside the heating chamber 6; and a third heating means HM3 for heating by increasing the temperature.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as a "first place", in order to heat the object to be heated (magnetic metal pot) placed at this first place, the first heating means HM1 is Induction heating means are used. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pan made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal can be used as the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space located at a location apart from the first location is defined as a "second location", then the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) becomes the second location.

The heating cooker 1 has a function of executing a "single cooking mode" KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are each driven independently (independently).

The heating cooker 1 has a method of cooking one food by driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 at the same time, or by operating one of them first. It has an execution function of "complex cooking mode" KM2 that automatically starts driving the other one later. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are operated at the same time, whether the heating end timings of both are the same or different belong to the "compound cooking mode" KM2. This is one driving pattern.

In the "compound cooking mode" KM2, a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning, and after the second heating means HM2, A pattern in which driving of the third heating means HM3 is started (RG control mode 2), and a pattern in which the third heating means HM3 is first driven and then automatically switched to driving the second heating means HM3. (RG control mode 3). In these RG control modes 1 to 3, switching of each heating means is automatically performed when heating cooking is started in the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3).

The "compound cooking mode" KM2 does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak), unlike the cooperative cooking mode KM1 described later. That is, "control menus" are prepared for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3. A single control pattern can be used for a plurality of foods (for example, defrosting meat, boiling vegetables, etc.).

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1". In the RG control mode (RG combined cooking mode), various foods can be cooked. One of the "control menus", for example the "RG control mode 1", is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but it is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

That is, the operation pattern in which two or more heat sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the complex cooking mode KM2 having a plurality of "control menus". .

On the other hand, recipe data (corresponding to a specific to-be-cooked item) is used to heat-cook the to-be-cooked items placed in the interior of the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order. The cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a cooperative cooking menu is applied.
That is, the contents of recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the following description, when indicating the type of control mode, such as a drive pattern of a heating source, it will be referred to as a "control menu." For example, "defrost" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying items to be cooked that can be heated, names of dishes, etc., it is called a "cooking menu." For example, "hamburger" is one of the cooking menus.

The heating cooker 1 operates in a "cooperative cooking mode" in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US. It has the execution function of KM1.

The "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 has a pattern in which the first heating means HM1 performs the cooking process 1, and a pattern in which the second heating means HM2 performs the cooking process 1.
For example, in order to finish the cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1 and move on to the cooking process 2, the food to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 6, and then the driving of the second heating means HM2 is started. Between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, there is a "heating rest period" (transition period TR) in which no heating operation is performed. This heating pause period will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific item to be cooked (eg, hamburger, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are driven, and the control conditions for the heating means (including at least one of heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.).

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking device 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD held in the cooking device 1 do not need to be the same. For example, the recipe data CD of the new cooperative cooking mode KM1 may be sequentially added to the recipe DB 302, and the recipe data CD of the complex cooking menu may be sequentially accumulated.

When the cooking device 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication terminal 200, the data is acquired in units of one cooking menu selected by the user US on the communication terminal 200. be. This is common not only to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 but also to the "compound cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM3.

That is, in the heating cooker 1, for example, a control menu called "warming" can be selected in the complex cooking mode KM2, but the recipe data CD provided to the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 is based on such a control menu unit. It is not a cooking menu unit.
Therefore, in the control menu for microwave heating, etc., there are various control menus such as "warming", "manual microwave", "boiling leafy vegetables", "boiling root vegetables", and "defrosting meat", which will be described later. , the communication terminal 200 does not provide the recipe data CD for each control menu. For example, in the case of defrosting, the communication terminal 200 provides recipe data (including identification information) of "defrosting of XX" that specifies the object to be heated.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide the recipe data CD of the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe (see FIG. 1). .

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe, generated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquired from the server 301, to the cooking device 1 (see FIG. 1).
In order to use such a recipe data acquisition function, the user US of the heating cooker 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs a recipe selection application (hereinafter referred to as "recipe selection application"). ) is installed on the communication terminal 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection application, the user US performs an operation to register identification information such as the model name of the heating cooker as an initial setting. Through this registration, recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking device 1 (heating capacity of each heating means HM1 to HM3, etc.) can be obtained from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

Further, the user US pairs the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 using the recipe selection application, and establishes direct wireless communication 330BT between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1. Note that this wireless communication 330BT may use a near field communication (NFC) method.

330WF shown in FIG. 2 indicates wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340. The communication method of the wireless communication 330T between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. Furthermore, the wireless communication 330WF between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340 uses a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark).

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment, the communication terminal 200 transmits the recipe data CD (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US to the recipe providing site. (Recipe data providing server 301), the recipe data may be temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302, and then provided to the cooking device 1. In other words, even if the communication terminal 200 is located far away from the house where the heating cooker 1 is installed (for example, outside the house), the recipe data CD of the communication terminal 200 can be transferred to the recipe data providing server 301. It is convenient because it can be saved.

Note that a wireless router 340 (see FIG. 2) may be interposed between the cooking device 1 and the cloud server 300.

In this first embodiment, there are cases where the recipe data CD is described as "obtaining" or "restricting the acquisition", so this point will be explained.
If the explanation is "restrict acquisition", it means that the recipe data (specific information forming part or all of it) CD will not enter inside the heating cooker 1 from the outside via the communication unit 51, which will be described later. It's not a translation. In the cooking device 1, the communication unit 51 once receives recipe data CD from the outside, and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described with reference to FIG. 10). At this time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is sent from an external source during the "period for which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent execution process of the cooking menu (that is, the cooking process). It is automatically erased within a short time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following description, "NW" will be used as a uniform code when describing a network such as the above-mentioned Internet line.

The “equipment identification information” of the heating cooker 1 is unique information for identifying the heating cooker 1. Specifically, this is important information required when performing information communication, and includes the MAC address, the manufacturer's name of the heating cooker 1, the model name, the model number, and the manufacturing number.

The cloud server 300 has a function of acquiring information regarding the current status of the cooking device 1, such as operation, stoppage, and standby state, via the network NW.
The cloud server 300 is connected to the target cooking device 1 using the device identification information.

In addition to the recipe database 302, the cloud server 300 includes an information providing server (not shown), which transmits useful information to the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200.

The information providing server (not shown) may be, for example, a server installed by an earthquake information providing organization in a specific area, an external organization such as an electric power company, or a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking device 1.

The cloud server 300 stores and stores control application software that allows the heating cooker 1 to be remotely controlled. From the communication terminal 200, which will be described in detail later, the remote control described above can be realized by accessing the cloud server 300 and downloading (reading) control application software.

The communication terminal 200 in Embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals through short-range communication while being brought close to (or even in contact with) the input/output section of the heating cooker 1 by a few centimeters. There is. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the induction heating cooker 1 side.
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data from the communication terminal 200 side to the NFC storage section of the cooking device 1 and controlling the cooking device 1 according to the control data.

Next, FIG. 2 will be explained.
600 is kitchen furniture in which a heating cooker 1 and the like are installed. 600D is a water supply port installed in the kitchen furniture 600.
340 is a wireless router capable of wireless communication with the cooking device 1. This wireless router 340 is also an access point for a network NW such as the Internet.

The heating cooker 1 has an object to be heated (such as a magnetic metal pot) placed on a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface thereof, and an IH coil 9 (signs 9C, 9L, 9R shown in FIGS. 3 and 4). ) induction heating. That is, the top plate 3 has a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a center heating port 4C.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the inner side (rear side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust port cover 5 is made of punched metal or a grid-like metal member in which numerous small through holes are formed, and the exhaust port cover 5 is breathable throughout and has low ventilation resistance. Exhaust gas discharged from the inside of the cooking device 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the cooking device 1.

A door (heating door) 7 that opens and closes a front opening of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) arranged inside the main body 2 is provided on the front surface of the main body 2 of the cooking device 1 . The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing the door.

(2. Detailed configuration of heating cooker)
Next, the specific structure of the heating cooker 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 3 to 11.
FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, viewed from the side. As shown in FIG. 3, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as "left IH coil") as left induction heating means is provided below the left heating port 4L.

As shown in FIG. 3, the heating cooker 1 is a built-in IH cooking heater that is used by being incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking table on the top. The heating cooker 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 installed on the main body 2. The top plate 3 is exposed on the kitchen top plate that constitutes the top surface of the kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached around the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 3: the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C indicate an area in which a metal cooking container such as a pot or a frying pan (also referred to as "object to be heated" N regarding the first heating means HM1) is placed. It is something. Guide marks (not shown) are printed on the top surface of the top plate 3 to serve as a guide for placing the object to be heated in the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C, respectively. It is depicted.

In the cooking device 1, an object N (not shown) (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed on a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface thereof, and is heated by induction using an IH coil 9. 32 is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two independent spaces, upper and lower.
33 is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the heating cooker 1, and the IH coil 9 ( 9C, 9L, 9R) are accommodated.

That is, a right IH coil 9R as a right induction heating means is provided below the right heating port 4R, and a center IH coil 9C as a center induction heating device is provided below the center heating port 4C.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils formed by winding a thin conducting wire such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field by being supplied with a high-frequency current. As a result, the cooking containers (objects to be heated N) disposed on the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C are heated by induction.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, 9R and their drive circuit (referring to a high frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as an induction heating source or a first heating means HM1. be. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, "first heating means" HM1 will be used throughout.

In the vicinity of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, there is a temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 10) consisting of a plurality of temperature sensors (not shown) to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and the cooking container (heated object). ) is installed. One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor here may be either a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor or a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2 and below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by a metal wall made of stainless steel or the like, and is a space for heating the object to be cooked (food, ingredients) housed within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, a plate made of porcelain, or a heat-resistant glass plate, or placed in a container in the heating chamber 6. In that case, the plate or container is placed in the heating chamber 6. Sometimes referred to as "container to be heated." However, since these containers are not induction-heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed in the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called "heated objects" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. do not have.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed on the front surface of the heating chamber 6 for taking in and taking out the food to be cooked. The opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 so as to be openable and closable. The door 7 is rotatably supported by the main body 2 via a hinge and an arm (not shown). Thereby, the door 7 is configured to open forward to a horizontal position using its lower end as a fulcrum (center of rotation). Note that the door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (referring to a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the container to be heated from below by a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an opening/closing detection section 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is opened or closed. The opening/closing detection section 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided at the rear of the heating chamber 6 to heat the food to be cooked stored in the heating chamber 6. The microwave oscillator 11 is composed of, for example, a magnetron, and performs so-called microwave heating, in which the food to be cooked placed in the heating chamber 6 is heated by irradiating the heating chamber 6 with microwaves.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (referring to a high frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as a second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is arranged on the outside or inside ceiling wall of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is arranged on the inside or outside wall of the heating chamber 6, both of which are sheathed heaters.

Other types of radiant heating means (for example, mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6. FIG. 3 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means including the upper radiant heating means 12a, the lower radiant heating means 12b, and their drive circuits (not shown) may be referred to as third heating means HM3. Note that the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as "radiant heat heating means", and in that case, the reference numeral "12" is used.

Further, the heating chamber 6 is provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact type temperature sensor in order to detect the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 in a non-contact manner. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set, for example, to -20°C to 100°C. Thereby, the degree of heating of the food to be cooked can be detected in real time with high accuracy, for example, in steps of 1°C. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact temperature sensor (for example, a thermistor sensor) 14 that is an indoor temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 6 .

Since the thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting a change in temperature as a change in electrical resistance, the upper limit of the temperature that can be detected is about 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. Note that the thermistor sensor 14 may be installed at two locations, near the bottom surface and near the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 6, as shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 4 will be explained.
FIG. 4 is a top view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking device 1, a left operation section 15L, a center operation section 15M, and a right operation section 15R are provided. These three operation sections may be collectively referred to as the "input operation section", and in that case, the reference numeral 15 is used.

On the back side (rear side) of the left operation section 15L, the center operation section 15M, and the right operation section 15R, there are a left firepower display section 17L, a center display section 16M, a right firepower display section 17R, and a left display section 16L and a right display section. 16R and a central heating status display section 17M are provided.

The left display section 16L, the center display section 16M, and the right display section 16R may be collectively referred to as a "display section", and in that case, the reference numeral 16 is used. Note that the central display section 16M has a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left firepower display section 17L and the right firepower display section 17R display the firepower level using light emitting elements (LEDs, etc.), and do not have display screens.

The left thermal power display section 17L, the right thermal power display section 17R, and the central heating status display section 17M may be collectively referred to as a "thermal power display section", and in that case, the reference numeral 17 is used.

Further, a button (key) 20A for operating the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10) is provided adjacent to the right operation section 15R. The main power switch 20 turns on or off the main power of the cooking device 1 . The button (key) that is pressed during the ON-OFF operation is the operation button 20A.

When the operation button 20A is pressed for, for example, several seconds while the main power source of the cooking device 1 is OFF, the main power source is turned ON. Furthermore, when the main power source of the cooking device 1 is turned on, the main power source is turned off by pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, several seconds.

Next, FIG. 5 will be explained.
In FIG. 5, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is arranged on the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting voice input is pressed once, the next input can be performed by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2".
However, this input key 180 cannot select the heating means or heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, the input key 180 needs to be operated, for example, after a touch operation ("short press") of the input key 153L for selecting the heating port 4L. In other words, if you "long press" the input key 153L, you can switch to voice input mode 2, but if you "short press" instead of "long press", if you press the input key 180 after that, you can switch to voice input mode 2. You can switch from voice input mode 2 to voice input mode 2.

In the central operation unit 15M, when the input key 180 is operated after touching any one of the input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M, the control device switches to the "voice input mode 2". The input processing section (input restriction section) 70 in 40 puts the audio signal analysis section 58 (see FIG. 10) into an input standby state. Note that even if this input key 180 is touched, five input keys, the input key 153M, the heating operation start input key 151M, the stop input key 152M, and the input keys 153L and 153R of the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R, do not function as input. is not affected in any way. Further, at the time when these five input keys are touched, the "voice input mode 2" by the input key 180 is canceled.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" based on the input of this input key 180 is based on the touch form of specific (touch type) input keys such as various touch type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M, etc., which will be described later. This is different from "voice input mode 1" which is set accordingly.

When the input key 180 is pressed, "voice input mode 2" is activated from that moment. In other words, it becomes "voice input mode 2". As explained in FIG. 10, when there is an audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56, the audio signal analyzing section 58 analyzes the contents of the audio one by one and outputs the analysis result to the heating control section 43.

Note that the input key 180 for selecting audio input may limit the "range in which touch input is disabled" to only the central operation unit 15M. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input function of certain (touch-type) input keys such as various touch-type input keys 154M to 159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M is disabled as described later. be converted into Then, it shifts to an input standby state in which it accepts voice commands from the user US. Note that after the start of the heating operation, the touch input cannot be invalidated using the input key 180, so there is no restriction on the input of various input keys (for example, a stop command using 152M) during the heating operation.

Reference numeral 21M denotes a (center) light emitting section that constitutes a part of the light emitting section 21, which emits light when the input function of the input key 180 is enabled, and does not emit light until the input function becomes disabled. continue. Note that one or more light emitting elements 27 (see FIG. 10) such as LEDs are arranged in each of the light emitting sections 21M, and are driven by a light emission control section 26 (see FIG. 10).

As will be explained in detail later, the light emitting section 21 includes, in addition to the (center) light emitting section 21M, a (right) light emitting section 21R corresponding to the right operating section 15R, and a (left) light emitting section corresponding to the left operating section 15L. Contains 21L.
The light emitting unit 21 has a function of prompting the user to operate one input key to indicate that the input function of the adjacent input key is valid.
This light emitting section 21 also serves as a "key identifying section." That is, in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200, which will be described later, the light emitting unit 21 should be operated immediately after receiving "notice information A" 201 (described in FIGS. 59 and 60) from the communication terminal 200. There is a function to display input keys (for example, 152L in FIG. 6) by emitting light. This point will be explained with reference to FIG.

In the central operation unit 15M, an input key 151KP for function setting is arranged at a position adjacent to the left side of the input key 153M. The function of this input key 151KP will be explained later.

In the first embodiment, the input mode in which the cooking device 1 is controlled by the user US's pressing operation (including light contact) with a fingertip or the like is referred to as a "touch input mode." Therefore, various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L, which will be described later, may be referred to as a "touch input mode selection section."

Next, FIG. 6 will be explained.
FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the left display section 16L, left firepower display section 17L, and left operation section 15L according to the first embodiment. The left display section 16L displays information regarding cooking in the left heating port 4L, and is configured with, for example, a liquid crystal display.

The left display section 16L shows the set time for "timer cooking" for the object to be heated placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time since the start of the heating operation at the left heating port 4L, or the timer setting time. Displays the remaining time until the end.

The above-mentioned "timer cooking" is cooking in which the heating operation is performed for the time (set time) set (input) by the user US (for example, using the input key 151L, etc.), and when the set time has elapsed, the heating is automatically started. This is one of the convenient functions for the user US because the operation is stopped.

The left display section 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature), the current temperature, etc. when preheating cooking in the left heating port 4L is selected. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated (for example, a metal pot) when the object to be heated (for example, a metal pot) is heated in the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be arbitrarily changed within a certain range by the user US. Further, for example, the target temperature can be set to an arbitrary temperature by touching the input keys 155L and 154L (however, if the temperature exceeds a predetermined allowable range, the setting input will be rejected by the heating control unit 43 shown in FIG. 10). It has become so).

The left heating power display section 17L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) arranged horizontally in a straight line, and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left firepower display section 17L expresses the firepower by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs or by switching the lighting color. Thereby, it is possible to notify the user US of the firepower in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is used to input operations related to heating and cooking at the left heating port 4L.
As shown in FIG. 6, the left operation section 15L includes five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L are touch type keys. For example, it is a capacitive touch sensor (touch switch) that allows input by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches it with a finger or the like.

Light emitting sections 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. The light emitting section 21L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. Note that the two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share one light emitting part 21L because they perform the same type of function of increasing/decreasing the thermal power.

The input key 151L is a key that is touched when selecting "timer cooking" in the left heating port 4L. This timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the heating operation time as described above, and the heating operation is executed only during the set time.

The input key 152L is a key that is pressed when selecting the "control menu" to be executed with the left heating port 4L. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus. The "control menu" here includes, for example, boiling water, stewing, frying (automatic cooking), and the like. The driving time, heating power, driving pattern, etc. of the left heating port 4L differ for each control menu.

The control menu in which the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R are operated with the left operating section 15L or the right operating section 15R, and the central operating section 15M is not operated is a "single cooking mode" in which all induction heating is used. This is the control menu of KM3. The "single cooking mode" KM3 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is a key that is pressed to select heating cooking in the left heating port 4L. That is, by pressing the input key 153L, cooking using the left IH coil 9L arranged below the left heating port 4L (in the independent cooking mode KM3) is selected. If the input key 153L is pressed again while the left IH coil 9L is being driven, the driving of the left IH coil 9L is stopped, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are keys that are pressed when specifying the heating power during cooking in the left heating port 4L. By pressing the input key 154L on the left side, the firepower is lowered one step at a time. On the other hand, by pressing the input key 155L on the right side, the firepower can be increased one step at a time. The heating power during induction heating cooking in the left heating port 4L has nine levels from the rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1: 150W) to the rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9: 3200W).

One input key 152L of this left operation unit 15L is set as an input key to be operated immediately after receiving "notice information A" 201 from the communication terminal 200 in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200 described later. has been done. Therefore, when this is operated at a predetermined timing, a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202, which will be described later, functions as a "specific input key" that is transmitted in the confirmation step SP3 (described in FIG. 59). . This point will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. Note that the input key 152L can be operated at any timing even before receiving the notice information A, but if it is operated (ON), the reception restriction period (TZ1: Fig. 45, Fig. 60, Fig. 61) is started.

Next, FIG. 7 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the right display section 16R, the right thermal power display section 17R, and the right operation section 15R according to the first embodiment. The right display section 16R displays information regarding cooking in the right heating port 4R, and is configured with, for example, a liquid crystal display. The information regarding heating cooking in the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display portion 16R is the same as the information regarding heating cooking in the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display section 17R is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in a plurality of stages. The right fire power display section 17R, like the left fire power display section 17L, expresses fire power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation section 15R is used to input operations related to heating and cooking at the right heating port 4R. As shown in FIG. 7, the right operation section 15R includes five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R are configured similarly to the left operation section 15L. For example, the keys are configured with capacitive touch keys that allow input by utilizing changes in capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

Light emitting portions 21R are provided corresponding to the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R, respectively. The light emitting section 21R is a light emitting element (LED), and in response to the operation of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R, the light emitting section 21R corresponding to each input key emits light. However, the two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share one light emitting part 21R because they perform the same function of increasing/decreasing the firepower.

The input key 151R is a key that is pressed when selecting timer cooking in the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is a key that is pressed when selecting a control menu to be executed at the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is a key pressed to select heating cooking in the right heating port 4R. That is, by pressing the input key 153R, cooking using the right IH coil 9R arranged below the left heating port 4R (in the independent cooking mode KM3) is selected. If the input key 153R is pressed again while the right IH coil 9R is being driven, the driving of the right IH coil 9R is stopped, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154R and 154R are keys that are pressed when specifying the heating power during cooking in the right heating port 4R. By pressing the left input key 154R, the firepower is lowered one step at a time. On the other hand, by pressing the right input key 155R, the firepower is increased one step at a time. The heating power during induction heating cooking in the right heating port 4R has nine levels from rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1) of 150W to rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9) of 3200W.

One input key 152R of this right operation section 15R, like the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L, is used to generate a "confirmation signal" (selection information A), which will be described later, in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200, which will be described later. 202 is a "specific input key".

Next, FIG. 8 will be explained.
FIG. 8 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display section 16M displays information and alarms for the entire cooking device 1, and is configured with a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display section 16M shows the selection results of induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, The operating status of each heating means, caution information or warning information regarding cooking by each heating means is displayed.

The central display section 16M is a single liquid crystal display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. 8, it has a first display area 22 on the left side, a second display area 23 on the left and right center, and a third display area 24 on the right side. It has three display areas, and each display area can display a different display.

Further, the three display areas 22 to 24 may be appropriately linked to form one (wide area) display area depending on the display situation, and may display one or more purposes. Note that the first display area 22 will be referred to as a first area 22 below. The second display area 23 will be referred to as a second area 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as a third area 24.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two stages in the front and rear direction, and the lower stage (front side) includes a microwave light emitting element (LED) 310 located behind the character display section "Oven" and a "Grill" display section. A light emitting element (LED) 311 for grilling is located behind the character display area ``Oven'', a light emitting element (LED) 312 for oven is located behind the character display area ``Oven'', and a light emitting element (LED) 312 for oven is located behind the character display area ``Central IH''. A certain central IH light emitting element (LED) 313 is arranged.

At the top (rear side), there are warning letters that say "Be careful of high temperatures," and there are high-temperature warning lights placed below the front of the figure that schematically represents the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R. An element (LED) group 314 is arranged. Note that the LEDs 311 to 313 and the LED group 314 are arranged in an installation space 33 below the top plate 3.

The high temperature caution light emitting element (LED) group 314 is comprised of a heating chamber high temperature caution light emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature caution light emitting element (LED) 314b arranged on the left and right.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is being driven or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher. .

The central operation section 15M is used to input operations mainly related to heating cooking in the heating chamber 6 and heating cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 8, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5).

The nine input keys 151M to 159M described above are capacitive touch keys that generate an input command signal each time a touch operation is performed. Further, a light emitting section 21M is provided near each of these input keys 151M to 159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the leftmost side of the central operation section 15M. This function setting key 151KP is used to enable various operations, displays, etc. of the entire heating cooker 1 to be set as desired by the user US.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function setting mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys).
(2) Interlocking mode setting of the ventilation system (operating the ventilation system in conjunction with the operation of the cooking device 1).
(3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning time of heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (select one maximum power consumption from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W).
(5) Audio settings for audio guide.
(6) Setting the volume of the audio guide.
(7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out the food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 6 (necessity of alarm on the audio notification section 50 and the central display section 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage restriction function by the home power control device).
(9) Set timer cooking time unit (change setting from 1 minute unit to 5 minute or 30 minute unit).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of food inventory information to be acquired from an external device (refrigerator, etc.).
(12) Setting display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in cooperative cooking mode KM1.
(13) Setting display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu (for example, "range grill", "boiled leafy vegetables") of complex cooking mode KM2.
(14) When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after turning on the main power switch 20, the cooking mode settings (cooperative cooking mode KM1 and combined cooking mode KM2) automatically displayed on the central display section 16M display priority between the two parties).
(15) Setting to not automatically display additional information 165, 166 (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, and setting to not notify additional information 165, 166 by voice by the audio notification unit 50.
(16) When displaying individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the central display section 16M, settings for individually displaying the components and nutritional components of the target cooking item (food) each time. Note that either one or both of the food components and nutrients may be used, but in the first embodiment, the input key 158M is used as a food component display command key, and the input key 159M is used as a nutrient component display command key.
When either input key 158M or 159M is operated within a predetermined period, and when voice input mode 1 is set and command is given by voice, food components or nutritional components are displayed. In other words, it is not always displayed simultaneously with the cooking menu identification information 167 (described later), but is displayed in response to the user US's operation (including voice). Details will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.
(17) When selecting an individual cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, settings for searching cooking menu candidates based on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients and displaying them on the central display section 16M. In this case, the user US can press the input key 180 to enter "voice input mode 2" and perform a voice search. Details will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Regarding the setting of a specific cooking menu that should be displayed as a default display, either the food component or the nutritional component should be set as the top priority item for display. By setting this, for example, cooking menus can be displayed in order of nutritional components in descending order of energy amount (calorie value) as shown in FIG. Alternatively, cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

As explained above, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed and the "function setting mode" is selected, it is possible to add the display of food components or nutritional components, and also to display the information once set to be displayed. , it can also be set to be canceled later in function setting mode. Therefore, there is an advantage that the information to be set, the range, and the display method can be selected according to the user US's wishes.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for a person (user US) who is inexperienced in using the heating cooker 1, and when set to this beginner mode, the voice guide in the voice notification section 50 (see FIG. 10) The content becomes more detailed and detailed. Furthermore, regarding input operations on the input operation section 15, the number of voice guides increases, and the amount of display information on the display screen of the central display section 16M increases.

When set to the beginner mode, especially when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the reference information displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (for example, (including additional information 165 and 166, which will be described later), or the content of the audio guide in the audio notification section 50 increases. Therefore, the function that can support the input operation of the user US is enhanced.

Note that in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode," the content of the audio guide of the audio notification section 50 may be automatically set not to be changed. good.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after turning on the main power switch 20, which will be described later, the cooking mode settings automatically displayed on the central display section 16M are the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode. This means setting either one of KM2. Since both the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use one central display section 16M, the user US can set to give priority to the display of either one. This will be explained in detail later.

In the first embodiment, the "complex cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus (for example, a cooking operation called "rice cooking") of the independent cooking mode KM3 by the central IH coil 9M.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 detects the opening of the door 7.
It is assumed that the user US is going to cook using the heating chamber 6, and first selects either the first specific screen 16M1 for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the combined cooking mode KM2. There is a function to automatically display on the central display section 16M.
In addition, on the central display section 16M, immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", a standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later, is displayed. Thereafter, immediately after the door 7 is opened, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M, one specific input key (for example, 154M) other than the function setting key 151KP is "pressed and held" for a certain period of time or more (hereinafter, " You can select one setting menu from the above-mentioned ``function setting menu'' and then change the setting to the desired setting.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are "long pressed" at the same time, one of the above-mentioned "function setting menus" may be called up to change the setting to the desired setting. Can be done.

The "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for 5 seconds or more, for example.
The control device 40 determines whether or not it is in the "long press" state by comparing the timing from ON to OFF of the touch input on the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. Alternatively, the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) inside the central operation section 15 makes the determination.
In this first embodiment, an example will be described (later using FIG. 11) in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether or not the "long press" state is reached.

Furthermore, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing when the two input keys (for example, 154M and 155M) are pressed simultaneously is an “ON” (touch) signal sent from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40. Can be distinguished.

In the following description, an embodiment will be described in which it is determined whether the input operation unit 15M is a "long press" or not. However, although this is not adopted in the first embodiment, the input operation unit 15M measures the time from the time when the "ON" signal changes to the time when the signal changes to "OFF", and transmits the data to the control device 40. There is also a method in which the control device 40 determines whether or not it is a "long press".

Embodiment 1 has a function of determining whether a specific input key (for example, 154M, 153R) is a "long press" as described above, and switching to the "voice input mode 1".
This will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.
Note that a touch operation that is not a "long press", that is, a touch state that continues for less than 5 seconds, for example, may be referred to as a "short press". This is related to the detection ability of each of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, so for example, if the touch time is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 4.9 seconds, it is controlled as a "short press". The device 40 makes the determination.

The type (range) of the inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 331 (not shown) may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods or only to foods that can be heated by a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2). It is to limit.

In the central display section 16M, when the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heating power, time, etc.) of the first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, and third heating means HM3 are selected, the function settings are displayed. The input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled to prevent mode switching.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the user US's home.

In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed using the function setting key 151KP according to the user US's wishes, usage environment (power situation of the home where the cooking device is installed), and the like. Note that when such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the control device 40, so when the user US selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 as described later, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 Used to determine whether to permit the use of (determine permission conditions). Therefore, during the period in which recipe data CD, which will be described later, is being received from the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value cannot be changed using the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11).

In FIG. 8, the light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. That is, when the input function is valid, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
Since the two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M have the same function of changing the display content of the first area 22, they share one light emitting part 21M.

Since the two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M have the same function of changing the display content of the second area 23, they share one light emitting section 21M.
Since the two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M have the same function of changing the display content of the third area 24, they share one light emitting section 21M.

The input key 151M is a start key that is pressed down (touch operated) to start heating cooking, and the input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed down (touch operated) to stop or end heating cooking. It is.

The input key 153M is an input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "first input key") that selects the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

When the input keys 154M and 155M are operated after turning on the main power switch 20 (without pressing the input key 153M), the input keys 154M and 155M select the "compound cooking mode" KM2 (hereinafter referred to as "second input key"). ).

When the input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 7 are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned on (without pressing the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M), the "single cooking mode" KM1 is selected. Input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "third input key").

The input key 151M described above has a function of determining the start of cooking for two types of cooking: "complex cooking mode" KM2 and "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, and may be hereinafter referred to as a "start key." In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function of determining the start of cooking.

The input key 152M described above has a function of ending (including pausing) cooking for the two cooking modes, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, and is hereinafter referred to as the "stop key". There is. In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of determining the end of cooking.

The four input keys 156M to 159M have a function that allows the user US to adjust control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time (within a certain range), and are hereinafter referred to as "condition input keys" or "fourth input key". ” is sometimes called.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also referred to as "voice input switching keys" which can each be switched to the "voice input mode 1". However, these four input keys function as "voice input switching keys" only when the touch operation is a "long press." This point will be explained in detail later with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.

When any one of the independent cooking mode KM3, compound cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, when the "voice input mode 1" is switched, that effect is displayed (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Note that the contents of the independent cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 154M and 155M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and are displayed in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M. This key is used to switch the displayed contents of the screen.

Next, FIG. 9 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed down, that is, operated by the user US, the contents displayed in the first area 22, for example, one control menu ("Microwave Manual") belonging to "Complex Cooking Mode" KM2 is displayed. Information 25A moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "low boiled leafy vegetables" displayed on the front side is displayed in the center. Note that the input key 154M in this case functions as the above-mentioned "short press", and in the case of "long press", it functions as the above-mentioned "voice input switching key". This will be explained in 11.

Furthermore, when the input key 155M is pressed down, the "range manual" display information 25A displayed in the first area 22 moves forward. Along with this, the "warming" display information 25C displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center. Note that unlike the input key 154M, the input key 155M in this case is not the "voice input switching key", so if it is a "long press", it will not be possible to switch to the voice input mode, and it will not be effective. Not accepted as input operation.

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (eg, "range manual") from the "control menu" by operating the input keys 154M and 155M.

Note that the control menu for the above-mentioned "Microwave Manual" originally belongs to the "Single Cooking Mode KM3" that uses only the second heating means HM2, but it also includes the "Combined Cooking Mode M2" and the "Cooperative Cooking Mode". Control menus (of complex cooking) that belong to each mode "KM1" and control menus and cooperative cooking menus that belong to cooperative cooking menus (for example, "hamburger" etc.) are also displayed in the first area 22.

Then, by pressing down the input key (start key) 151M, that is, by operating it by the user US, it is decided to start cooking with "Microwave Manual" in the control menu displayed in the center (see FIG. 9). ), the heating operation is started. That is, the heating means (in this case, the microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Therefore, input keys 154M and 155M correspond to control menu selection keys operated by user US. Similarly, it corresponds to the selection key of the control menu (complex cooking). Furthermore, it also corresponds to the selection key for the cooperative cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 156M and 157M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the second area 23 of the central display section 16M, and are arranged on the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display section 16M. This key is used to switch the displayed content.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 9, when the input key 156M is pressed, the wattage (microwave output value) ("500W" in FIG. 9) displayed in the second area 23 is increased by one step. (for example, to “600W”). Conversely, by pressing the input key 157M, the wattage displayed in the second area 23 is decreased by one step (for example, to "200W").

By operating the input keys 156M and 157M, the user US can set the wattage (microwave output value) can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 158M and 159M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the third area 24 of the central display section 16M, and switch the display contents displayed in the third area 24. This is the key for

As shown in FIG. 8, when the input key 158M is pressed, the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 is increased by one step. Conversely, by pressing the input key 159M, the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 is decreased by one step.

The user US can select the set time for microwave cooking to be performed in the heating chamber 6 by operating the input keys 158M and 159M, and 34M is the set time information. Note that 34W is heating intensity information indicating the magnitude of power consumption, microwave output, etc. during heating. In this figure 9, "500W" is displayed.

Next, FIG. 10 will be explained.
FIG. 10 is a control block diagram showing the main functions of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 10, the cooking device 1 includes a control device 40 that integrally controls the entire cooking device 1. As shown in FIG.

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit that controls the operation of each part constituting the cooking device 1 are mounted. The control device 40 controls the driving of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C based on the operation of the left operation section 15L and the right operation section 15R and the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3. .

The control device 40 controls the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, and the upper The driving of the radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled respectively.

Further, the control device 40 controls the display of the left display section 16L, right display section 16R, left firepower display section 17L, and right firepower display section 17R based on the operations of the left operation section 15L and the right operation section 15R.

Further, the control device 40 controls the display on the central display section 16M and the central heating status display section 17M based on the open signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 and the operations on the left operation section 15L, right operation section 15R, and center operation section 15M. Control.

The control device 40 stores data such as various programs and parameters used to control the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and each display section 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, 17R. It has a storage device 41 that stores display control data (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data") to be displayed on the screen. Further, the control device 40 activates the audio notification section 50 as necessary to notify the user US of the operating status of the cooking device 1 by voice.

The control device 40 causes the recipe data storage section 42 of the storage device 41 to store data in which information such as various programs and parameters used for cooking control by the heating control section 43 is summarized in a certain format. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, in the heating cooker 1, recipe data CD corresponding to each of a total of eight cooking menus is prepared from the beginning in order to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The recipe data CD and the "display condition data" can be acquired by the cooking device 1 from an external device such as the communication terminal 200 for each cooking menu.

42 is a storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and display condition data. Note that the storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) within the storage device 41, or may be configured separately from the storage device 41 in terms of hardware.

43 is a heating control unit that integrally controls the entire heating operation of the cooking device 1, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
53 is a data acquisition unit, which can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. Further, the display condition data may be acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51.

Reference numeral 51 denotes a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside, and as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, has a function of wirelessly communicating with the communication terminal 200 330 (330BT). Alternatively, it has a function of wirelessly communicating with the cloud server 300 via the network NW.
The communication unit 51 includes at least two communication units, a first communication unit 51B (not shown) and a second communication unit 51W (not shown), each of which is compatible with a communication method, as will be described later. The first communication unit 51B uses Bluetooth (registered trademark) as the communication method with the communication terminal 200, so it is compatible with this communication method. Further, since the second communication unit 51W (not shown) uses a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) as a communication method with the wireless router 340, it is compatible with this communication method. It has a function.

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determining unit, which performs a process of determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a power supply circuit, which supplies power at a constant voltage to the control device 40. 20 is a main power switch inserted into this power supply circuit 57, and is opened and closed by the user US.

55 is a restriction unit 55 that restricts acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 is configured such that the data acquisition unit 53 receives the recipe via the communication unit 51 during a standby period before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (that is, before “cooking process 1” to be described later). It has a function to restrict the acquisition of data CDs.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. Has a function.
Note that the restriction unit 55 may be realized by one control program of a computer (not shown) that constitutes the control device 40, and it is not necessarily necessary to configure it separately from the control device 40 in hardware. .

As shown in FIG. 10, the input operation section 15 includes an audio signal receiving section 56 that receives the voice emitted by the user US with a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined audio signal.

On the other hand, the control device 40 includes an audio signal analysis section 58 that receives the audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with information in the audio database stored in the storage device 41, and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing section. The input processing section 70 receives an input signal from the input operation section 15 and switches its own input reception mode to "voice input mode 1." It also controls the input signal analysis section 52. Furthermore, upon receiving the analysis result from the audio signal analysis section 58, control data is transmitted to the heating control section 43.

In FIG. 10, 59 is a human sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that radiates ultrasonic waves or infrared rays in front of the heating cooker 1 and receives the reflected input. Note that a dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiver is not provided, and the control device 40 analyzes the received signal and determines whether there is a person present.

As shown by the broken line frame in FIG. 10, the audio notification section 50, the display section 16, etc. may be collectively referred to as the "notification section", and in this case, the reference numeral 90 is used.
26 is a light emission control section. This light emission control section controls light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission of a light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged in the light emitting part 21 (21M, 21L, 21R) and a light emitting element 27B arranged in the input key 154M is controlled by the light emission control part 26. When two or more light-emitting elements 27 with different light-emitting colors are arranged in one place, depending on the light-emitting state of the plurality of light-emitting elements, a visual effect such as a change in the light-emitting color may be created for the user US. be.

In FIG. 10, 52 is an input signal analysis section that analyzes the input signal from the input operation section 15.
The input signal analysis section 52 individually analyzes each input signal transmitted from the right operation section 15R, left operation section 15L, and central operation section 15M. In particular, this input signal analysis section 52 has a determination function of determining whether or not the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to audio input mode) MC1 has been received. When it is determined that the input mode switching command (voice input mode compatible signal) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from "touch input mode" to "voice input mode 1".

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" will be referred to as the "voice input mode corresponding signal MC1." Note that when the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode compatible signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to shift to a voice input standby state (for example, starts a dedicated voice analysis program). ).

As described in FIG. 7, the right operation section 15R includes various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 152R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press"; The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the left operation section 15R includes various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 152L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press"; The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M includes various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when touching the input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press". The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Next, FIG. 11 will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation section 15M. Note that the description of the audio signal receiving section 56 explained in FIG. 10 is omitted. Note that the right operation section 15R and left operation section 15L have basically the same configuration as the central operation section 15M.

In FIG. 11, 15A is an input key identification section. The input key identifying section 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when the input key 153M is touched, a unique identification signal of the input key is generated. Further, when the input key 154M is touched, a unique identification signal of the input key is generated.

15B is a touch detection section. When the fingertip FG of the user US or the like approaches the touch electrode part, the detection circuit emits an "ON" signal, and when it moves away, it emits an "OFF" signal.
15T is a time measuring section. The time measurement unit 15T measures the elapsed time from the time of the “ON” signal of the touch detection unit 15B to the time of the change to the “OFF” signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination section. The input mode determining unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measuring unit 15T, and determines the "voice input mode 1" if the time is 5 seconds or more, with the threshold of 5 seconds being the boundary as described above. It is determined that If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press" operation.

The input mode determining unit 15C transmits to the control device 40 a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result as to whether or not the mode is "audio input mode 1".

15D is a storage section. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. described above, program information for determination processing, and the like.

15E is a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmitter 15F transmits the above-described unique identification signal of the input key and the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the above-mentioned input key of the control device 40. It is transmitted to the input signal analysis section 58.

In FIG. 11, the touch detection section 15A, time measurement section 15T, input mode determination section 15C, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but instead of having separate hardware configurations, for example, one micro Each of these functions may be realized by computer software.

Although FIG. 11 illustrates an example of the central operation section 15M, the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L. Therefore, in the input key identification section 15A of the right operation section 15R, the signal from the input key includes data that identifies the input key existing on the right operation section 15R. This also applies to the left operation section 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 described in FIGS. 10 and 11 has the following features:
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating the object to be heated on the top plate 3;
A heating chamber 6 whose wall surface is made of metal,
a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 that heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
A notification section 90;
Communication department 51;
Display section 16;
The configuration includes a control device 40.

,
After displaying the standby initial screen 16MH (described in FIG. 41) on the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays display screens dedicated to each cooking mode (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3). do. The first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22 and FIG.

There are three types of cooking modes. In other words, they are the independent cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The independent cooking mode KM3 has the following three types.
(1) IH-only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently (2) Microwave-only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated independently (3) IH-only mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated independently Oven independent cooking mode to operate

The composite cooking mode KM2 means heating cooking in the heating chamber 6 by heating both the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically changing the operation timings. This is the heating pattern to be used.

The cooperative cooking mode KM1 means that the length of the second heating means HM2 and/or the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 is determined by a command from the user US. This is a heating pattern that is sequentially operated after a transition period TR.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 described above.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51.

In the input operation section 15, "voice input mode 2" can be selected using an input key 180 provided on the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation section 15M, right operation section 15R, and left operation section 15L, certain input keys (152L, 152R, 153M, 154M) are "long press" which is one of the touch modes. "Voice input mode 1" can be selected depending on the state.

(3. Configuration of control menu of central operation unit)
Next, the control menu displayed on the central display section 16M and selectable by the central operation section 15M will be described with reference to FIG. 12.

FIG. 12 shows the entire control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M.
The control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M are an RG (range grill) menu group that uses one or both of the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

FIG. 13 shows the control menu shown in FIG. 12 classified into four viewpoints (classifications 1 to 4). As is clear from FIG. 13, the control menu is roughly divided into a single cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Although the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is not shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central operation unit 15M can execute a cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned ON and the input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 (see FIG. 15).
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "Warming" described in the "Left display area" in FIG. 12 is always displayed first. This is because the control menu "warming" is set as the default.

The "left display area" in FIG. 12 is a display area corresponding to the first area 22 described in FIG. 8. That is, the various control menus listed in the "left display area" in FIG. 12 are sequentially displayed in the first area 22.

As described in the "left display area" in Figure 12, in addition to "warming", "manual microwave", "sub-boiling leafy vegetables", "sub-boiling root vegetables", "defrosting meat", and "microwave grill (RG ) Cooking'', ``Microwave Grill (RG) Reheat'', ``Range Grill (RG) Manual'', ``Grill'', ``Oven'', ``IH Keep Warm'', ``IH Cooking Rice'', and ``IH Heating'', 13 in total. There is a control menu.

The control menus include "warming", "manual microwave", "boiling leafy vegetables", "boiling root vegetables", "defrosting meat", "microwave grill (RG) cooking", "microwave grill (RG) reheating", “Range grill (RG) manual,” “grill,” and “oven” are included in the RG menu group.
Furthermore, "IH warming", "IH cooking rice", and "IH heating" are included in the "IH menu group" that uses the first heating means HM1.

The contents written in the "center display area" in FIG. 12 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the center display section 16M, and include the temperature, time, firepower, "high", "low", etc. during cooking. This relates to adjusting the heating situation. In other words, various control conditions are described in the "center display area". The contents of the default settings for this "center display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "center display area."

The contents written in the "right display area" in FIG. 12 indicate the contents displayed in the third area 24 of the central display section 16M. The contents of the default settings for the "right display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "right display area." Blank areas do not mean control conditions that can be changed, and no information is displayed, or appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (for the user US) is displayed in the third area 24. It means to be done.

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 12 will be explained.
(1) Warming: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" method is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is 80°C, microwave heating will automatically stop when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user US before starting heating. As shown in the center display area of FIG. 12, for example, the range from 0° C. to 90° C. can be set in 5° increments.

(2) Manual microwave heating: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: Use microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) to cook food in the heating chamber 6, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, for example, leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage. It is suitable for boiling. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the object to be cooked in real time and automatically stops the process.

(4) Root vegetable boiling: This is suitable for boiling the food in the heating chamber 6, especially root vegetables such as roots, underground rhizomes, and potatoes, using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). be.

(5) Meat thawing: This is suitable for thawing various kinds of meat frozen in the heating chamber 6.
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: Combination of microwave heating using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and oven heating using upper radiant heat heating means 12a and lower radiant heat heating means 12b The food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 is then heated and cooked.

(7) Range grill (RG) re-cooking: This is suitable for reheating the cooked food in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range grill (RG) manual: The user US selects microwave heating or oven heating as appropriate to cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This grill heats the food in the heating chamber 6 using one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. In other words, this is a control menu using the third heating means HM3.

"Grill" in the control menu does not control the temperature of the heating chamber 6, nor does it control to stop the heating operation upon detecting a rise in the temperature of the food to be cooked. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: This oven heats the food in the heating chamber 6 using one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by the thermistor sensor 14, and the energization of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature.

(11) IH heat retention: Heating is performed to maintain the object to be heated, such as a pot, located above the central heating port 4C at the temperature set by the user US. The thermal power of induction heating is low to medium from 200 W to 750 W, and the temperature of the object to be heated is detected in real time by a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C. Based on the detected temperature, the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 controls the thermal power. Note that the default temperature is 80° C. as shown in FIG. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup etc. warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heating is performed according to the total number (cooked rice amount) set by the user US. The thermal power used for induction heating ranges from low thermal power to high thermal power from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated (also referred to as overheating state, the same applies hereinafter). The control device 40 reduces the thermal power and stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heating is performed according to the heating power of induction heating set by the user US. There are five levels of firepower that can be set: firepower 1: 200W, firepower 2: 500W, firepower 3: 750W, firepower 4: 1000W, and firepower 5: 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated. When an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 controls the reduction of the heating power or the heating operation. A stop is made. Note that the default thermal power is 500W.

Next, FIG. 13 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a classification table of the RG control menu ("RG menu group" in FIG. 12) and the IH control menu ("IH menu group" in FIG. 12) for the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1. .

The "left display area" of the first region in FIG. 12 means the first area 22 (see FIG. 8). As is clear from classification 2 in FIG. 13, the name of the control menu is also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and is used for the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 14 will be explained.
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the complex cooking mode and the correspondence of input keys.
"Information indicating the main points of each control menu" shown in category 2 in FIG. 13 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage section 42, as shown in FIG.

Therefore, by operating the input keys 154M and 155M and selecting the desired control menu, each of the control menus shown in Category 2 in FIG. Information indicating the main points of the control menu can also be displayed automatically or optionally by the user US. FIG. 15 shows an example of this automatic display.

Next, FIG. 15 will be explained.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation on the central display section 16M when the central operation section 15M is operated.
First, when the user US presses the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10) to turn on the main power, the input functions of the left operation section 15L, center operation section 15M, and right operation section 15R are enabled. Become. That is, the control device 40 is in a state where it accepts operation signals from each of these operation sections 15L, 15M, and 15R, and a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as "standby initial screen" 16MH) is displayed on the central display section 16M, although not shown. ) (see FIG. 41) is displayed.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, a display screen 15ST is displayed as shown in FIG. 15.
FIG. 15 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 15ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warming" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 22 in the front-rear direction.

Behind the identification information 160 of the control menu "Warming" displayed in the center of the first area 22, the characters "IH heating" (identification information of the control menu) 161 are displayed, and on the front side are the characters "Microwave oven". The text "Manual" (control menu identification information) 162 is displayed in a slightly smaller size.

This shows that when the user US selects the control menu, the next candidates are "IH heating" and "manual microwave". At this stage, if the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 for "Range manual" is moved (backwards) to the position of the characters "Warming" (control menu identification information) 160. Displayed large. Note that the characters of the identification information 162 of the control menu have not actually moved, but only the displayed information has been switched.

Also, when the input key 155M is pressed once, the characters "IH heating" (identification information on the control menu) 161 move (forward) to the position of the characters "warming" (identification information on the control menu) 160. is displayed in a larger size. In this case as well, the identification information 162 of the control menu has not actually moved, but only the displayed information has been switched.

As shown in FIG. 15, the target temperature "80° C." is displayed in the second area 23 of the display screen 15ST. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature of the food to be cooked is 80° C., the microwave heating is automatically stopped.

If you want to change the temperature displayed in the second area 23 to change the temperature at which the automatic stop occurs, you only need to operate the input key 156M or 157M, and when you press this input key 156M once, the display screen 15UP1 will appear. When the temperature rises by 5°C to 85°C and the input key 157M is pressed once, the temperature drops by 5°C to 75°C as shown on the display screen 15DN1.

Further, in the second area 23, a heat source display section 163 is displayed that displays in text that the heat source is microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

Reference numeral 164 is reference information that automatically displays a recommended control menu for warming side dishes, etc., as described above. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 165, and two or more types of information are displayed alternately or sequentially for several seconds each on the display screen (for example, the third area 24) of the central display section 16M. It may be displayed.

Further, as shown in Category 2 in FIG. 13, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time in response to the operation of the input key 158 or 159.
That is, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the user US from being confused about whether to select each control menu (for example, "warm"), the control menu (for example, "warm") and the Reference information 164 is displayed.

Furthermore, when reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. 15, if one of the (two) input keys 158M or 159M located in front of the reference information 164 is touched, Instead of the reference information 164, more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24.

As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of heating means having different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or are automatically switched with a time difference. The above-mentioned "complex cooking mode" KM2 is a mode in which the cooking device is driven and heats and cooks a common object to be cooked.

In FIG. 15, the display screen shown on the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "compound cooking mode" KM2, and is referred to as a second specific screen 16M2.

Next, FIGS. 16 to 22 will be explained.
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display section 16M and the central operation section 15M in the complex cooking mode KM2. The operating procedure before starting the heating operation is shown.

In FIG. 16, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 is started, and the input key 154M or 155M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) is displayed as shown in FIG. The screen switches to a second specific screen 16M2. In other words, this is a setting operation scene for the "compound cooking mode" KM2 such as an individual cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking.

If the input key 153M is pressed before the input key 154M or 155M, the input process changes to the cooperative cooking mode KM1. That is, from that stage, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) switches to the first specific screen 16M1 (see FIGS. 19 to 22).

When you press either the input key 154M or 155M with your fingertip FG as described above, the first area 22 of the display screen (second specific screen) 16M2 of the central display section 16M displays the objects of multiple complex cooking modes KM2. Three control menu candidates are displayed.
That is, three pieces of identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 160, 161, and 162 for identifying the three control menus on a one-to-one basis are displayed. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one control menu is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A."

In FIG. 16, there are three control menus displayed on the central display section 16M. That is, "warming", "IH heating", and "manual microwave". The number of control menus in this way is called "the number of control menus for complex cooking."

In this Embodiment 1, the positions where the identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B" and "display position C," respectively.

In the first embodiment, the control menu displayed at "display position A" ("warming" in FIG. 16) has the highest selection priority. That is, when the input key 151M is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 16, the heating operation is started with "warm".

In FIG. 16, when the input key 154M to the right of the input key 155M is touched (normal "short press" operation), "range manual" is displayed at display position A.

Further, to change the target temperature of 85° C. in “warming”, touch the input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if you use a "long press" instead of the usual "short press" operation, you can only perform normal temperature change inputs. In other words, the change to voice input mode 2 cannot be performed using the input keys 156M and 157M.

In FIG. 16, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 153M has a star shape, which means that the light emitting section 21M blinks (or emits light in a different color from other light emitting sections). ), indicating that it can be operated.

As is clear from FIG. 16, at the stage of displaying the control menu in the first area 22, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M is still blinking (or has a color different from the other light emitting sections). does not emit light). In other words, this indicates that input operations are not possible.

Next, FIG. 17 will be explained.
As is clear from FIG. 17, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M blinks (or in a color different from the other light emitting sections). This indicates that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

In addition, in FIG. 17, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is surrounded by a circle with a broken line, which means that the light emitting section 21M blinks (or emits light in a different color from other light emitting sections). This indicates that the machine is waiting for an instruction to start cooking.

By the way, in FIG. 17, when the input key 154M, which is one of the "audio input switching keys", is touched, if the touch state is "long press", a button is displayed surrounding the touch part of the input key 154M. , a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to "audio input mode 1" is displayed by the light emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10). In other words, a light emitting element 27B such as an LED (see FIG. 10) disposed below the top plate 3 lights up in response to a signal from the light emission control section 26, and a frame as shown in FIG. 17 is displayed at the input key 154M. Display. Alternatively, the entire touch part of the input key 154M is illuminated from below so that it can be clearly distinguished from other input keys.

At the time when the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 has already input the "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which is a lower command of the control menu (e.g. "warming"), by voice. It is in a state (hereinafter also referred to as an "input standby state") in which the signal is accepted via the signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10).

Therefore, instead of inputting the control conditions by touching the input keys 156M or 157M, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.

Next, FIG. 18 will be explained.
As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M blinks (or emits light in a different color from the other light emitting sections). ) have not. In other words, these input keys are not recommended for inputting control conditions such as heating time and temperature. However, when switching to "Voice input mode 1", the input functions of input keys that are not necessary for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, (if set to voice input mode 1A) b) Input by touch operation is not possible with the input keys 156M and 157M.
In addition, in order to maintain the touch input function of a specific input key (156M, etc.) for inputting control conditions even after switching to the voice input mode, it is necessary to switch to the "voice input mode 1B". It is necessary to set it.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 of the audio input mode 1 is displayed in the wide display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

The auxiliary information 179 includes three types: voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is accepted because the mode is voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C indicating the range and numerical values of control conditions that can be input. be.

The information 179B is the condition shown in "Area 2" explained in FIG. 12. In other words, this indicates that the user US can only select within the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in "Area 2" also explained in FIG. 12. In other words, the user US can only select temperatures within the range of -10°C to 0°C in the "warming" control menu for heating frozen foods with microwaves.

The auxiliary information 179 (179A to 179C) shown in FIG. 18 allows the user US to input by voice, and by indicating in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice, it is possible to prevent unnecessary voice input or inappropriate conditions. Vocalization etc. can be avoided, and as a result, the operability of the user US is improved.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 of the voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the wide display area that combines the second area 23 and the third area 24. In this state, the conditions for starting the heating operation are not met.
In other words, the state in FIG. 18 does not recommend pressing down (touch operation) the input key (start key) 151M as shown in FIG. 17. Therefore, the light emitting section 21M is not in a state where it emits light (blinks).

In other words, in the first embodiment, after switching to the voice input mode, the heating operation cannot be started if the predetermined control conditions are not input (the state shown in FIG. 18).

Next, FIGS. 19 to 22 will be explained.
FIG. 19 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display section 16M and the central operation section 15M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. The operating procedure before starting the heating operation is shown.

In FIG. 19, when the main power switch 20 is turned ON to start the control device 40 and press the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 40) is displayed. The screen switches to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in FIG.

If the input key 154M or 155M is pressed before the input key 153M, as shown in FIG. 16, the input process is changed to the composite cooking mode KM2, and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.

In addition, even if the input key 155M or 156M is pressed first and the setting operation for "combined cooking mode" KM2 such as individual cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking is completed halfway, the input key 155M or 156M If the step is before pressing 151M, the step changes from the step of pressing input key 153M to the input step for "cooperative cooking mode" KM3. That is, from this stage, only the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

FIG. 19 shows a state immediately after pressing the input key 153M, in which identification information 167 of a specific default cooking menu (eg, hamburger steak) is displayed in the first area 22.

If you touch the input key 153M and then the input key 154M or 155M, the first area 22 of the display screen (first specific screen) 16M1 of the central display section 16M displays the targets of multiple cooperative cooking modes KM1. Further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 168 or 169 for identifying the food to be cooked (which is a cooperative cooking menu) is displayed.

In FIG. 19, the number of "items to be cooked" that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are three items: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef, and this number of items to be cooked is called the "number of linked cooking menus."

In this first embodiment, there are a total of eight cooperative cooking menus. Details will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. However, it is possible to further increase the "number of cooperative cooking menus" by acquiring a recipe data CD from a smartphone (communication terminal) 200, which will be described later.

In FIG. 19, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, and in this Embodiment 1, the information indicates the names of the foods to be cooked (for example, hamburger, gratin, and roast beef) on a one-to-one basis. In addition, when explaining all the identification information of the cooperative cooking menu KM1, the reference numeral 167 is used.

The position where the identification information 160 of the control menu explained with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 is displayed was called "display position A."
On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed is also the display position A.

In the first embodiment, the identification information 160 and the identification information 167 are displayed at the same "display position A", but they may be set at different positions. However, in order to avoid confusion for the user US, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the eight cooperative cooking menus are always in the same position (display position A). Further, even in the complex cooking mode KM2, it is preferable to always use the same (single) "display position A" in each control menu.

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process automatically advances to the next step and switches to the display screen shown in FIG. 20.
FIG. 20 will be explained.
In FIG. 20, heating section specifying sections 171L and 171R are displayed in the first specifying screen 16M1. Therefore, if the user US operates the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right sides, he can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L. In addition, in this Embodiment 1, the left heating part 4L is set by default, and operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In FIG. 20, as the operation support information 170, "When you press the start button, heating of the left IH will start" is displayed. This means that by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (cooking process 1) can be started in the left IH coil 9L (in the cooperative cooking mode KM1). However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 153L on the left operation section 15L after pressing the input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 20, above the identification information 167 shown on the first specific screen 16M1 (in the rear position in plan view), identification information 168 indicating the name of another food (for example, gratin) is displayed. has been done.

Further, below the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another food (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 20, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is surrounded by a broken circle, which means that the light emitting section 21M blinks (or emits light in a different color from other light emitting sections). , indicates that the machine is waiting for an instruction to start cooking.

Each time one of the input keys 154M and 155M is operated, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) is sequentially moved upward or downward by one step. The display changes. In other words, the identification information 167 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front and rear center position) of the first area 22, in other words, at the display position B by forward and backward movement.

In this first embodiment, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, as described above. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 155M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 for one item to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak) completes one cycle. Conversely, if the input key 154M on the right side is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one item to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak) goes through one cycle.

By the way, after selecting the cooking menu (e.g. hamburger), as described above, after selecting the left and right heating sections 4L and 4R or inputting the control conditions (e.g. preheating temperature), the command to start the heating operation is input. It must be given with key 151M.

To input the left and right heating sections 4L, 4R and control conditions (for example, preheating temperature) as described above, it is necessary to individually press either the input key 154M or 155M many times, so the user US will require touch operations many times. This also applies to the above-mentioned composite cooking mode KM2. For example, as explained in FIG. 12, the temperature setting for "warming" can be selected within the range of 0 to 90 degrees Celsius, but both the input keys 156M and 157M can be set to Since it is only possible to input an increase (or decrease) by a degree, for example, to input 15 degrees, it is necessary to perform a touch operation three times (a "short press").

Therefore, in this first embodiment, in order to reduce troublesome input operations, in this cooperative cooking mode KM1, the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is stored in the first area 22 as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20. While displayed at the predetermined position B, the mode can be changed to voice input mode using the input key 154M.

As described above, when the input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, if the touch state is "long press", the touch part of the input key 154M is surrounded as shown in FIG. A mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed.

FIG. 21 will be explained.
At the timing when the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. It may be displayed on the specific screen 16M1.

The state shown in FIG. 21 is a state in which the left and right heating sections 4L and 4R have not yet been selected. However, in this state shown in FIG. 21, if the user US inputs setting information such as "left IH" by voice, the left heating The fact that the mouth 4L has been selected is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.
The following FIG. 22 shows an example where the function is set to automatically select the left heating section 4L. As shown in FIG. 22, the automatic selection result of the left heating port 4L is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 22, one light emitting part 21M corresponding to the input key 151M blinks (or emits light in a different color from the other light emitting parts) as surrounded by a broken line circle, and The state waits for a command to start, so if the input key 151M is pressed, the heating cooking operation is started.

Next, FIG. 23 will be explained.
In FIG. 23(A), FG indicates the fingertip of the user US. Each time the input key 155M is pressed, the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 change as shown in the display screens 23A to 23D, as shown in FIG. 23(B).

As described above, the user US sets the function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) using the input operation section 15 in advance, and operates a plurality of input keys on the input operation section 15 during the function setting mode. When displaying individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the central display section 16M, settings can be made to prioritize display of either food components or nutritional components.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for a "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
Therefore, it is preferable to set in advance so that the food ingredient display mode can be automatically selected by "long pressing" a specific input key (for example, 156M) other than the function setting key 151KP. For example, for one setting menu (for example, hamburger) in the above-mentioned "function setting menu", the display screen is set to automatically display "food ingredient display" and "nutritional ingredient display".

Furthermore, when the display screen is displayed for setting such "food composition display" or "nutritional composition display", one specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (for example, any one of 156M, 157M, etc.) is pressed. 1), it may be possible to change the conditions for setting "food ingredient display" or "nutritional ingredient display" or to cancel the settings. For example, it may be possible to set it so that only "iron" among nutrients and "energy (calorie equivalent value)" among components are displayed as a specific range.

For this reason, if the function setting key 151KP is set to give priority to either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients and to display them preferentially based on that, the display shown in FIG. 23(A) "Hamburger" is not always displayed first.

Meanwhile, as described above, by pressing the input key 180, the user US can search for a cooking menu by voice. Therefore, if a voice input such as "menu with a small calorie value" is performed at the stage shown in FIG. 23, the cooking menu with the smallest calorie value (energy amount) among the eight cooking menus will be displayed on the first specific screen. 16M1, it is displayed at a predetermined position in the first area 22 (front and rear central position, that is, the above-mentioned "display position A").

For example, in FIG. 23, three types of cooking menus are displayed: gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef. Therefore, if the input key 180 is pressed at this point, the voice input mode 2 is entered. After this, the user US may give a voice input of "low calorie menu". Incidentally, the energy content (unit: kilocalories) per 100g of weight is approximately 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), 223 for hamburger steak, and 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as the "menu with the smallest calorie value" among these three.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 23, the input key 154M may be "long pressed" to switch to voice input mode 1, and a menu with a small calorie value may be extracted by voice input.

Next, FIG. 24 will be explained.
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section 16M in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and is an example in which standard components and nutritional components for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking menus, are displayed. It is.

In the stages shown in FIGS. 20 to 23, when the user US issues a command to display either food components or nutritional components using voice input, or when the operation support information 170 is displayed (see FIG. 20) ), when the input key 158M or 159M is touched, the first specific screen 16M1 is temporarily switched to the display screens shown in FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B). When the input key 158M is pressed, the display of food components is commanded.

In the following description, the display screen in FIG. 24(A) will be referred to as a "food component display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen in FIG. 24(B) will be referred to as a "nutritional component display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, if the user US issues some command by voice input, or if one of the input keys 158M and 159M is operated one more time during the certain period of time (10 seconds), the original first The display program of the control device 40 specifies that the state of the specific screen 16M1 be restored.

FIG. 25 will be explained.
FIG. 25 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 and the operation support information 170 (see FIG. 20).

As can be seen from FIG. 25, there are two types of operation support information 170: operation support information A and operation support information B. One information is ``Press the start button to start heating the left IH'' and the other information is ``Press the start button to determine.'' This "start button" refers to the input key 151M.
The data in the list shown in FIG. 25 is stored in the storage device 41 of the control device 40.

As shown in Figure 25, for each item to be cooked (cooking menu), the "specific input keys" that the user US needs to operate when cooking using the recipe data CD are determined in advance. This information is also stored in the storage device 41. For example, in the case of "hamburger", there are two specific input keys, 152L and 152R. That is, there are two input keys in total: the input key 152R of the right heating section 15R and the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L. Note that it is not possible to select both, and if either one is selected, the specific input key selection process is completed.

The two types of operation support information 170 described above are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, FIG. 26 will be explained.
In this first embodiment, a "cooperative preheating cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
There are two types of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

An example of a cooking menu using the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak", the preheating step is performed by the first heating means HM1.

When the cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being executed, the heating operation of the preheating process has not been stopped at the time when the cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3, which are in charge of the cooking process 1, are performed in parallel during the same time period. It turns out.

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (in the above explanation, the first heating means HM1) that has started operating before the cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking process 1, During the cooking process 1, one or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 may be energized.

The following description will be made on the assumption that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, unless there is a particular contradiction.

At the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1, when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display section 16M, the left operation section 15L of the left IH coil 9L is activated for other cooking menus. becomes unusable (also called "occupied state").

Specifically, at least the input key 153L among the various input keys of the left operation section 15L is disabled by the heating control section 43. This "invalidation" means that a valid command signal is not transmitted to the heating control unit 43 from the input key 153L, and that even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the heating control unit 43 does not receive the command signal. This has the meaning of not processing it as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation section 15R of the right heating port 4R may be disabled (by "invalidating" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has set the function in advance on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 151KP) so as not to perform this "invalidation", the right IH coil 9R may be set in other control menus. If the right IH coil 9R has already been used for this purpose (the heating operation is continuing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is determined that it cannot be used due to the fact that it has been used previously (by the heating control unit 43).

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1. Furthermore, when viewed from the entire first heating source HM1, the use of only a portion of the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R (left IH coil 9L) is "restricted". Note that when the right IH coil 9R is not in use for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be kept occupied.

Continuing to explain FIG. 26.
This FIG. 26 shows the operation steps when "karaage" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. In FIG. 26, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and changes in the state of the cooking device 1. In FIG.

The "karaage" shown in FIG. 26 differs from the above-mentioned "hamburger steak" in that the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6, and the cooking process 2 is performed in the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 26, in order to cook "karaage", the user US first selects the left IH coil 9L and presses the input key 151L before starting cooking process 1. Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 is started. The object to be heated N in this case is a metal pot, frying pan, etc., and is filled with a certain amount or more of edible oil.

On the other hand, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and puts ingredients for "karaage" (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M.

At this point, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) is activated and cooking process 1 of microwave heating cooking is started. Then, notification 1 of reference information is performed.

The notification 1 is to notify the time until the end of heating, for example, "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is 0 minutes." Alternatively, if control is performed to detect the temperature of the food to determine the heating end time, information indicating the target temperature may be notified, such as "Heating to 〇〇℃", for example.

Also, during this cooking step 1, preheating of the left IH coil 9L is completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to 180° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of the preheating is notified to the user US by voice and text by the voice notification section 51 and the central display section 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (#2).

The user US can stop the microwave heating at any time during the cooking process 1. To stop it, just open door 7. Note that microwave heating can be temporarily stopped by pressing the input key 152M of the central operation section 15M only once. However, if the input key 152M is pressed twice in a short period of time, the cooking mode will be canceled, and the selection of "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode will be cancelled.

When the door 7 is opened, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking process 1 is completed (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated, which is now preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started using the left heating port 4L (#5).
In the cooking process 2, the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) of the left operation part 15L is pressed first before starting preheating, so there is no need to operate the left operation part 15L at the start of this cooking process 2. . In other words, when the food (karaage ingredients) is moved into an object to be heated that has been preheated to 180°C, heating of the food starts at the temperature of the object to be heated (this point is when the cooking process begins). 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to particularly operate the input operation section 15 to start the cooking process 2 (#5).
The point at which the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated is the start point of cooking process 2, but as the food to be cooked is placed, the temperature of the food to be heated may temporarily change. The temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 10) may detect that the temperature has dropped to 1, and electrically determine the starting point of the cooking process 2.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user US operating the left operating section 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the user presses the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M to start cooking process 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

In this case, in order to prevent the microwave heating etc. from being performed without putting the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6 (so-called "dry cooking"), the door 7 is opened once after the cooking process 1 is finished, and then the Only when it is detected (by the opening/closing detection unit 10 of the door 7) that the door 7 has been closed again can the input key 151M be pressed to start the heating operation. Further, the timing of operating the input key 151M may be limited to a certain period of time (for example, 3 minutes) from the end of the cooking process 1, or a certain period of time (for example, 2 minutes) from the time when the door 7 is opened and closed again. (minutes) to improve safety.

When a predetermined time (TN5) has elapsed since the cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 was started by the user US's operation input A26, the operation support information 170 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. will be held. You will also be notified by voice.

The audio notification is information that includes guidance such as, for example, "Heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set a time." Furthermore, since the user US knows that the final cooking process is finished, he or she can start preparations for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 6 from the time when the operation support information 170 is reported. Further, in synchronization with this, the contents of the operation support information 170 are displayed in characters or the like on the central display section 16M. Note that the operation support information 170 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, as in the example shown in FIG.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking process 3 ends (#7). Note that this cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately if the user US opens the door 7.
After this, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated, which is now preheated on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the object to be heated is maintained in a heated state by induction heating until the end of cooking step 3, induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (#9).

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation section 15L. That is, the operation A28 of the user US at this point is to press the input key 153L of the left operation section 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 26 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1.
That is, without waiting for the completion of preheating by induction heating or the notification of completion of preheating, the food (food to be cooked) is placed in the heating chamber 6 and the cooking process 1 is started at a point before that.

Since the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred to the food to be heated on the top plate 3 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and the food is cooked. Step 2 can begin.

In the example of "karaage" in FIG. 26, there is a cooking step 3, but the cooking step 3 and the cooking step 4 are not always necessary. The cooking process may be completed as necessary depending on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user US.

In addition, in FIG. 26, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking process 2 is finished, but after finishing cooking process 2, the left IH coil is activated by the left operation part 15L. You can stop driving 9L at any time. However, as indicated by the broken line frame in FIG. 26, if the left IH coil 9L is further used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIG. 27 will be explained.
Similar to FIG. 26, FIG. 27 shows the operation steps when "karaage" is selected as the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
In FIG. 27, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and changes in the state of the cooking device 1, as explained in FIG. Other symbols correspond to those in FIG. 26.

The difference between this FIG. 27 and the above-mentioned FIG. 26 will be explained.
FIG. 27 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 6 after waiting for the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 and its notification (#2).

When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R, and when the user US is notified by voice by the voice notification section 50, Open the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and put the ingredients for "karaage" (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, the user presses the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M.

At this point, cooking process 1 of microwave cooking is started. Then, the notification 1 of reference information is performed. The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 26.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 27, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 is longer than that in FIG. 26.

However, since heating of the food (food to be cooked) is started in the heating chamber 6 after waiting for the completion of preheating by the first heating means HM1 or notification of the completion of preheating, when the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 6 is completed, If the food to be cooked is moved, there is a guarantee that the cooking process 2 can be started immediately by the first heating means HM1. Therefore, this method is suitable for users US who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

Although FIG. 27 shows that the "driving period of the left IH coil 9L" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished, the first heating means HM1 is not activated after the cooking process 2 is finished. When not in use, the drive of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time after the completion of the cooking process 2 using the left operation section 15L. However, as indicated by the broken line frame in FIG. 27, if the left IH coil 9L is further used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

In FIGS. 26 and 27, the first heating means HM1 is first energized to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6.
The "cooperative preheating cooking mode" KM4 of the first embodiment is not limited to such a mode in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber.

In another cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, first the heating operation by the first heating means HM1 is started, and the object to be heated such as a frying pan is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180°C) until the target temperature is reached. In this method, the object to be cooked is placed on top of the object to be heated, and then the cooking process 1 is started. Note that after this preheating step, the food to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 6 while being placed on the food to be heated, and the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 6 together with the food to be heated. Cooking step 2 may be performed in order to further heat with the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3.

Next, FIG. 28 will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of this first embodiment, the pattern is ( There is a first cooperative cooking mode). As shown in the list of FIG. 25, there are four typical examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this pattern, from "hamburger steak" to "gratin."

There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in the opposite order. There are four typical examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in the second cooperative cooking mode, from "karaage" to "tempura", as described in the lower half of the list in FIG. 25.

The steps in FIG. 28 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
First, in the first step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation section 15M is operated. As a result, cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started.

In the next step SB2, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M, and various information for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed. In step SB2, in order to select the cooking menu of each cooperative cooking mode, the "name of the object to be cooked" (for example, "hamburger") 167 is entered as one type of identification information 167 at the center of the first area 22 in the front and back direction. , that is, at the display position A.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the timing at which the heating means (first heating means HM1 to third heating means HM3) become "occupied" may be either of the following two.
(1) As described above, for example, after the case when the left IH coil 9L for cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 28, "occupied state start (case 2)" after step SB4 corresponds).
(2) After step SB2 as shown in FIG. 28 (in FIG. 28, "occupied state start (case 1)" corresponds).

In the next step SB3, it is determined whether at least one of the input keys 154M and 155M has been operated. As explained in FIGS. 8 and 19 to 22, by operating the two input keys 154M and 155M, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode can be selected. .

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process advances to step SB4.
Step SB4 is a step of selecting one of the two heating section specifying sections 171L and 171R displayed on the first specifying screen 16M1 as described above. If the user US operates the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent on the left and right, he can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L.

Note that the left heating port 4L may be set as a default, the heating section specifying section 171L is initially displayed on the first specifying screen 16M1, and the process directly proceeds to step S5. In the example described in FIG. 22, when performing hamburger steak in cooperative cooking, the left heating port 4L is set as default, and the left IH coil 9L is set to be selected preferentially.

In the next step SB5, it is determined whether an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 152M is operated once, the determination is "Yes". Then, the process returns to step SB3. Note that if the input key 152M is operated twice in a row within a certain short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 has been canceled, and the standby mode before step SB1 is activated. Return to the initial screen. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if the input key 151M is operated while the input key 152M is not operated, the process advances to the next step SB6. Then, cooking step 1 of cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started.

In FIG. 28, step SB7 is performed in accordance with the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as heat power and heating time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe), for example, "hamburger" in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM1. , various functional parts start up. That is, from this stage, the process shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

First, in step SB7, the display section corresponding to the heating section selected in step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or the third heating means HM3 in cooking step 1 (as described above, for example, "karaage"), the central display section is already displayed. 16M has been activated, no new display unit is activated in step SB7.

In the cooking process 1, for example, in the case of a cooking menu using the left IH coil 9L, the left display section 16L is activated in step SB7. Then, the input function of the left operation unit 15L is enabled, and the system waits for an input from the user US. The process then proceeds to step SB8.

In step SB8, the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started after the input key 153L is operated.
In addition, as for the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 in step SB8, the first cooking process 1 uses the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). Process information 172, such as that the process is used, is displayed as described in FIG. 19.

Next, FIGS. 29 and 30 will be explained.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before shifting to cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 29 will be explained.
Steps ST1 to ST8 are operation steps defined in the basic operation program of the heating control section 43.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

At the stage of step ST2, the central display section 16M is activated and displays the message "There is no abnormality, so cooking can be started." Note that, at this stage, the heating control section 43 also checks whether a setting command for the upper limit value of the total power consumption has been received from the input operation section 15.

If the cooking device 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 at step ST2, the startup information (operating state data) is transmitted from the communication unit 51 at this stage. OS) wirelessly.

In the next step ST3, the central display section 16M and the audio notification section 51 also provide notification and audio guidance to prompt selection of the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and usage precaution information is also displayed to the user US.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than the input key 153M (for example, 154M) has been operated (ST5). If the input key 153M has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage status of the heat source used in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is checked.
The permission conditions and determination results will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 30 below.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 153M is pressed, it is determined whether the left operation section 15L or the right operation section 15R is operated, and the "complex cooking mode" KM2 is set by the central operation section 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M). Determine whether it is selected.

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is started as described above.

On the other hand, if the input key 153M is not operated and another input key (for example, input key 155M or 154M) is touched, the determination in step ST5 is "Yes", and the "cooperative cooking mode" is determined. ” Proceed to step ST9 to start cooking for items other than KM3. Note that detailed explanation of step ST9 will be omitted here.

In FIG. 29, steps ST6 and ST7 are operation steps of "permission condition 1" which determines whether or not to permit cooking in "cooperative cooking mode" KM3.
Step ST6 is a stage for determining "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" means:
(1) The "peak cut value" that defines the upper limit of the maximum power usage that can be used by the cooking device 1 is 5000W or more,
(2) If there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 from the external cloud server 300 or communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51, the peak cut value of the power reduction command is 5000W or more;
If these two conditions are satisfied, a "Yes" determination is made in step ST6.

The "permission conditions 2" in the next step ST7 are the following four.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) One or both of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L are not used for heating operation (or only one is being used for heating operation). That is, both the left IH coil 9L and the right IH coil 9R are not used for heating operation.
(4) “Permit Condition 4” described below must be met. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is a limit value (for example, not a high temperature exceeding 100°C).

If the above four conditions are satisfied, a "Yes" determination is made in step ST7. Then, the process proceeds to step ST10. In other words, it is possible to proceed to the step of inputting the cooking start of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

If the determination in steps ST6 and STR7 is "No", the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display section 16M or voice notification section 50 notifies the user US that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of the "permission condition 1" stipulating that the power is "5000W or more" will be explained. In order to simplify the explanation, the following explanation does not particularly mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heating source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (pre-secure power demand) when implementing "Cooperative Cooking Mode" KM1 is required to be 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power when operating each heating source when executing Cooperative Cooking Mode is This is because the following is true.

(1) During microwave operation (second heating means HM2): 1000W
(2) During oven operation: 2000W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000W)
(3) When operating the microwave grill: 1500W (second heating means HM2: 500W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power of the cooking menu in "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

That is, "1000W" of the second heating means HM2, "1000W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is alternately energized in 1000W increments), and "1500W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating. The total power of the three is 3500W.

When the demand (pre-secure power demand) is 5000W:
When the right IH coil 9R is heating 3000W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000W.
When executing "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W power required for cooperative cooking, so the heat power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) for cooperative cooking. can be started.

If the demand (pre-secure power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating port 4R (requires a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W less than the 3500 W of power required for cooperative cooking, so it is necessary to reduce the heat power of the right IH coil. However, if the heat power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, the cooking will not go well, so the heat power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, with 4000W, it is not possible to secure the necessary firepower for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the power required for cooperative cooking (3500W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L (1500W) are determined. ) It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand (preliminary reservation of power demand) of 5000W, which is the total value of 5000W.

Next, FIG. 30 will be explained.
FIG. 30 shows the determination processing in steps ST6 and ST7 in FIG. 29. These determinations are performed by the permission condition determination unit 54.
Step ST5 is a stage in which the input key 153M is operated.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determining unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 with the permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 described above, and compares the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 with the latest state of the heating cooker 1. Determine whether or not.

In step STX1 in FIG. 30, audio (notification) 1 to audio (notification) 4 indicate the content notified to the user US by the audio notification unit 50. In other words, the content of step ST8 in FIG. 29 is specifically shown.

Displays 1 to 4 in FIG. 30 show the contents displayed on the central display section 16M. Note that these Displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 that is displayed from step SB2 in FIG. 28, but are displayed on the central display section 16M while the first specific screen is not displayed. It is to be displayed.

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for transitioning to "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 are satisfied. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, identification information 167) for "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not satisfied, and the first This does not mean that the process returns to the standby initial screen (step ST4 in FIG. 29). Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Next, FIG. 31 will be explained.
FIG. 31 explains the operation from starting the heating cooker 1 to acquiring a cooking recipe data CD for the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 or an external server (cloud server 300). be.

In this first embodiment, the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes the cooperative cooking menu number (identification information 167), the order of the plurality of heating means used, the heating means used in the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. heating means used for each cooking step, if there are cooking steps after cooking step 3, default (standard setting) control conditions for each cooking step (heating power, heating time, heating target temperature, etc.) If there is, it includes information on the setting value or the range of the setting value, but is not limited thereto.

In FIG. 31, steps SS1 to SS8 are operation steps specified in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and basically match the contents specified in the basic operation program explained in FIG.

First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described with reference to FIG. 29, so duplicate explanation will be omitted.

In step SS5, the heating cooker 1 confirms with the user US in advance whether to send a signal requesting the provision of the cooking recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 registered in advance. This is the desired movement. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display section 16M, and the audio notification section 50 also makes a notification. This "confirmation screen" is one type of standby initial screen 16MH described later.

If the user US sets in advance to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5 using the function setting key 151KP of the input operation section 15, the external connection will be automatically executed at a specified timing.

That is, as explained in FIG. 1, pairing of the smartphone 200 and the cooking device 1 can be performed automatically, and wireless communication 330 between the smartphone 200 and the cooking device 1 can be established.

In the external connection in step SS5, transmission and reception are alternately repeated several times between the cooking device 1 and an external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300).
For example, when the cooking device 1 first transmits the signal 1, the communication terminal 200 receives the signal 1 and transmits the signal 2, and upon receiving this, the cooking device 1 changes the internal state ( For example, the set value of total power consumption, etc.) is checked, and if there is no problem, a standby signal 2 is sent to proceed to the next step.

Finally, the reception of the necessary "setting information" (including the recipe data CD) from the external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200) is completed. In other words, when the heating cooker 1 side receives a signal once, it performs several alternating communications such as sending back another signal immediately after, and finally receives the necessary "setting information". Complete. In this series of steps, there is a step in which the user US side is asked to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this heating cooker 1, there is a step in which the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received, so the process proceeds to the step of executing the recipe data CD without the user US knowing. This is prevented. These details will be explained with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

On the other hand, as part of facilitating the external connection as described above, in step SS6, predetermined icons, information, etc. are displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user US that the recipe data CD can be acquired. An example of this is shown in the display screen 2C in FIG. The display notifying the user US is concisely displayed in text, for example, on the display screen 2C in FIG. 40, as shown in the acquisition operation support information 60P.

If you do not agree to the connection to the external device (such as the communication terminal 200) in this step SS6, as shown in step SS9, the registered external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) will have the message "Current recipe A non-reception message such as "No data CD is being received" is sent. In this way, the user US can also set up to refuse reception.

On the other hand, in step SS6, when the user agrees to connect to the external device and instructs data acquisition, the cooking device 1 causes the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. . The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined "temporary storage section" (not shown) in the recipe data storage section 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display section 16M. Furthermore, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact of reception, such as, for example, "We have received the hamburger recipe."

By the way, in this Embodiment 1, the control device 40 receives the voice input during a standby period in which it is waiting for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply is started. When the input key 180, which is the mode 2 selection section, is operated, the program allows the data acquisition section 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

That is, if the user US presses the input key 180 at step SS6, the step is determined as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be met before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, FIGS. 32 to 38 will be explained.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device 1. FIG. 33 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the cooking device 1 after the main power is turned on. FIG. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device 1. FIG. 35 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 36 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the individual cooking mode in the heating cooker 1.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main input steps when cooking recipe data using the central operation unit 15M in the cooking device. FIG. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1. FIG. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1.

32 to 36 show the case of the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1A". That is, this is a case where one input operation section 15 (for example, central operation section 15M) includes the input key 154M as the "dual-purpose key" among the plurality of input keys.
Therefore, when the input key 154M changes to the "voice input mode 1A", the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (dual-purpose key) 154M are disabled from that point on. It's a pattern.

32 to 36 are not cases in which cooking is performed by acquiring recipe data CD from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.), but the user US operates the input operation section 15 of the cooking device 1 to perform cooking. It explains when to do so.

FIG. 32 will be explained.
In FIG. 32, outlined symbols (such as 153M) indicate input keys 153M and the like to be operated in steps S2 to S15 below.
In FIG. 32, the main input keys are also displayed in white characters.
Furthermore, the range indicated by the broken line frame indicates the range that can be input by voice in the "voice input mode 1" which is switched when the input key (combined key) 154M is "long pressed".

Steps S2 to S6 indicate operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7 to S11 indicate operation steps in the case of complex cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show operational steps in the case of the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when the input key 153M is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

At this stage, on the first specific screen 16M1, at least three cooking menus are displayed simultaneously on one screen as explained in FIGS. 19 to 22, but each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, , different cooking menus can be displayed one after another (step S4).

In step S5, if the control conditions for one cooperative cooking menu are sufficient, by pressing the input key 151M, it is possible to proceed to the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S4, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in steps S4 to S5 You can input the range of conditions by voice. For example, a cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "Hamburger preheat 180 degrees Celsius." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat power 7 hours 10 minutes".

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7) and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, different control menus (see FIG. 16) can be displayed one after another (step S9).

In step S9, if one control menu (for example, "warming") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is sufficient, then by pressing the input key 156M or 157M, the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) can be changed. can be selected (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are sufficient, pressing the input key 151M allows the process to proceed to cooking process 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S7, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in steps S9 to S10 You can input the range of conditions by voice. For example, a control menu (in this case, "warming") and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "warming 500W." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice, such as "500W for 10 minutes".

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
If you touch either the input key 153L or 153R of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L without touching the input key 153M in step S2 and without touching either of the input keys 154M or 155M in step S7, , the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the right display section 16R or the left display section 16L (step S13).

Each time the input key 152L or 152R is touched, different control menus (see FIG. 41) can be displayed one after another (step S14).

In step S14, if one control menu (see FIG. 41) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is sufficient, then input key 155L or 156L (in case of left operation part 15L), input key 155R or 156R (right operation 15R), control conditions (induction heating heating power, heating time, etc.) can be selected (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for one single cooking mode KM3 are sufficient, induction heating is automatically started for a certain period of time (10 seconds) without pressing the input key.

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 153L or 153R is "long pressed" at step S12, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so step S14 You can input the range of conditions by voice from ~S15. For example, a control menu (in this case, "boil water") and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's utterance, such as "boil water, thermal power 6". Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

Alternatively, the timer set time may be set by operating the input key 151L or 151R (step S14) and using the input keys 154L, 155L (154R, 155R). These can also be input by voice after switching to voice input mode 1. For example, you may say something like "Firepower 6 Timer 10 minutes".

As is clear from FIG. 32, the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment is
The input operation section 15 includes a first input operation section (a right operation section 15R and a left operation section 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation section for the second heating means. (central operation section 15M),
It has input keys A (153L, 153R) arranged on the first input operation parts 15L, 15R, and input keys B (153M, 154M) arranged on the second input operation part 15M, respectively,
The control device 40 validates the touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and activates the heating cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode KM1, composite cooking mode). KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the above-mentioned "warming", etc.) input process using the other input key does not start until the input of the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started. The structure was characterized by this.

In other words, the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and independent cooking mode KM3) are controlled by only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that was touched first. The input command is accepted by the device 40, and the other input keys are in a state where input commands are not accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touch-operated and switched to voice input mode by long press, input with other input keys becomes impossible (however, input keys 151M and 152M retain their input function. ).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), selection of other cooking modes or control modes is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent setting conditions from being inputted carelessly through voice input.

In addition, when inputting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 using one input key (for example, 154M) using the voice input mode, when the input key 151M is pressed to start cooking, the previous voice input The mode is canceled. Therefore, when the user US performs a touch operation to select another heating cooking method thereafter, confusion does not occur.

Next, FIG. 33 will be explained.
In FIG. 33, open symbols (for example, 153M) indicate input keys (153M, etc.) operated in steps SM3, SM4, and SM8.
In FIG. 33, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to the processing in steps ST2 and ST3 in FIG. That is, the central display section 16M is activated and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. The presence/absence of an abnormality is determined, and if there is no abnormality, a message to the effect that there is no abnormality and cooking can be started is displayed. Then, on the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification section 51, notification and audio guidance are performed to prompt selection of the heating means.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). Further, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) included in the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Although FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operating section 15M, the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L also have the same configuration as the central operating section 15M. Therefore, it has a configuration corresponding to the time measuring section 15T.

In the next step SM3, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected. In step SM4, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the independent cooking mode KM3 is selected by the first heating means HM1.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touched, and if it has been touched, the process proceeds to route A1 shown in FIGS. 33 and 34.
In step SM3, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. In step SM4, if either input key 154M or 155M is touched, the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to route B1 shown in FIGS. 33 and 35.

In step SM4, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. In step SM8, if either the input key 153L or 153R is touched, the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to route C1 shown in FIGS. 33 and 36.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 33, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In step SM5, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) determines whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6 to automatically shut off the main power (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shutoff process 1"). It will be done. Then, the series of operations ends (SM7). In this manner, when no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 is automatically opened when the time limit (for example, 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, FIG. 34 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing operations after the input key 153M is touched in step SM3.
When the input key 153M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation unit 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether or not the above-described "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). Note that the disallowance process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM42.
From step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown in FIG. 20, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (it may be touched multiple times).

In FIG. 34, in step SM43, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM43, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already been switched to the "voice input mode 1A". Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM43, the input on the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 because of the "voice input mode 1A". In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM44 will not become "Yes", and therefore the process cannot proceed to step SM46, which is the completion of input. Note that if the "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Furthermore, as an exception, the voice input control program may be changed so that the "voice input mode" is canceled when the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, a "short press"). .

As described above, in the first embodiment, immediately after the input key 154M is "long pressed", the voice input mode 1A is switched to, and the voice input mode 1A is automatically continued thereafter. However, this voice input mode 1A is canceled when the heating operation is started (that is, when the input key 151M is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. In step SM46, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM46 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if Steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to Step SM44 and waits for a voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 39, and is a process in which the display returns from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Continuing to use FIG. 34, steps after step SM50 will be described.
Step SM50 is a step of determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). Note that the disallowance process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM51.
From step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown in FIG. 20, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (it may be touched multiple times).

In FIG. 34, in step SM52, the time measurement section 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), for example, by using the input keys 156M or 157M, step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the next Proceed to step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already been switched to the touch input mode. Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM52, the input on the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 because of the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 becomes "Yes", so the process advances to step SM46 for completing the input. As an exception, if the input key 154 is touched again (in this case, a "long press"), the touch input mode may be canceled and the mode may be changed to return to "voice input mode 1." .

In this manner, in this first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "long pressed", and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started.

If the elapsed time from step SM52 has not exceeded the time limit TY, the process proceeds to step SM55. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for an input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not performed properly. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 35 will be explained.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing operations after either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4.
When the input key 154M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step of determining whether "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
"Permission condition 3" here is different from permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) of the cooperative cooking mode. The "permission condition 3" in this composite cooking mode is defined as that the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 checked by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 80° C. or lower. This is because if the result measured by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 100° C., it exceeds the temperature detection range (90° C. or less) of the control menu “warming”.

If "permission condition 3" is not satisfied, a non-permission process is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that the non-permission process is a process in which a message such as "heating chamber is too high for cooking" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is made by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain at a high temperature for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is finished.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM62.
From step SM62 onwards, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown in FIG. 16, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (it may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, warming).

In FIG. 35, in step SM63, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM63, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM64 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, at the stage of step SM63, the control device 40 has already been switched to the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM63, the input on the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 because of the voice input mode (the "voice input mode"). 1A”). In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM64 will not become "Yes", and therefore the process cannot proceed to step SM66, which is the completion of input. As an exception, when the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, a "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be canceled. Further, when the "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40.

As described above, in the first embodiment, immediately after the input key 154M is "long pressed", the voice input mode 1 is switched to the voice input mode 1, but the voice input mode 1 is switched to the voice input mode 1 at the time when the command to start heating cooking is given (input key 151M (touch operation), it will be automatically canceled.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. In step SM65, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM66 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if Steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to Step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Continuing, steps SM70 and subsequent steps will also be described using FIG. 35.
Step SM70 is a step of determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM76). The "disapproval process" in this case has the same content as the disallowance process in step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM71.
In step SM71, a second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown in FIG. 16, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (it may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, warming).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "long pressed", the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 154M is not "long pressed" and the input key 155M is inputted or the input key 154 is "short pressed", the "touch input mode" is maintained and the process proceeds to step SM72.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the voice input mode 1 is switched immediately after the input key 154M is "long pressed" in the complex cooking mode selection or control menu (e.g., warming). 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is canceled at the start of the heating operation. Note that when the same input key 154M is "short pressed", voice input mode 1 may be canceled at this point.

In FIG. 35, in step SM72, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the next Proceed to step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already been switched to the touch input mode. Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM72, the input on the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 because of the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM73 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step SM75 to complete the input. As an exception, if the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be canceled and the mode may be changed to return to "voice input mode 1." .

In this manner, in this first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "long pressed", and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started. Therefore, the normal touch input mode is restored.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for an input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if Steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to Step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 36 will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing operations after either input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8 of FIG.
In order to simplify the subsequent explanation, the following explanation will be limited to the case where the left operation section 15L is operated.

If the touch operation of the input key 153L is a "long press", this is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the left operation section 15L. Although FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation section 15M, the left operation section 15L also has a configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 11.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIGS. 29 and 30) and the "permission condition 3" described above. "Permission condition 4" in this independent cooking mode KM3 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and the result is a high temperature exceeding, for example, 100°C. This is because when induction heating control is performed by detecting the temperature of the object to be heated in a non-contact manner, if the temperature is high from the start of the heating operation, accurate temperature control and induction heating control may be hindered.

If "permission condition 4" is not satisfied, a non-permission process is performed at this stage (step SM87). Note that the disallowance process is a process in which a message such as "Top plate cannot be used for cooking at a high temperature" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is made by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction heating cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain at a high temperature for a while even after the cooking is finished.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM82.
From the time of step SM82, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
The state at the time when this third specific screen 16M3 is displayed is shown in FIG. 42, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154L or 155L may be further touched (touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating).

By the way, at this stage, it has already been switched to "voice input mode 1", so in the next step SM83, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) checks whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Measurement of elapsed time is started for determination. After this step SM83, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), the result of step SM84 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters "preheat 200 degrees Celsius", the audio signal receiving section 56 converts this audio input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the audio signal analyzing section 58 .

In step SM85, it is determined whether or not the time limit TY has been exceeded. If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 (in the case of independent cooking mode HM1) using the left operation part 16L, no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is directly started (C21 ). Note that it may be changed so that the actual induction heating operation can be started when an input key 152L or 152R different from that operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Continuing, steps SM80 and subsequent steps will be described using FIG. 36.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether the above-described "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM96). The "disapproval process" in this case has the same content as the disallowance process in step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM91.
From the time of step SM91, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed instead of the standby initial screen 16MH.
The state at the time when this third specific screen 16M3 is displayed is shown in FIG. 42, for example. Thereafter, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are further touched (touched multiple times) in order to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating).

In FIG. 36, in step SM92, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded.

By the way, at this stage, it is the "touch input mode", so in the next step SM93, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) performs a process to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Measurement of elapsed time begins.

The input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. may be touch operated to sequentially input control conditions such as a control menu (eg, preheating) and preheating temperature (touch operations may be performed multiple times). In this way, when a touch input is made by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process advances from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US inputs the conditions of "preheating" and "200°C" sequentially by touch input, the left operation unit 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10). do.

Note that if the input keys 154L or 155R are "long pressed", these input keys do not have the function of switching to the voice input mode 1, so voice input cannot be performed.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the selection of the independent cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 and the selection of the heating parts (right heating part 4R, left heating part 4L) (using input keys 153R and 153L) are possible. Therefore, immediately after "long pressing" the input key 153R or 153L (step SM8 in FIG. 33), the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once you "long press" the input key 153L or 153R, voice input mode 1 is maintained regardless of the operation of the voice input key (if set to "voice input mode 1B") (if any). Even if the input key 153L (153R) is "long pressed" again (twice in succession), the voice input mode 1 remains.

If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM95 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 (in the case of independent cooking mode HM1) using the left operation part 16L, no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is directly started (C22 ). Note that it may be changed so that the actual induction heating operation can be started when an input key 152L or 152R different from that operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 37 will be explained.
FIG. 37 shows the operation of the cooking device 1 when the recipe data CD is acquired from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.) and cooking is performed. FIG. 37 shows the operation of the central operation section 15M. This is different from the explanatory diagram including the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R as shown in FIG.
The range indicated by the dashed line frame can be input by voice in "Voice input mode 1", which is switched by "long pressing" the input key (combined key) 153M, or in "Voice input mode 2", which can be selected with the input key 180. It shows the range.

Components that are the same as those in FIG. 32 may be given the same reference numerals and redundant explanations may be omitted.
Steps S2A to S6 indicate operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7A to S11 indicate operation steps in the case of complex cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12A to S15 indicate operation steps in the case of the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1, that is, the central heating port 4C. Note that there is also cooking in which the microwave oscillator (magnetron) 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12 are used alone, but detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Step S1A shows a process of acquiring recipe data CD from external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc.

Steps S2A, S7A, and S12A perform determination processing corresponding to steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, respectively, but are slightly different from FIG. 32.
In steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the composite cooking mode KM2, etc. are determined in response to the input from the input operation section 15.
On the other hand, in steps S2A, S7A, and S12A in FIG. ``Hamburger'') and a specific input key that requires input operation. Note that the specific input key is specified in step SP2A. In the first embodiment, there are only three specific input keys: 153M of the central operation section 15M, and 152L and 152R of the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R.

For example, in step S1A, advance notice information A is received from the external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc. before the recipe data CD is acquired. Then, there is a process in which the user US operates an appropriate specific input key corresponding to the preview information A in advance. Details of this processing will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 59, 60, etc. For the recipe data CD using the central operation section 15M, it is necessary to operate the specific input key 153M.
Therefore, in addition to analyzing the operation of the input operation section 15 in step S1A by the input signal analysis section 52, the data acquisition section 53 analyzes the contents of the notice signal A of one recipe data CD, thereby determining the cooking mode. , food to be cooked (cooking menu), and specific input keys. This determination (identification) is performed in step S2A.

In step S3, one cooking menu acquired from the outside is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by touching the input key 154M or 155M, it is possible to change the control conditions (heating power, heating target temperature, etc.) for that cooking menu and display the change results on the first specific screen 16M1 ( Step S5).

FIG. 37 shows a case where the mode is switched to the voice input mode before step S5.
As explained in FIG. 32, in the touch input mode, the control conditions (heating power, heating target temperature, etc.) can be changed by touching the input key 154M or 155M. Therefore, desired control conditions can be input by voice through voice input (step S20). In other words, there is no need to touch the input keys 154M or 155M.

In step S5, if the control conditions for one cooperative cooking menu are sufficient, by pressing the input key 151M, it is possible to proceed to the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 37, if the input key (combined key) 153M is "long pressed" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S20, You can input control conditions within a certain range by voice. For example, a cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "Hamburger preheat 180 degrees Celsius." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat power 7 hours 10 minutes". In addition, since the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is already known at the stage of acquiring the preview information A or the recipe data CD, voice input of only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be used as described above. .

Continuing, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S2A that the mode is not cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process advances to step S7A. In step S7A, if it is determined that the cooking menu is in the complex cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed on the central display section 16M (step S8).
On this second specific screen 16M2, only one cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is displayed. This point differs from step S8 in FIG. 32.
In the touch input mode, in step S10, each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, results reflecting different control conditions can be displayed on the second specific screen one after another.

However, in FIG. 37, if the specific input key (combined key) 153M is "long pressed" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S21, Control conditions can be input using voice input mode.

In step S10, if the control conditions for one (complex cooking mode) cooking menu are sufficient, by pressing the input key 151M, it is possible to move to cooking step 1 of the complex cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

In this way, at step S1A, it is possible to switch to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S21, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, control conditions such as "500W" can be input by the user US's voice. Note that a plurality of control conditions may be input simultaneously by voice, such as "500W for 10 minutes."

Continuing, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S7A that the mode is not complex cooking mode KM2, the process advances to step S12A. In step S12A, if it is determined that the recipe data CD is for a single cooking mode using the heating chamber 6 or the central heating port 4C, a third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the central display section 16M (step S13 ).

On the third specific screen 16M3, identification information of a specific (one) cooking menu (for example, "keep warm" explained in FIG. 42) and control conditions are displayed (step S15).
Therefore, the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) of the cooking menu displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 can be selected by pressing the input key 154R or 155R (step S22).

However, in this FIG. 37, when the input key 153M is "long pressed" at step S1A, the control device 40 is switched to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S22, the control device 40 is switched to the voice input mode. Control conditions can be input using .
That is, since the control device 40 is switched to the "input standby state" by voice before step S22, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range in step S22. For example, control conditions can be input by the user US's voice, such as "heat power 2 30 minutes".

As is clear from FIG. 37, the heating cooker 1 of this Embodiment 1 is
The input operation section 15 includes a first input operation section (a right operation section 15R and a left operation section 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation section (for the second heating means). It has a central operation section 15M),
It has input keys A (153L, 153R) arranged on the first input operation parts 15L, 15R, and input keys B (153M, 154M) arranged on the second input operation part 15M, respectively,
The control device 40 validates the touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and activates the heating cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode KM1, composite cooking mode). KM2, independent cooking mode KM3) or control mode (such as the above-mentioned "warming"), the input process using the other input key does not start until the input of the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started. The structure was characterized by this.

In other words, the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and independent cooking mode KM3) are controlled by only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that was touched first. The input command is accepted by the device 40, and the other input keys are in a state where input commands are not accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touch-operated and switched to voice input mode by long press, input with other input keys becomes impossible (however, input keys 151M and 152M retain their input function. ).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), selection of other cooking modes or control modes is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent setting conditions from being inputted carelessly through voice input.

In addition, when inputting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 using one input key (for example, 153M) using the voice input mode, when the input key 151M is pressed to start cooking, the previous voice input The mode is canceled. Therefore, when the user US performs a touch operation to select another heating cooking method thereafter, confusion does not occur.

Further, "notice information A" including information indicating a specific (one) cooking menu is transmitted from the external communication terminal 200, and a specific input key indicated by the notice information A is pressed in response to reception of the notice information A. If an input operation is performed, the process proceeds to a process of acquiring recipe data CD of the cooking menu related to the preview information A. In other words, selection of the cooking mode, cooking menu, control menu, etc. by touch input using the input keys 153 or 154 becomes unnecessary.

Next, FIGS. 38 and 39 will be explained.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1. FIG. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In FIG. 38, in step SL1, processing equivalent to the processing in step SM1 in FIG. 33 is performed. In the next step SL2, processing corresponding to the processing in step SM2 in FIG. 33 is performed.
Step SL3 is a process corresponding to step SS5 of external connection and notification described with reference to FIG. That is, this step is for the purpose of asking the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to send a signal requesting the provision of the recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 registered in advance.

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute the external connection from this step SL3 (SS5) (if previously set using the function setting key 151KP described above).
Since this step SL3 includes input key operations by the user US, the details will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 59, 60, and the like. When the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process of determining whether the received recipe data CD meets predetermined permission conditions. As described above, for example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, items that do not satisfy "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not permitted as cooking menus (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Also in the composite cooking mode KM2, it is determined whether a specific "permission condition 3" is satisfied. Note that permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of FIG. 35. Furthermore, for the first heating means HM1, it is necessary to satisfy the above-mentioned "permission condition 4" (see step SM81 in FIG. 36).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission condition is not satisfied, if the cooking menu belongs to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the communication unit 51 will transmit the In contrast, a signal (data) notifying that the recipe data CD cannot be received is transmitted (step SL9). Although FIG. 29 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "non-reception message" is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the independent cooking mode KM3. This will be explained in detail later.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage section 42 as regular data (step SL6).
Further, the identification information 167, 160 and control conditions (heating power, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display section 16. For example, a cooking menu for cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

The next step SL7 is a control condition correction step. For example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the control conditions (for example, heating time, target heating temperature, heat power, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be controlled by operating the input keys 156M to 159M of the central operation section 15M. Can be changed as appropriate. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired in units of cooking menus, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (for example, roast beef).

If it is desired to modify the control conditions, for example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the contents of the change may be inputted as appropriate using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, "voice input mode 1" can be selected, and it is also possible to input by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process advances to step SL8. In step SL8, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutoff processing 1" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX of step SL8 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG. 33 may not be the same time, but may be set to different times.

Next, FIG. 39 will be explained.
FIG. 39 shows the operation when the input key 180 is operated to select "voice input mode 2".
In FIG. 39, step SS5 is the same as step SS5 described in FIG. 31, so duplicate explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for determining whether or not the input key 180 in voice input mode 2 has been operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 is able to acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, the answer to step SS11 is “Yes”.
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process advances to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is "automatic shutoff processing 1" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX of step SS17 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG. 33 may not be the same time, but may be set to different times.

It is determined whether the content of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 satisfies the above-mentioned "permission condition" (see step SL5 in FIG. 38), and if satisfied, step SS12 becomes "Yes".

If the permission conditions are not met, as explained in step SL9 of FIG. 38, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) informing the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18). .

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as legitimate data.
Further, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display section 16. For example, when the recipe data CD is in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (for example, heating time, target heating temperature, heating power, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by voice input obtained via the voice signal receiving section 56 of the input operation section 15 (step SS14, SS15).

When "voice input mode 2" is selected by the input key 180, the "voice input mode 2" continues until the heating operation of one cooking menu is started. There is no switching to "touch input mode" during the input stage. This is because switching in the middle of the input process may cause confusion in the user US's operations.

If you want to switch to the touch input mode, you can press the input key 180 again at some stage. Returns to touch input mode from the moment you press it. Note that after returning to the touch input mode, for example, if the input key 154M is "long pressed", the mode is switched to "voice input mode 1". Therefore, in the case of voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), for example, when the input key 156M is inputted, the input function of the input key is not disabled, so that input can be performed.

Next, FIG. 40 will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control section 43 in the cooking device 1 when the control device 40 switches to the voice input mode 1. Although FIG. 40 shows the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process is basically the same in other cooking modes.

In FIG. 40, step SS20 indicates the point in time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification section 50 and the central display section 16M notify that the reception of voice input has started. The state of the central display section 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in FIG. 21. That is, a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted as auxiliary information 179 is displayed in the first specified mode. It is displayed on the screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the audio signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives a voice command from the user US. Further, a time measuring unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information emitted by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The audio signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired audio information into a predetermined audio signal and transmits it to the audio signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described with reference to FIG. 22, a notification such as "Hamburger right IH automatically selected" is announced, and text is also displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification section 50 further provides a voice guidance such as "Please specify the preheating temperature." Alternatively, a specific range of control conditions may be notified, such as "200° C. is recommended for the preheating temperature. Please specify the temperature."

If there is insufficient input of control conditions necessary to start the heating operation, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the voice notification unit 50 points out the control condition for which input is insufficient and performs an operation to prompt input (not shown).

If the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions necessary to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since the voice input has been completed, it is announced that the voice input mode 1 will be canceled, and a touch operation on the input key 151M is recommended (step SS27). Note that the voice input mode 1 is immediately canceled when the input key 151M is touched.

On the other hand, if the voice command is not accepted in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the elapsed time from step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (for example, 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process advances to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff processing 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 33. In addition, this "automatic shutdown process 2" issues an alarm to the user US by the audio notification unit 50 in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, then automatically switches to the initial standby screen 16MH, and then automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH. This is a series of processing in which the main power switch 20 is opened. This prevents the data from being left unattended for a long time during the input process for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, FIG. 41 will be explained.
FIG. 41 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each main operation step after the main power switch 20 is turned on.
When the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display section 16M is not activated and therefore does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40 performs a self-diagnosis to determine whether there is an abnormality as described above, and then displays the "display screen", which is one display form of the standby initial screen 16MH in FIG. 1'' is displayed on the central display section 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 41, 60A is a display message notifying that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding the user to the recipe data providing server 301, which is a dedicated recipe posting site, via the network NW. 60C is a text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter referred to as "two-dimensional information explanatory text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal 200 described above, it is possible to guide and connect to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information explanatory text 60C and the display text 60A are one type of "standby common information" 60N.

After display screen 1 in FIG. 41 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed.
Furthermore, after display screen 2A or 2B in FIG. 41 is displayed, display screen 2C may be automatically displayed. On this display screen 2C, a recommendation message 60H prompts the user US to perform an input operation to select a heating source.

On the display screen 2A, the character display "Beware of bumping" is one of the warning displays 60E. This "bumping" is when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, and the inside of the food is overheated to a temperature above the boiling point, causing sudden boiling. A phenomenon that causes intense boiling. As steam is emitted from the heated liquid, hot liquid droplets may fly out and be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping are said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from the outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3 and heated by induction, a warning is given when stirring the food. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 60N.

The four display screens, display screen 1 and display screens 2A to 2C shown in FIG. 41, are referred to as a "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may be included in the common screen 16MH.

In the display screen 2B, 60E is a warning display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and not to touch it carelessly. If the control device 40 detects that the heating chamber 6 has not cooled down sufficiently after performing oven cooking in the heating chamber 6, it automatically switches to the state of the display screen 2.

Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Further, the content of the alert on the display screens 2A and 2B may be simultaneously provided by audio using the audio notification unit 50.

In the display screen 2C of FIG. 41, 60P is the acquisition operation support information described above. As shown in FIG. 41, the heating cooker 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200, etc., and specifies the acquired data in advance in order to store it in the recipe data storage section 42 (see FIG. 10). Indicates that the input key must be touched.
For example, in the case of a cooking menu called "hamburger" that belongs to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking step 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, so it is not possible to touch the input key 152L or 152R. The acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed. In addition, in accordance with this display, the audio notification unit 50 may provide audio notification.

As is clear from display screens 1 to 2A to 2C in FIG. 41, the display of these various types of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, in order to ensure as wide a display area as possible, rather than displaying a partial display using any of the first area 22 to third area 24 described above, three areas, first area 22 to third area 24, are identified. The image is displayed in an integrated manner so that the image is displayed in an integrated manner so that it appears to the user US that it is being displayed on the entire central display section 16M.

Next, FIG. 42 will be explained.
FIG. 42 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display section 16L of the heating cooker 1.
FIG. 42 shows the third specific screen 16M3 for the independent cooking mode KM3. 41 is displayed when the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) is operated after step SS4 in FIG. 31.

Next, when the input key 152L is operated, control menus to be executed by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display section 16L. As shown in the display screen 3A in FIG. 42, the control menu that is displayed first (default setting) can be set to "keep warm", "fried food" in the display screen 3B, or "fried food" in the display screen 3C. Users can make separate settings such as whether to use "preheating" or not.

Furthermore, when the input key 153L is operated at step SM8 in FIG. 33 and the input key 152L is operated at step SM93 in FIG. Is displayed. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as keeping warm, frying, preheating, etc.). That is, each time the input key 152L is pressed, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus.

The control menus that can be selected with the left heating port 4L (in the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3) include, for example, "keep warm", "boil water", "simmer", "deep fry (automatic cooking)", "preheat", etc. The driving time, heating power, driving pattern, etc. of the left IH coil 9L differ for each control menu.

The display screen 3A in FIG. 42 is the case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B is a case where the control menu for "fried food" is selected. The display screen 3C is the case where the "preheating" control menu is selected.
179A is the auxiliary information. This auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the mode is not voice input mode.

In addition, when selecting "Keep Warm" from the control menu (induction heating independent cooking mode KM3) using the central IH coil 9M in charge of the central heating port 4C on the central display section 16M, the screen shown in FIG. The shown display screen 3A is displayed. In this case, the central display section 16M takes a display form like the display screen 3A, and this screen is referred to as a "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, FIG. 43 will be explained.
FIG. 43 explains the operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 from starting the heating cooker 1 to immediately before starting cooking. This is the case when cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected.

In FIG. 43, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, the cooperative cooking mode It is determined whether the recipe data CD has been acquired (step SU2).

In step SU3, the control device 40 compares the state of the heating cooker 1 with the latest state and determines whether the state satisfies the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2.

If it is determined that permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied at the same time (SU6), the identification information 167 included in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) is displayed on the central display section 16M. to be displayed. In this case, identification information 167 (for example, "Name: Hamburger") is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

In step SU7, the identification information 167 (for example, "Name: Hamburger") is displayed as shown in FIG. 44.
Further, operation support information 170 is also displayed. This prompts the user US to press the input key 151M to start cooking. Note that the audio notification unit 50 also provides a notification such as, for example, "Press the start key to start cooking" (step SU8).

Note that when the user US presses either the input key 158M or 159M once after step SU7, a food component display screen 16M1A (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is displayed. Furthermore, when either the input key 158M or 159M is pressed once, a food component display screen 16M1B (see FIG. 24) is displayed.

In step SU8, the user US may operate an input key (for example, 156M or 155M) that allows selection of control conditions (for example, thermal power value) to appropriately set thermal power, heating time, etc.

On the other hand, a case will be described in which the control device 40 compares the state of the cooking device 1 with the latest state at step SU3 and determines that the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are not satisfied (step SU4).

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed to display in text that the recipe data CD obtained from the external device cannot be executed by the current cooking device 1. Furthermore, the audio notification unit 50 also provides audio notification to the same effect (step SU5). Then, the process returns to step SU1. This operation corresponds to the operation of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

Next, FIG. 44 will be explained.
FIG. 44 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M, which are the same as those explained in FIG. 19.

In FIG. 44, 173 is an external recipe identification unit indicating that the recipe data CD is acquired from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). It is easily understood that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from an external source by displaying the words "received recipe" in text.

In FIG. 44, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state in which the heating operation can be started at any time. In order to indicate this, the input key 151M is blinking to prompt you to operate it. The broken line circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is blinking.

In FIG. 44, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light emitting section 21M. The input function of each input key (for example, 156M, 157M) placed on the front side of the light emitting part 21M is valid, and if you touch it at this point, you can adjust the heat power, heating time, etc. It means that.

In FIG. 44, light emitting sections 21M corresponding to input keys 157M and 156M are emitting light. In other words, the user US can select either of the heating part specifying section 171L, which selects cooking with the left heating port 4L, and the heating section specifying section 171R, which selects cooking with the right heating port 4R. However, this FIG. 44 shows a case where, in the process of the cooking device 1 acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200, none of the two selectable heating ports 4L is selected. In this first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a step of selecting either the heating port 4L or 4R is provided in advance (see step SG5 in FIG. 60), and the heating port in FIG. The specific parts 171L and 171R are not displayed.

The recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed on the external recipe identification section 173 and displayed preferentially on the first specific screen 16M1. That is, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed in the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 151M as shown in FIG. 44, cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started immediately.
As will be explained later, after the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. Actual induction heating will not start unless you touch the button.

As described above, the recipe data CD obtained from the external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) is used for cooking only in specific heating parts (the right heating port 4R, the center heating port 4C, and the left heating port 4L). There are two types: one in which the user US can specify the desired heating section, and one in which the user US can perform cooking by specifying the desired heating section. Therefore, even when the user US uses a recipe data CD obtained from an external source, usability is not impaired.
For example, the heating capacity of the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R is the same in this first embodiment, but suppose that the left heating port 4L has higher heating power and is equipped with an IH coil that can be controlled more complicatedly. In this case, depending on the cooking menu, only the left heating port 4L can be used. In such a case, the heating portions (heating ports) are restricted so that the left heating port 4L can be used on the control device 40 side, so the heating portion specifying portions 171L and 171R are not displayed. Furthermore, the heating port (heating section) cannot be selected on the communication terminal 200 side either.

Next, FIG. 45 will be explained.
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section.
In the example shown in FIG. 45, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
This FIG. 45 shows a case where cooking is performed using external recipe data CD.
Cooking process 1 is an example in which the first heating means HM1 is used.

In the example of FIG. 45, the recipe data CD has the following conditions defined in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as firepower may also be specified.
(1) Waiting for an input from the input key 151M, determining the induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or left heating port 4L), and then waiting for a touch operation on either the input key 153L or 153R. Start heating operation.
(2) When the input key 153R (153L) is input, stop the heating operation in cooking process 1, or start the heating operation at that point when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching the target temperature) are met. To stop.

Although the program included in the recipe data CD defines a heating suspension period P3 and a heating suspension period P5, which will be described later, the temporal lengths of these heating suspension periods P3 and P5 are not defined. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 is counted based on the end point, and if 30 minutes have elapsed, for example, Processing such as issuing a warning and forcibly stopping execution of the cooking menu may be included.

In the example of the recipe data CD in FIG. 45, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally, the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3. A cooking step 3 is provided to perform finishing induction heating to compensate for insufficient heating.

Note that this heating cooker 1 has additional measures to protect the cooking mode setting, control conditions, etc. from being changed carelessly upon receiving a command signal from the outside.

In the case shown in FIG. 45, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the second heating means HM2 is operated. However, at the same time as the second heating means HM2, the third heating means Alternatively, the radiant heating means 12 may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 45, the cooperative cooking menu shown here is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until the (induction) heating cooking operation is started by the input key 152R (or 152L). This is the period of

The operation of the input key 153 (central operation unit 15M) during the preparation period P1 is one method necessary for establishing a communication state between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1. However, there are other methods of establishing communication status.
As explained in the display screen 1 stage of the standby initial screen 16MH in FIG. The method may be changed to transmitting a connection signal from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1 based on the result.

The operation of the input key 152R (right operation section 15R) during the preparation period P1 corresponds to step SG5 of the "confirmation step SP3" explained in FIG. becomes the right heating port 4R.
Thereafter, when the input key 153R is operated after receiving the recipe data CD, the preparation period P1 ends and the cooking period P2 (cooking process 1) begins.
In addition, at the stage of receiving the recipe data CD, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to the first specific screen 16M1, so when the user US presses the input key 153R, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M. It will be displayed.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking process 1, an object to be cooked N (not shown) such as an appropriate metal pot is placed on the right heating port 4R, and after the input key 153R is pressed, the actual cooking operation is started. Ru.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining the permission conditions (1 and 2), so the heating section of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) in use is I know it. In other words, the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating port 4R" in the cooking step 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and makes the right heating port 4R occupied.

The cooking process 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification section 50 will notify you, and the first specific screen 16M1 will also display a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the end time of the cooking process 1 is approaching.
To finish the cooking process 1, the user US only has to press the input key 153R once again.

P3 is a heating suspension period from when the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped until the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 1, adding seasoning, or adding another food to be cooked and performing cooking process 2. . Furthermore, it is a period necessary for moving the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key (start key) 151M is pressed to start the next cooking step, and the process proceeds to P4, the cooking step 2.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 is opened once during the pause period P3 and then closed. The door opening/closing signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 described above is used by the control device 40.
Note that the control device 40 measures the time required from the time the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, from that point on, the input key is not pressed. A safety measure has been adopted to prevent the heating operation from starting even if 151M is pressed. The cooking process 2 will not start unless the input key (start key) 151M is pressed after the door 7 is closed.

The cooking process 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (for example, 90° C.). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at an arbitrary timing, the microwave irradiation is stopped instantly and the heating operation is stopped.

In the cooking process 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M. Depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in FIG. 45 shows a case where the input key 152M of the central operation section 15M is pressed to end the cooking process 2. When the input key 152M is pressed to instruct to stop cooking, the cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, takes out the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. Note that the object to be cooked is placed in an object to be heated N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R of the right heating port 4R is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P6 ("cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked and performing the next cooking process 3. It is. For example, in cooking process 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking process 3, food that has been soaked in seasonings or cooking liquid, or cooked separately by preheating etc. is heated in the same food. It can be added to things. This expands the range of cooking possibilities.

The heating cooking period P6 is a cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking is being done using the right heating port 4R as described above, by operating the input keys 154R and 155R (see FIG. 7), control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) can be set. ) can be set individually by the user US. After the induction heating operation starts, the input keys 154R and 155R may be operated to adjust the heating power, etc.

In this cooking process 3, if the left heating port 4L is used for heating, the user US can individually set the control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L. Can be set to

Then, when the user presses the input key 153R to instruct to stop cooking, the cooking process 3 ends, and the operation in the cooperative cooking mode ends. In addition, in the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time elapses, and the cooking process 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 45, from the time when the right operation section 15R used in cooking process 1 is selected with the input key 152R in order to select the cooperative cooking menu, the right operation section 15R of the right heating port 4R is , it becomes unusable for other cooking. Note that depending on the cooking menu, the input key operation during the preparation period P1 (corresponding to step SG5 of the "confirmation step SP3" described in FIG. 59) may be for the left heating port 4R. In that case, when the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L corresponding to the left heating port 4L is operated, the left heating port 4L becomes occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) The input signal from the right operation section 15R is processed to invalidate or restrict input. For example, the input functions of input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, during the heating cooking period P2 (cooking process 1) to heating cooking period P6 (cooking process 3), the right heating port 4R is not used (input )become unable.
(2) Even in the heating cooking period (cooking step 1), the left operating section 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operating section 15L is not invalidated).

In this manner, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 enters a state in which only the right heating port 4R of the cooking process 3 is occupied from the stage of the cooking process 1.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking menu. Furthermore, when looking at the entire first heating means HM1, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted".

Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
In addition, at the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the user US is in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. There is no restriction on the execution of other cooking menus for the heating means HM2. This is also the same from the heating pause period P3 to the cooking step 2.

Note that even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heating cooking period (cooking process 2), the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is still the standard. If it is higher than the above value, there is a concern that the control device 40, non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before cooking begins in the heating chamber 6. There is.
Therefore, before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message "Due to the high temperature, the second heating The message ``Means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used'' is displayed.

The periods indicated by thick arrows in FIG. 45 are a reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD and an acquisition restriction period TZ2 for an additional recipe data CD. During the acquisition restriction period indicated by the thick arrow, no other recipe data CDs can be acquired other than the recipe data CD acquired during the preparation period P1. In other words, in the acquisition restriction period TZ1 in FIG. 45, once the recipe data CD regarding the first (one type of cooking menu) is acquired, the second recipe data CD cannot be acquired thereafter. There is.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction section 55 performs the restriction operation as described below.
Note that the reception/transmission function of the communication unit 51 is enabled at the time the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).
Furthermore, if one specific input key 153M and another specific input key (e.g. 152L) are operated at the same time, this will result in an abnormal input operation, and the control device 40 will input will not be accepted or processed. When transmitting selection information A (202) before acquiring the recipe data CD, which will be described later, the control device 40 ignores such (simultaneous) input operations of a plurality of specific input keys, or Or, if the input is abnormal, a warning will be issued.

That is, the restriction section 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 45, cooking menu A in a specific cooperative cooking mode OK3 acquired from the outside cannot be changed to another cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger steak") in the same cooperative cooking mode KM1. To change, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

That is, once the limited period shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 45 has entered, by operating the input key 152M, cooking according to the specific cooperative cooking menu A once acquired from the outside can be canceled at any time. Once the cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, so it is necessary to touch the input key 152R again in response to the operation of the communication terminal 200 in that state (preparation period P1).

In addition, for a specific cooperative cooking menu A based on recipe data CD acquired from an external source, the control device 40 does not transfer the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu C to an external ( cannot be obtained from a smartphone 200, etc.).

In other words, when entering the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 45, by operating the input key 151M, you can decide to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and select Cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, no additional recipe data CD can be acquired from outside.
In this way, once the reception restriction period TZ1 of one recipe data CD is entered, reception of other recipe data CDs cannot be started. This reception restriction period TZ1 automatically ends when one cooking menu is completely completed (as shown in FIG. 45). Alternatively, when the start key 151 is pressed and heating cooking starts, it automatically ends. This latter example is not shown in FIG. In addition, the former "cooking menu is completely finished" means that the user US arbitrarily stops heating during the cooking process, and the control device 40 detects the elapsed time and temperature status and automatically starts heating. Including both if stopped.

Next, FIG. 46 will be explained.
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section.
In the example shown in FIG. 46, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
FIG. 46 shows an example in which the user US selects a cooking menu using the input operation section 15, rather than a case in which cooking is performed using external recipe data CD. Note that the cooking process 1 is an example in which the first heating means HM1 is used.

Regarding the contents of the recipe data CD, in the example of FIG. 46, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as firepower are also specified. Note that FIG. 46 does not show an example of the simple recipe data CD.
(1) Waiting for the input of the input key 151M to start the induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or left heating port 4L).
(2) Stop the heating operation when there is an input from the input key 153R (153L), or stop the heating operation at that point when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching the target temperature) are met.

The program included in the recipe data CD defines a heating suspension period P3 and a heating suspension period P5 as in FIG. 45.
The temporal lengths of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 are not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 is counted based on the end point, and if 30 minutes have elapsed, for example, Processing such as issuing a warning and forcibly stopping execution of the cooking menu may be included.

In the example of the recipe data CD in FIG. 46, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally, the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3. A cooking step 3 is provided to perform finishing induction heating to compensate for insufficient heating.

Note that this heating cooker 1 has additional measures to protect the cooking mode setting, control conditions, etc. from being changed carelessly upon receiving a command signal from the outside.

In the case shown in FIG. 46, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the second heating means HM2 is operated. However, at the same time as the second heating means HM2, the third heating means Alternatively, the radiant heating means 12 may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 46, the cooperative cooking menu shown here is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), in which the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu, and then the input key 153R is operated to perform heating cooking operation using the right heating port 4R (induction). This is the period until the start of the

If the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied when the input key 153M is operated, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that the first specific screen 16M1 is not illustrated in FIG. 46.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (on the central display section 16M), one of the cooperative cooking menus can be selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M. After that, if the input key 153R is operated, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R), and the process proceeds to the heating cooking step P2.

At the stage when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the cooperative cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed at a predetermined position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), the input key 154M, 155M operation is not necessary.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking process 1, when an object to be cooked such as a suitable metal pot is placed on the right heating port 4R and the input key 153R is pressed, the cooking operation is started.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2, so that the heating section of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) in use is I know it. In other words, the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in the cooking step 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and makes the right heating port 4R occupied.

The cooking process 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification section 50 will notify you, and the first specific screen 16M1 will also display a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the end time of the cooking process 1 is approaching.
To finish the cooking process 1, the user US only has to press the input key 153R once.

P3 is a heating suspension period from when the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped until the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 1, adding seasoning, or adding another food to be cooked and performing cooking process 2. . Furthermore, it is a period necessary for moving the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 is opened once during the pause period P3 and then closed. The door opening/closing signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 described above is used by the control device 40.

The control device 40 measures the time required from the time when the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain "allowable time" is exceeded, from that point on, the input key 151M is Safety measures have been adopted to prevent the heating operation from starting even if you press . Note that the "permissible time" here may be set to the same time as the time limit TX (30 minutes) described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 39.

The cooking process 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (for example, 90° C.). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at an arbitrary timing, the microwave irradiation is stopped instantly and the heating operation is stopped.

In the cooking process 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M. Depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in FIG. 46 shows a case where the input key 152M of the central operation section 15M is pressed to end the cooking process 2. When the input key 152M is pressed to issue a command to stop cooking, the cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, takes out the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. Note that the object to be cooked is placed in an object to be heated N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R of the right heating section 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P6 ("cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked and performing the next cooking process 3. It is. For example, in cooking process 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking process 3, food that has been soaked in seasonings or cooking liquid, or cooked separately by preheating etc. is heated in the same food. It can be added to thing N. This expands the range of cooking possibilities.

P6 switches from the cooking process 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heat source) to the cooking process 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking process 3, when cooking is being performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, by operating the input keys 154R and 155R (see FIG. 8), control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) can be set. ) can be set individually by the user US.

In this cooking process 3, if the left heating port 4L is used for heating, the user US can individually set the control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L. Can be set to

Then, when the user presses the input key 153R to instruct to stop cooking, the cooking process 3 ends, and the operation in the cooperative cooking mode ends. In addition, in the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time elapses, and the cooking process 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 46, the stage at which the cooperative cooking menu is selected, that is, the moment when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the central display section 16M, From the time when the start of cooking is determined using the input key 151M, the right operation section 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set in the default settings, the left heating port 4L will be in an occupied state.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) The input signal from the right operation section 15R is processed to invalidate or restrict input. For example, the input functions of input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, during the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) to the heating cooking period (cooking process 3), the right heating port 4R cannot be used (input) except in situations where input is required in cooperative cooking mode KM3. It disappears.
(2) Even in the heating cooking period (cooking step 1), the left operating section 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operating section 15L is not invalidated).

In this manner, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 enters a state in which only the right heating port 4R of the cooking process 3 is occupied from the stage of the cooking process 1.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking menu. Furthermore, when looking at the entire first heating means HM1, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted".

Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
In addition, at the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the user US is in the cooperative cooking mode. Execution of other cooking menus is not restricted to the means HM2. This is also the same from the heating pause period P3 to the cooking step 2.

Note that even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heating cooking period (cooking process 2), the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is still the standard. If it is higher than the above value, there is a concern that the control device 40, non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before cooking begins in the heating chamber 6. There is.
Therefore, before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message "Due to the high temperature, the second heating The message ``Means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used'' is displayed.

As explained in FIG. 45, the periods indicated by thick arrows in FIG. 46 are the reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD and the acquisition restriction period TZ2 for an additional recipe data CD.
When the input key 153M is touched once to start the preparation period P1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is not possible to additionally acquire another recipe data CD from the outside as shown in FIG. For example, even during the heating suspension period P3, input to add recipe data CD of other cooking menus is not possible. If the input key 153M for cancellation is pressed after pressing the input key 153M during the preparation period, the input of the input key 153M is canceled and the process returns to the initial state. Thereafter, it is possible to proceed to acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside (separately, an operation for transmitting the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the like is required).

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction unit 55 performs the restriction operation as described below.
Note that the reception/transmission function of the communication unit 51 is enabled at the time the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the restriction unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 46, cooking menu A in a specific cooperative cooking mode OK3 acquired from the outside cannot be changed to another cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger steak") in the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. To change, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

That is, once the limited period shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 46 has entered, by operating the input key 152M, the cooking according to the specific cooperative cooking menu A acquired from the outside can be canceled at any time. Once the cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, so it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again in that state.

In addition, for a specific cooperative cooking menu A based on recipe data CD acquired from an external source, the control device 40 does not transfer the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu C to an external ( communication terminal 200, etc.).

In other words, when entering the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 46, by operating the input key 151M, you can decide to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and select Cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, another (second) recipe data CD cannot be additionally acquired from the outside.

Next, FIGS. 47 to 51 will be explained.
FIG. 47 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data acquisition possible period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 48 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the complex cooking mode KM2 in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 49 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 47. In FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modification of FIG. 49. FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 47.

In FIG. 47, SA1 to SA9 indicate operations of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), and transmits data indicating that it has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and performs self-diagnosis. Start the mode (SA2). That is, it is checked whether the components of the cooking device 1, such as circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is activated to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). Thereafter, a display prompting the user US to select a heating means is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH, and similar audio guidance is provided by the audio notification unit 50 (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1. This is step SA4 in FIG.

The "initial standby period" TP in the first embodiment is a period starting from step SA3A, and the timing at which this initial standby period TP ends is when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). It is. The start input key is the input key (start key) 151M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). That is, by the process of step SM5 explained in FIG. 33, the maximum time is, for example, within 30 minutes.

Next, if the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP in which the user is waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 will not be possible. Menu cannot be selected.
Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, a "recipe acquisition permission condition" to be described later is satisfied. In other words, it is a program that allows the data acquisition section 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 153M after step SA3A, the acquisition of the recipe data CD in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is permitted at the moment the user US presses the input key 153M (if in the combined cooking mode KM2) is the input key 154M or 155M). In the case of the single cooking mode KM3 using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, it is necessary to press the input key 152R or 152L.

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selection section for the audio input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 47, during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M.

Next, the case of complex cooking mode KM2 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 48, the user US operates input key 154M to select composite cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial standby period TP, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed.

During the initial standby period TP, if the "recipe acquisition conditions" are met, the data acquisition section 53 acquires the recipe data CD of the control menu (for example, "warming") of the complex cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication section 51. can.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the complex cooking mode KM2 acquired from the outside can be canceled using the input key 152M.
Actually, in the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on the screen, the input key 152M may be pressed.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M (there are some control conditions that cannot be changed). In this case as well, since the control conditions are displayed on the displayed second specific screen 16M2, it is only necessary to press the input key 156M or the like while viewing the display.

By the way, the input key 154M also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 48, during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for complex cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M.

Also in the case of FIG. 48, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key (start key) 151M is operated (SA7). Then, the actual heating operation starts immediately after that (SA9).
Note that since the initial standby period TP ends at step SA9 as described above, the recipe data CD for another complex cooking mode KM2 cannot be obtained from the outside after this (however, if the recipe data CD is input during the cooking process, If the composite cooking mode KM2 is canceled using the key 152M, the recipe data CD can be acquired again).

The time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD in step SA3 and step SA4 in FIG. 48 is limited to within 30 minutes. If 30 minutes elapse, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, since the user US may have forgotten the operation input. Alternatively, the audio notification section 51 instructs an operation such as issuing a warning (see step SL8 in FIG. 38).

Note that instead of restricting the time difference between the recipe data CD acquisition between step SA3 and step SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4, which is the point at which the initial standby period TP starts, is restricted to within 30 minutes. You may change it to limit it to .

As is clear from FIG. 48, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 in the initial standby period TP is the period TB1 in which the recipe data CD of the complex cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

In the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the cancelable period TB2 of the recipe data CD in the complex cooking mode.
Further, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the control condition (control data) changeable period TB3 of the recipe data CD in the complex cooking mode KM2.

Next, FIG. 49 will be explained.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 47. In FIG. Similar to FIG. 47, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operations of the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 when executing cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Step SA4 is when the user US selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 by touching the input key 153M. Also in the case of FIG. 49, the initial standby period TP is a period that starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed.

Even in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 shown in FIG. 49, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes), so step SA4 is performed. At this point, the "recipe acquisition permission conditions" are met.

If the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, the data acquisition section 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication section 51.
In FIG. 49, the acquisition timing of the recipe data CD is different from the example shown in FIG. 47, as described below.

Unless the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be specified.

Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition section 53 is a program that allows acquisition of the recipe data CD. The recipe data CD can be acquired from this step SA4 (in reality, the recipe data CD is subject to constraints such as the performance of the communication infrastructure, so acquisition may not be completed instantaneously, and may take a few seconds to 20 seconds. may be required).

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

However, there are cases where the user US does not know that he has switched to voice input mode 1 at the above stage. Alternatively, it is assumed that the user was not aware of the long press operation.
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 49, after the automatic switching, when displaying on the first specific screen 16M1 that the recipe data CD has been acquired, the screen displays that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1. At the same time, the audio notification unit 50 also provides notification. Note that FIG. 50 shows an example of the actual first specific screen 16M1.

Therefore, from step SA5 shown in FIG. 49, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted. Therefore, the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input from step SA5.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M.

Next, FIG. 50 will be explained.
FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modification of FIG. 49.
The auxiliary information 179 shown in FIG. 50 is of two types. That is, one is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted since the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples of control conditions that can be input (for example, standard values for preheating temperature).

At the stage of FIG. 50, as is clear from the fact that the light emitting parts 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not emitting light, control conditions cannot be input even if the input keys are touched (in this example, , because it is set to the above-mentioned "touch input mode 1A").
Further, as is clear from the fact that the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M does not emit light, even if the input key 151M is pressed, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage. This is because the input of the control conditions has not been completed.

Next, FIG. 51 will be explained.
FIG. 51 is a time chart for explaining the entire obtainable period of recipe data CD and control operations in cooperative cooking mode KM1, and shows a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 47.

In FIG. 51, SA1 to SA9 indicate operations of the control device 40, similar to FIG. 47.
In the example shown in FIG. 51, the hardware configuration of the voice input dedicated key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is illuminated from below by a light emitting element (LED) (not shown) disposed below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 becomes effective when the input key 153M or 154M is touched after the control device 40 is activated (step SA4). Furthermore, after the input function is enabled, the operation section (key operation surface) of the input key 180 becomes conspicuous in the operation section 15 because it is illuminated by the light emitting element (not shown).

The initial standby period TP starts from the time when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

Step SA4 is a point in time when either one of the input keys 153M or 154M is touched, as in FIG. 48. At this point, since the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, the recipe data CD can be acquired. Thereafter, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key 151M is operated.

In the example of FIG. 51, recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 after the input key 153M is touched. Note that when the input key 153M is not touched but the input key 154M is touched, the recipe data of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

After the input key 153M or 154M is operated, when the input key 180 is touch input operated at step SA5, the control device 40 shifts to voice input mode 2. Therefore, after this step SA5, the user US can input control conditions by voice.
In the example of FIG. 51, the voice input mode 2A is used, so the input functions of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 are temporarily disabled. . Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touched, nothing can be input.

Next, FIG. 52 will be explained.
What is shown in FIG. 52 shows the main processing of the control device 40 during a period until heating cooking is started using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. In particular, it shows processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients.

In FIG. 52, the recipe data CD acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG. 39.

At the stage of step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M. That is, at least the identification information 167 is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 44 and 50).

In the next step SS32, in order to display food ingredients, it is determined whether there is a display command from the user US. In the example of FIG. 50, since the voice input mode 1 has already been entered, if a prescribed term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is uttered by voice, this step SS32 will be answered with "Yes". The judgment is as follows. The audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10) analyzes this audio signal, and reads data on food components of the target cooking menu from the storage device 41.

In the central display section 16M, a food ingredient display screen 16M1A as shown in FIG. 24(A) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS33). The amount of energy, protein, fat and iron is then displayed in grams.
Next, the process advances to step SS34 for determining whether the input key 151M has been pressed. In this step SS34, an input is waited for a certain amount of time until the user US performs an operation. If the input key 151M is pressed during the standby time, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, driving of the heating means (first heating means HM1, etc.) is started (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed and there is no voice command to display food components for a certain period of time from the time of step SS31, the determination in step SS32 becomes "No".

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process advances to step SS36. In step SS36, it is determined whether there is a command to display the nutritional components of the food. In the example of FIG. 50, since the mode has already shifted to voice input mode 1, at this stage of step SS36, a prescribed term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is uttered by voice.

Then, the audio signal analysis section 58 (see FIG. 11) analyzes this audio signal, and reads out the nutritional component data of the target cooking menu from the storage device 41. Then, the determination in step SS36 is "Yes". Note that even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel voice input mode 2 and the input key 156M is pressed, the result in step SS36 becomes "Yes".

If the determination in step SS36 is "Yes", a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 24(B) is displayed on the display section 16 (center display section 16M) (step SS37). The amount of energy, protein, fat and iron is then displayed in grams. Then, the process advances to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if you have not operated the function setting input key 151KP in advance to display the food components and nutritional components individually each time before starting cooking, , the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 52 are not performed.

In the examples of FIGS. 47 to 51, the independent cooking mode KM3 is not shown, but similarly to the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1, during the initial standby period TP, the Recipe data CD can be acquired from outside.

Next, the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 53 will be explained.
A communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone includes a transmitter and a receiver 210, a communication controller 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, and a display screen. , a cooking device database (storage section) 217 , a posture detection section 218 , a remote control information generation section 219 , and a storage section 220 . The transmitter and receiver 210 includes an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two routes can be used: wireless communication via the Internet and near field communication (NFC).

222 is an audio input unit that converts the speech (voice) of the user US etc. into an input signal.
The touch-type operation section 215, the terminal-side display section 216, and the voice input section 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation section 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the audio signal from the audio input unit 222 and performs term searches, information searches, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside this communication terminal 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300 to provide a search function outside the communication terminal 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the tilt and orientation of the communication terminal 200. Thereby, a signal detecting the vertical direction of the communication terminal 200 is output to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection section 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal-side display section 216.
The central processing unit 212 inputs the signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 to the remote control information generation unit 219.

The central processing unit 212 includes a recipe data acquisition section 230, a recipe data transmission section 231, a terminal side recipe selection section 232, and a food component data acquisition section 233, respectively. Note that the recipe data acquisition unit 230, recipe data transmission unit 231, terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and food component data acquisition unit 233 may be functionally realized as a whole by one computer program, or may be implemented separately. The control circuit may be composed of the following control circuits.

The cooking device database 217 stores the “notification data” 223 of the cooking device 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display section 16M and the audio notification section 50 of the cooking device 1. I own it.
The heating cooker database 217 also holds "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1.

Furthermore, the cooking device database 217 stores food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data 226 regarding the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food components (energy, fat, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (potassium, calcium, etc.) are collectively referred to as "food component information" DD.

The notification data 223, the remote control data 224, and the food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning, but if the network NW is The food component information may be obtained by connecting through the cloud server 300 and downloading it from the cloud server 300. In other words, the cooking device database 217 does not need to be permanently stored and constructed, and information may be acquired as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The heating cooker database 217 acquires from the cloud server 300 recipe data CDs for cooking menus (for example, "Ratatouille") that can be used in various types of cooking performed with the heating cooker 1, particularly in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. Alternatively, the information may be acquired from another communication terminal 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generating section 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking device 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation section 225, respectively, and generates a remote control for the cooking device 1. Generate information.

The "remote control information" in the first embodiment refers to information issued from the communication terminal 200 for remotely operating the cooking device 1. Therefore, when cooking data is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1, the data becomes one type of remote control information.
The "remote control information" includes information regarding input operations of the heating cooker 1 that are compatible with all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and compound cooking mode KM2, as well as information regarding input operations in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, compound cooking mode KM2, etc. It includes display information on the central display section 16M, and further includes display information on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L. However, in all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1, information serving as a command to start the heating operation is not included. Therefore, the cooking device 1 will not start the heating operation based on this remote control information.

Note that the "remote operation information" may not include the display information on the central display section 16M and the display information on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L. Further, command information for functions that can be set using the function setting key 115 described above cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, nor can it be generated by the communication terminal 200. That is, the function setting mode of the cooking device 1 cannot be started from the communication terminal 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal 200 according to a control program stored in the ROM/RAM, and reads necessary data from the ROM/RAM in the process of executing the processing, and performs processing. The data generated in the process of executing is stored in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a nonvolatile memory made of a semiconductor, and can store information about the cooking device 1 read from the transmitting unit and the receiving unit 210. For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD of a specific cooking menu downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

Information about the heating cooker 1 is acquired from the first server 321 (not shown), which is a component of the cloud server 300. Then, the communication terminal 200 may obtain the information from the first server 321 via the network NW.

When the user US touches a specific part of the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generation section 219 generates remote operation information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitter and receiver 210 to the cooking device 1 .

If the heating cooker 1 has already been powered and started, the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 handles the received remote control information as cooking mode input operation information. For example, when a remote control signal related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display section 16M is changed to the reception standby screen (Fig. (not shown). These cooperative operations will be explained from FIG. 52 onwards.

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote control information, the display on the terminal side display section 216 changes based on the remote control information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal side display section 216 in the display operation section 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display contents of the central display section 16M of the heating cooker 1 change in conjunction with each other at any time, but the timing of the change is It is not completely synchronized with the heating cooker 1.

In the communication terminal 200, even if command data for a specific cooking menu is generated as remote control information, in order for the heating cooker 1 to recognize it as regular setting information, a predetermined process (judgment) on the heating cooker 1 side is required. (including) has been completed.

The recipe data CD for the cooking menu (for example, hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes data specifying the heating means from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step, and default setting control conditions (for example, the heat level, the heat value). , heating time, etc., but is not limited to this). This information (recipe data CD) is transmitted all at once after a specific transmission key 240 (see FIG. 54) of the communication terminal 200 is pressed.

That is, on the first specific screen 16M1, detailed control condition data that can be arbitrarily set by the user US can be transmitted to the cooking device 1 without individually setting the data. Note that, as described above, the recipe data CD referred to here is a simple recipe data CD. The simple recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means, information on the heating port, etc.), information on the cooking process, information indicating the order of the heating means to be driven, etc. It mainly consists of commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
In other words, the "simple recipe data" CD mainly consists of identification information that specifies a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 has data (food component data) on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods. .

The "food component data" of the food component data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored since the communication terminal 200 was manufactured. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology makes the ``Japanese Food Standard Composition Table'' available to the public (on the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal 200 may acquire data on a specific food from this data and store it in the food component data acquisition unit 233 for each food.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires a recipe data CD of a cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) from the cloud server 300, data such as nutritional components for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300. In this case, the communication terminal 200 can replenish data such as nutritional components and provide the data to the cooking device 1. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, FIG. 54 will be explained.
In FIG. 54, steps SE1 to SE12 show the main operation steps from the time of startup of the communication terminal 200, and mainly show the operation of transmitting the recipe data CD.

On the touch operation unit 215 of the communication terminal 200, the user US performs an operation to connect to the cloud server 300 or activate a search function (step SE1). Then, a search for a cooking menu is performed by operating a search condition input key, a cooking menu name input key, etc. shown on the terminal side display section 216 (step SE2).
By touch-operating the terminal-side display section 216, the user US can display the desired cooking menu on the terminal-side display section 216 (for example, one or more cooking menu candidates can be displayed on one display screen). displayed) (step SE3).

By default setting, the terminal-side display unit 216 may simultaneously display a large number of various cooking menus as a list in a predetermined order and rule. For example, the cooking menu names may be displayed in order of "Aiueo", or the user US may use the search function to say the cooking name such as "hamburger" and search by voice input. .

When one cooking menu displayed on the terminal side display section 216 is selected (touch operation is performed), the screen is switched to a dedicated screen for that cooking menu. That is, if only such a specific cooking menu is selected, the determination in step SE4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE5.
On the other hand, on the terminal side display unit 216, input keys (icons) such as "Search for other menus" and "Search again" are also displayed on the screen displaying the search results, so if you touch them, This step SE4 results in a "No" determination, and the display returns to the search input screen.

In step SE5, when one cooking menu displayed (in the search screen) is selected by touch operation, or when the displayed range of cooking menus is selected by voice input, one cooking menu is selected. The recipe selection unit 232 detects that the recipe has been selected (step SE6). Then, the first screen 216A is displayed (step SE5).
The central processing unit (CPU) 212 displays identification information (cooking name, etc.) regarding the selected one cooking menu, information on the heating means to be used, etc. on the terminal side display section 216. This display screen is hereinafter referred to as the "first screen" 216A.

The first screen 216A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 56(A), and the information displayed on the first screen 216A is, for example, as follows.
(1) Cooking time (2) Amount (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) How to make (name of cooking mode to select with heating cooker 1, input operation section, etc.)

When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 (see FIG. 56) on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation. The display content is switched from the screen 216A to the second screen 216B (step SE7). If the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is not selected, the process returns from step SE6 to step SE2, and another cooking menu can be searched and selected.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237 of this cooking menu is touched, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 generates correspondence information KID that allows identification of a specific input key (for example, 153M) corresponding to the confirmed cooking menu. The information is read from the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217 and transmitted all at once when transmitting "notice information A (201)", which will be described later.

In FIG. 54, step SE6A is provided as an optional function, so it is indicated by a broken line. In this step SE6A, when the confirmation key (icon) 237 (see FIG. 56) of the cooking menu is touched, it is displayed on the first screen 216A or This is a step to display on the second screen 216B.

The purpose of the advance notice information (also referred to as "advance notice") 201 is to indicate that one recipe data CD is in the preparation stage to be transmitted to the cooking device 1 .
This preview information A (201) may be simple data that allows identification of the type of cooking mode. In other words, only the identification information indicating one cooking menu is sufficient, and there is no need to include information that can specify which of the three types, cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and independent cooking mode KM1.

The second screen 216B, which starts displaying after the notification information A (201) is transmitted, displays information that requests the heating cooker 1 to determine whether or not to transmit recipe data related to the selected cooking menu. (Details will be explained in FIG. 56). Note that depending on the cooking menu, either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L may be usable. In that case, the advance notice A (201) includes advisory information that allows the user US to select on the cooking device 1 which of the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L to use.

As will be explained with reference to FIG. 56(B), upon receiving the advance notice A (201), the heating cooker 1 presses the input key (for example, 152L or 152R) on either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L. The action of pressing is required. In response to this operation, the cooking device 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 "selection information A (confirmation information A)" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected. Note that, simultaneously with the preview information A (201), correspondence information KID that can identify one specific input key may be transmitted. With this configuration, the heating cooker 1 can reliably determine the specific input key that requires operation by the user US. However, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the correspondence information KID is held (stored) in the storage device 41, so the correspondence information KID does not necessarily need to be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

When the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, if recipe data is not used, press the start key 151M on the central operation section 15M, and then press the start key 151M on the right operation section 15M. It was a two-step method in which the input key 153R of the controller 15R or the input key 153L of the left operating section 15L was pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of cooking using recipe data, even if the cooking process 1 in the linked cooking mode KM1 is performed in the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the second screen 216B shows that the cooking device 1 side The objects that are required to be operated are the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R (specific input keys 123L and 123R). In other words, "selection information A" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected is transmitted from the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R, but not from the central operation section 15M.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the heating port "selection information A" (confirmation information A) 202 as described above, a "Yes" determination is made in step SE8.
In FIG. 54, step SE6A and step SE8 are provided as optional functions, and are therefore indicated by broken lines.
If the optional function is not to be used, the process proceeds to step SE9 while maintaining the second screen 216B that started displaying from step SE6.

The step SE8 is for determining whether there is an operation of pressing either the input key (152L or 152R) of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L of the cooking device 1.
When there is an operation to press an input key on either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L, the cooking device 1 transmits a signal indicating the result to the communication terminal 200, so the determination in step SE8 is "Yes". , proceed to step SE8A.

Since the signal of advance notice information A (201) has been transmitted to the cooking device 1 at the stage of step SE6, upon reception of the advance notice information A (201) (step SE8), the control device 40 transmits the signal from the communication terminal 200. You may start processing to prepare for cooking using the acquired recipe data CD. For example, a warning message such as ``Since recipe data will now be received, you cannot start any other cooking'' may be displayed on all the display units 16 (16M, 16L, 16R).

On the other hand, the communication terminal 200 repeatedly checks at regular time intervals whether or not the selection information A (202) has not been received from the cooking device 1. If the selection information A (202) has not been received, the process proceeds to time limit processing (step SE12). . In the time limit process, the elapsed time from step SE6 is measured, and when a certain time limit (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, error processing is performed and the operation shown in FIG. 54 is stopped. In other words, even if the user US forgets the sending operation midway through, the process automatically returns to step SE2.

When the selection information A (202) of the heating ports 4L and 4R is received from the cooking device 1, the determination in step SE8 is "Yes", and the second screen 126 that started to be displayed in step SE6 is changed to the one shown in FIG. 58(B). The screen changes to the second screen A (216B1) as shown.
Then, the user is advised to touch the input key 240 for transmission displayed on the second screen A (216B1).

In step SE9, when the user US touches the send key (icon) 240 on the second screen 216B, or when the user US touches the send key 240 on the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. , step SE9 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SE10.
In step SE10, the cooking menu (recipe data) selected in step SE6 is transmitted to the cooking device 1.

Next, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 switches the display content from the second screen 216B or the second display screen A (216B1) to the third screen (step SE11). There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2 as shown in FIG. 57. This will be explained with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 55 will be explained.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
In the control device 40, the communication unit 51 in charge of data acquisition processing performs operations in steps SC1 to SC11 described below in cooperation with the data acquisition unit 53 (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

In the heating cooker 1, at the stage of first establishing a communication state with the communication terminal 200, the communication unit 51 sends data including the "apparatus identification information"("preparationinformation") to the communication terminal 200. 203).
After the communication state is established, when recipe data CD is received from the outside via the communication unit 51, the data is temporarily stored in the memory (step SC1).
The communication unit 51 first acquires the overall status information of the cooking device 1 . This status information is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1. Therefore, for example, the information is information that confirms the state of the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 by the heating control unit 43.

For example, the communication unit 51 acquires information such as that the control conditions have already been set, that the state is in a standby state immediately before heating starts, and that the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 is being received ( Step SC2).

The communication unit 51 repeatedly performs this state checking operation for each component of the heating cooker 1 at regular time intervals to collect the latest and accurate data.
In this way, information that can be used to determine whether or not the heating cooker 1 is in a state where it can shift to control according to the contents of the received recipe data CD is aggregated by the communication unit 51. That is, the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 compares the content of the data including the device identification information transmitted immediately before with the content of the recipe data CD received from the communication terminal 200 in the step SC1 (step SC3). ). Note that, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. 55, data collection and collation are performed many times within a certain time limit.

If it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the content of the data transmitted from the communication unit 51 and the content of the received recipe data, the determination of the status information is finished (step SC4). In this step SC4, it is determined whether "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied, such as the temperature of the heating chamber 6 and the situation of the "peak cut value" that defines the upper limit of the maximum power consumption. This is also performed at the same time, and this will be explained with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

If the determination result in step SC4 is "Yes", the data acquisition section 53 stores the recipe data CD in a predetermined storage area in response to the determination result from the communication section 51, and stores the recipe data CD in a predetermined storage area for the heating cooking that will be performed immediately thereafter. Prepare (step SC5).

Next, the process proceeds to step SC6, and the data acquisition unit 53 sends a signal (state confirmation result) from the communication unit 50 to the communication terminal 200, which is the source of the recipe data CD, indicating that the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired. Send. The "state confirmation result" here corresponds to the process of step SG10 in FIG. 60. In addition, upon receiving the information of the status confirmation result, the communication terminal 200 determines that the transmission of the recipe data CD has been successful (step SG11 in FIG. 60).

Furthermore, the data acquisition section 53 displays on the display section 51 that the recipe data CD has been acquired (step SC6). An example of this display will be explained later in FIG. 57(A).
The "setting information" included in the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 at this stage is control conditions prepared in advance on the communication terminal 200 side (for example, thermal power is 1000 W, heating time is 10 minutes). That is, since the remote control information 219 includes control conditions set by default, it will be referred to as "setting information A" in the following description.

Next, in step SC7, it is determined whether the control conditions specified by the user US are acceptable. When the user US presses the start key 151M, it is assumed that the user US has agreed to the control conditions, and the control device 40 treats the setting information A as "confirmed setting information" and stores " "Final setting information" storage area (step SC8). When the cooking process 1 is started using the right operation section 15R, the process shifts to a standby state in which it waits for the input key 153R to be touched (step SC9).

On the other hand, if the user US wishes to change the control conditions displayed in step SC6, by touching the input keys 156M and 157M, another control condition is displayed on the central display section 16M in accordance with the operation (step SC10). ). Then, since it is possible to return to step SC7, the user agrees to the revised control conditions and proceeds to step SC8. That is, the setting information A becomes the "final setting information" after some control conditions are changed by input from the user US.

Note that, at the stage of step SC8, the state of the central display section 15M immediately before the start key 151M is pressed is, for example, a display indicating that "heating will start when the start key is pressed" as explained in FIG. 44. On the other hand, after pressing the start key 151M, a display prompting the final operation is displayed on the display section of the corresponding heating section. When the right heating port 4R is used as described above, a display recommending pressing the input key 153R is displayed on the right display section 15R. Further, the light emitting portion 21R of the corresponding input key (153R) becomes a blinking display.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step SC4 is "No", the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and sends the recipe from the communication unit 51 to the outside (the communication terminal 200 as the transmission source). Data of a signal (notification of non-permission) containing information indicating that the data CD cannot be received is transmitted (step SC11). The "non-permission notification" here is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 at step SG10 in FIG. 56. Although FIG. 55 shows the case of the cooking menu belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "disapproval notification" message is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the independent cooking mode KM1.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the notification of disapproval of step SC11 from the cooking device 1, it displays this on the terminal side display section 216. Note that the notification may be made using the speaker 214 of the communication terminal 200. These will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, FIG. 56 will be explained.
FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 53.
What is shown in FIG. 56(A) is the first screen 216A. That is, it shows a state in which the user US has already found recipe information for one desired cooking menu and displayed it.

In FIG. 56(A), 234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information on the first screen 216A. In FIG. 56(A), "IH menu" is displayed to indicate that the menu is for induction heating cooking.
On the first screen 216A, an image display section 235 such as a schematic diagram or a photograph (still image) that provides a simple image of the food to be prepared in the cooking menu is displayed in a position close to the cooking name.

On this first screen 216A, as shown in FIG. 56(A), in addition to information on the cooking name (identification information), the following five pieces of information are simultaneously displayed. However, due to constraints on the display area of the terminal-side display section 216, not all information can be viewed in list form.
(1) Cooking time (2) Amount (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) How to make it (name of cooking mode to select on heating cooker 1, input operation unit to be used, etc.)

Reference numeral 236 is process information indicating two types of heat sources and the order in which they are driven, which is part of the "how to make" described above.
Note that this FIG. 56(A) only shows a part of the first screen 216A. If you scroll the screen by moving it upward while touching this first screen 216A with your fingertip FG, this first screen 216A will be displayed continuously in the vertical direction, and detailed information such as ingredients and preparation will be displayed. They will be displayed sequentially.

237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237 is the confirmation key (icon) of the cooking menu explained in step SE5 of FIG. 238 is an input key (icon) for instructing to close this first screen 216A.

Next, FIG. 56(B) will be explained.
When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and changes the menu from the display on the first screen 216A. , the display is switched to the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 56(B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the second screen 216B. In FIG. 56(B), "Preparing to send IH settings" is displayed to indicate that the process is preparing to send setting information for induction heating cooking.
Reference numeral 240 is an input key (icon) for instructing transmission, and when this is pressed, the recipe data of the cooking menu selected in FIG. 56(A) is transmitted to the cooking device 1.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 56(B) is the "input screen waiting for confirmation of the target recipe" in step SE6 shown in FIG.
In the state of this second screen 216B, the user US needs to touch the input key (icon) 152R or 152L on either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L of the cooking device 1. User US can be recognized.
After the touch operation, the input key 240 on this second screen 216B is pressed. Note that 241 is an input key for canceling, and by touching this, it is possible to return to the state shown in FIG. 56(A).

Next, FIG. 57(A) will be explained.
FIG. 57(A) is a third screen 216C1 that displays the transmission results. Further, FIG. 57(B) is another third screen 216C2 that displays the transmission result.
Either one of these third screens 216C1 and 216C2 is a dedicated screen that is always displayed on the terminal side display section 216 after the recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2. The first screen is the third display screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 55(A). The fact that the transmission was successful is displayed in text on the display section 244A.
The other is a third screen 216C2 that is displayed when the transmission from the cooking device 1 ends in failure.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the third screen 216C2 displays in text that the transmission from the heating cooker 1 has failed and the cause thereof.

Next, FIG. 58 will be explained.
58(A) and 58(B) are explanatory diagrams 3 and 4 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 53, and the option settings as explained in FIG. 54. Depending on the function, the display screen 2A (216B1) shown in FIG. 58 is displayed. 240 is the input key (icon) for transmission explained in FIG. 56(B).

FIG. 58(B) shows a second screen that is displayed when the heating means used in the selected cooking menu is being used for another cooking at the stage when the confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216 is pressed. B (216B2).
As is clear from the second screen B (216B2) in FIG. 58(B), the advice information indicating that the recipe data should be sent after finishing the cooking that is being used first (right heating port 4R) is Is displayed.

Next, FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 will be explained.
FIG. 59 is explained with some of the detailed steps in FIG. 60 omitted, and is basically the same as FIG. 60.

In FIG. 59, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established. This is the stage of not transmitting or receiving information regarding a specific recipe data CD.

The next SP2A is a "key identification step" in which preview information A (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 and the content of the preview information A (201) is determined by the control device 40. In this key specifying step SP2A, a specific input key to be operated on the heating cooker 1 is determined from the cooking menu (identification information) of the preview information A (201).

The next step SP2B is a "notification step" in which a specific input key is displayed on the display section 16 in response to the determination result of the key specifying step SP2A. Note that since the correspondence relationship between the specific input key and the display unit 16 is held in advance as data on the control device 40 side, for example, it is determined that the specific input key is “153M” of the central operation unit 15M. In this case, the control device 40 issues a command to display the information on the central display section 16M.

SP3 is a “confirmation step” in which the heating cooker 1 confirms the contents of the advance notice information A (201) and transmits a confirmation signal (selection information A) 202 to the communication terminal 200.
SP4 is a "receiving step" that acquires information on the recipe data CD regarding one food to be cooked.
SP5 is a "standby step" (pre-cooking standby state) in which the cooking device 1 waits for a command to start the cooking operation after the cooking device 1 successfully acquires the recipe data CD.
In FIG. 59, the following explanation will be given, focusing mainly on the time after the communication state is established between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200 (step SG1).

The communication state is established by, for example, transmitting and receiving a preparation signal (preparation information) 203 for mutual authentication between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200. Note that this preparation signal (preparation information) 203 is automatically transmitted when the cooking device 1 is started. Alternatively, a call is made when a specific input key (the input key 153M) is pressed. The preparation signal 203 is a unified signal regardless of the heating means or cooking menu, and includes at least device identification information of the cooking device 1. Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 41, the two-dimensional information 60B that guides the communication terminal 200 to the cloud server 300 is displayed on the initial screen 16MH during initial standby, so that the communication terminal 200 acquires recipe data from the cloud server 300. It is easy to prepare.

In FIG. 59, a case will be described in which a cooking menu related to cooperative cooking mode KM1 is executed. Note that in communication terminal 200, as described above, it is not possible to specify a cooking mode and search for cooking menus for each cooking mode. Furthermore, since it is more efficient to search by type of cooking (for example, Japanese food, Chinese food, etc.), name, abbreviation, etc. than to search by cooking mode, the communication terminal 200 of the first embodiment A method is used to extract cooking menus based on cooking names (including abbreviations), etc.

First, communication terminal 200 searches for a cooking menu. Recipe data for the desired cooking menu may be obtained in advance from the cloud server 300 (step SG2). At this point, the terminal-side display section 216 is a search screen 216P (not shown) displaying search results for cooking menus.

In the communication terminal 200, when one of the plurality of cooking menus displayed on the search screen 216P is selected by touch operation, only the specific (one) cooking menu that the user US wants to cook is displayed on the first screen 216A. (Step SG3). At this point, setting information for executing one specific cooking menu is read from the cooking device database 217 and temporarily held in the recipe selection section 232.

The first screen 216A at step SG3 is as described in FIG. 56(A). When the user US touches the confirm key 237 on this first screen 216A (step SG3A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and displays a second screen instead of the first screen 216A. The screen 216B is displayed on the terminal side display section 216 (step SG3B). Note that in FIG. 59, it is possible to freely touch a specific input key (for example, 153M) on the heating cooker 1 side by the time of step SG3B, but this will be explained with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, advance notice information A (advance notice) 201 is transmitted to the cooking device 1 (step SG3B). In this way, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 is pressed, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 generates preview information A (201) and transmits it.

On the second screen 216B, as explained in FIG. 56(B), information (selection request information) requesting input operation for confirmation on the cooking device 1 side is displayed. This information includes the advance notice information A.
In the example of FIG. 56(B), operation of either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L is specified. The example in FIG. 59 is also in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and since the first cooking process 1 is induction heating, it is necessary to touch the input key 152L of the right operation section 15R, for example.
Note that the touch operation in this case may be either the above-described "long press" operation or the "short press" operation, but if the "long press operation" is performed, the "voice input mode 1" is started.

In this way, on the cooking device 1 side that has received the notice information A (201), the display unit 15 (center display section 15M, left and right display sections 15L and 15R) (step SG4).

As shown in FIG. 59, the key specifying step SP2A continues until step SG4. When the user US touches a specific input key (for example, 153M) before receiving the advance notice information A (notice of advance notice) 201, such input is detected as an input signal of the control device 40 in the key specifying step SP2A. It is detected by the analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10), and information on the operated input keys is recorded (saved) in the storage device 41 in chronological order.

When the preview information A (201) is received, in the key identification step SP2A, the corresponding information KID corresponding to the cooking menu of the preview information A (201) is read from the storage device 41, and a specific input key that requires an input operation is read out from the storage device 41. Identify.
If the extracted specific input key is the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, and if the specific input key 153M has already been touched before receiving the preview information A (201), the specific input key 153M will be touched again. Since it is not necessary to do so, a message to that effect is displayed on the central display section 16M.

On the other hand, the number of extracted specific input keys is not necessarily one. As in the first embodiment, there are a right heating port 4R and a left heating port 4L, and in a specific cooking menu selected by the user US, cooking can be performed using either one of them.
In this case, if the predetermined specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu has not been input touched even once before receiving the notice information A (201), the control device 40 Information that can identify the required specific input key is displayed on the display section 16 such as the central display section 16M.
Suppose that after receiving the notice information A (201), the specific input keys to be operated in the key specifying step SP2A are the input key 152R of the right operation section 15R and the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L. The case where the notification is made will be described below.

In step SG4, when the input key 152L is touched to select the left heating port 4L, the "occupied state" of the heating means is started as described above. If, at this step SG4, the input key 152R of the right operation section 15R is operated earlier than the input key 152L, the operation of the input key 152R will be recognized by the control device 40. . Then, in the next step SG5, the operation information of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200.
Then, the communication terminal 200 can detect that the input key 152R has been operated.

Continuing to explain FIG. 59.
In the notification step SP2B, when the input key 152R is touched (step SG5), data indicating the touch operation result is acquired by the communication terminal 200 (step SG6). Data from the heating cooker 1 indicating this touch operation result may be referred to as a "confirmation signal" or "selection information A" 202 in the following explanation.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the terminal-side display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 displays a message on the second screen A (216B1) saying, "The right IH on button has been pressed." Displayed (if set as an option). If no option is set, the state of the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 56(B) is maintained.

Next, when the send key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 56(B) is pressed, or when the send key 240 on the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. 58(A) is pressed. , recipe data CD for executing a specific cooking menu are transmitted all at once from the communication terminal 200 (step SG7). That is, "command data" (setting information A) for setting the cooking device 1 to a specific state is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 all at once.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 is attached to the outer wall surface of the cooking device 1 in the form of an adapter, so the communication device 51 will be referred to as a “communication adapter” hereinafter.

When the communication adapter 51 receives the command data (step SG8), it then acquires the status information of the heating cooker 1 itself, as explained in FIG. 60. This status information is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1. Therefore, for example, the information is information that confirms the state of the first heating means HM1 by the heating control unit 43.
In this way, the contents of the status information of the heating cooker 1 and the received command data are analyzed, and it is determined whether there is any problem in executing heating cooking according to the received command data (see step SG9 in FIG. 60). .

When the heating cooker 1 determines that there is no problem in cooking, the communication adapter 51 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step SG10). Note that this transmission process corresponds to sending the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in FIG. 55. If the determination result is that there is a problem with the cooking process, a signal (disapproval notification) is sent from the communication adapter 51 of the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal 200 indicating that the recipe data CD cannot be received. Send data. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in FIG. 55.

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the content of the "notification of permission" or "notification of non-permission" from the heating cooker 1 (step SG11).
Then, either the third screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 57(A) or the third screen 216C2 shown in FIG. 57(B) is displayed (step SG12).

As illustrated in FIG. 50, when data for a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") is obtained from recipe data, that cooking menu can be changed to another cooking menu (for example, "karaage" or "tonkatsu"). It cannot be changed. Therefore, input using the input keys 154M and 155M corresponding to the first area 22 is unnecessary, and the corresponding light emitting section 21M does not emit light. Further, the cooking menu cannot be changed at this stage even by voice input.

In addition, when executing cooking with a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, control conditions (for example, cooking time, target heating temperature, etc.) can be set using the input operation unit 15 or voice input before starting cooking. Although the user US can change the control conditions as appropriate, there are some cooking menus in which the control conditions cannot be changed. In addition, the "tolerable setting range" of the control conditions is set in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, and even the cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "tolerable setting range". .

By pressing the start key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started (step SG12 in FIG. 60). However, if the cooking process 1 is an induction heating source (first heating means HM1) that drives the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, in order to start the cooking process 1, the right operation part must be pressed. 15R or the input key 153R or 153L of the left operation section 15L needs to be touched again.

Next, FIG. 60 will be explained.
In FIG. 60, steps SG1 to SG16 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
In FIG. 60, the same parts as in FIG. 59 are given the same reference numerals, so the following description will focus on the different parts.

Step SG9 analyzes the contents of the status information of the cooking device 1 and the received command data, and determines whether there is any problem in executing the cooking according to the received command data.
Here, the "status information" of the heating cooker 1 includes, for example, "the thermal power of induction heating is zero and it is in a standby state immediately before starting heating", or that the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 is The communication adapter 51 acquires information such as the received state and detected temperature. Note that, inside the communication adapter 51, such a status confirmation operation is repeated many times at regular time intervals to collect the latest and accurate data.
In this way, the contents of the status information of the heating cooker 1 and the received command data are analyzed, and it is determined whether there is any problem in executing the heating cooking according to the received command data. Note that such determination processing has been explained in detail in step SC4 of FIG. 55, so the details will be omitted.

In the heating cooker 1, when cooking can be started using the received recipe data, the light emitting parts 21M, 21L, and 21R are used in the input operation part 15 to indicate to the user US the input key that can be operated first. to emit light.
For example, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1,
(1) When the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6, the light emitting parts 21M of the input keys 156M and 157M are made to emit light (step SG13). Then, preparation is made for inputting control conditions.
(2) When the cooking process 1 is performed using either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the light emitting portions 21L and 21R of the input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, and 155R are made to emit light (step SG13).

As described above, in step SG13, the light emitting part 21 (21L, 21M, 21R) of the specific input key in the input operation part 15 selected in step SG5 emits continuous light or flashes light to input the input that should be operated first. Make keys visually noticeable.
As shown in FIG. 57(A), when the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L is touched in step SG5, the light emitting section 21L of the input key 153L (see FIG. 7) in the left operation section 15L blinks or lights up continuously (step SG13).

At this point, the light emitting parts 21L of the input keys 155L and 154L may be blinked or lit continuously so that the heating power etc. can be adjusted, but the heating power and time cannot be adjusted after induction heating has actually started. Since it is possible to do so, there is no need to blink or keep the light on continuously.

Next, the process advances to step SG15. In this step SG15, when the start key 153L of the left operation section 15L is pressed, induction heating cooking is started. The communication adapter 51 of the heating cooker 1 performs the operation of acquiring status information again at regular intervals immediately after starting this heating, and transmits the status information to the communication terminal 200.
For cooking in cooperative cooking mode KM1 that does not use recipe data CD, even if cooking step 1 is set to the left heating port 4L, to start cooking, press the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M, and then press the input key 153L. It was a two-step method: push. In this respect, the heating cooking start procedure for the left and right heating ports 4L4R is different when the recipe data CD is used and when it is not used.

In the next step SG16, the communication terminal 200 acquires status information data from the cooking device 1, and monitors on the terminal side display unit 216 that cooking is being performed according to the recipe data set by the user US. can. Note that, at this point, the third screen 216C is not already displayed on the terminal side display section 216.

From step SG5 shown in FIG. 60, the reception restriction period TZ1 starts. That is, if the control device 40 (input signal analysis unit 52) determines that any one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M has been operated after the notification step SP2B (see FIG. 59), the reception starts from that point. A restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 45) starts. In addition, if a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated before the notification step SP2B, the reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 45) starts from the time when the specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated. is started. When this reception restriction period TZ1 starts, all of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M and other input keys (excluding the start switch and stop switch of the input keys 151M, 152M, etc.) The input function in "normal state" is disabled. In other words, a valid input signal cannot be transmitted from the input operation section 15 to the control device 40. Therefore, it becomes impossible to acquire recipe data CD for another cooking menu or input a cooking mode (eg, cooperative cooking mode KM1).
The above-mentioned "unauthorized state" means that upon receiving advance notice information A (advance notice) 201 from the communication terminal 200, the heating cooker 1 prompts the user US to touch a specific input key (for example, 153M). except when requested. That is, it refers to a state in which input keys other than the specific input keys shown on the display section 16 are operated in the notification step SP2B to select a new cooking menu and set control conditions.

Next, FIG. 61 will be explained.
FIG. 61 is a time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 and the cooking device 1 in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 61, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
As explained with reference to FIG. 59, SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established. This is the stage of not transmitting or receiving information regarding a specific recipe data CD.

The next SP2A is a "key identification step" in which preview information A (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 and the content of the preview information A (201) is determined by the control device 40. This key specifying step SP2A starts when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is touched on the cooking device 1. Alternatively, as described with reference to FIG. 41, the process starts when the display screen 2C is displayed on the display section 16 (center display section 16M) and the acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed.
Step SG1A is a step in which the display screen 2C (see FIG. 41) is displayed.

When the user US touches an appropriate specific input key (for example, 153M) in order to execute a desired cooking menu (step SG2B), the history information of this input operation is recorded (stored) in the storage device 41. ) to be done. Further, the cooking device 1 transmits information on the inputted specific input key (correspondence information KID) to the communication terminal 200 . In the communication terminal 200 , the central processing unit (CPU) 212 stores information on the operated specific input key (correspondence information KID) in the cooking device database 217 or the storage unit 220 .

As explained in FIG. 59, step SG4 is a display step performed on the heating cooker 1 side in response to the notice information A (201), but this is a display step performed immediately after the "first determination" of the next step SG5A. It may take place at the same time. Therefore, it is shown in a broken line frame. For example, the display unit 15 (center display unit 15M, left and right display units 15L, 15R) indicates that the operation of one of the specific input keys 152R, 152L on the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L is requested. Display in . In the case of the specific input key 153M, it may be displayed only on the central display section 15M.

Step SG5A is a process corresponding to step SG5 described in FIG. 59. This step SG5A is also called a "key determination step" performed in the confirmation step SP3.
In this step SG5A, information on a specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) corresponding to the identification information of one cooking menu transmitted in the preview information in step SG4, and information on a specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) It is determined whether or not the specific input key matches (hereinafter, this will be referred to as "first determination").

Next, if there is no match as a result of the first determination, it is determined whether a specific input key (for example, 152R) to be operated has been operated (hereinafter, this will be referred to as "second determination").

Note that if the result of the first determination is that there is no match, information on the specific input key to be operated is displayed on the display section 15 (for example, the center display section 15M, right display section 15R), and the displayed specific input key Displays in text, etc. that a key operation is required. That is, in this step SG5A, similar to step SG4 in FIG. 59, information that specifies the input key to be operated (for example, 152L) and prompts the operation is provided in this step SG5A, and then the second determination is performed. do.

If the first determination is that they match, and then the second determination is that they have been manipulated, selection information A (202) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 (step SG5A).
In this way, when an appropriate specific input key is operated before receiving advance notice information A (201) from the communication terminal 200, and when an appropriate specific input key is operated after receiving advance notice information A (201). In either case, the cooking device 1 can be made to acquire the recipe data CD selected by the user US. Moreover, since the specific input key to be operated only needs to be operated once, the operation by the user US is simple.

Furthermore, in this step SG5A, a display may be performed to inform the user US of the latest situation.
For example, when it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key (for example, 153M) has been operated, the input operation section corresponding to the input operation section (for example, the central operation section 15M) in which the input key is arranged is In the display section (for example, 16M), the control device 40 displays information indicating that selection information A (202) has been transmitted (for example, text information such as "A response signal has been transmitted") or information on the recipe data CD. Information indicating the reception process (for example, text information such as "The reception process will begin now") is displayed on the display unit 16 (for example, 16M). This step is included in step SG5A shown in FIG. 61.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
It has specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M determined for each cooking menu, a notification means 90, and a control device 40 that executes cooking using recipe data CD acquired from the outside,
After the control device 40 turns on the main power switch 20,
(1) a key identification step SP2A that detects that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When a notice signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is pressed before and after receiving the notice signal A. a confirmation step SP3 (step SG5A) for determining whether or not the operation is being performed;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting the selection information A (202) via the communication unit 51;
This configuration is characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, when the user US operates a specific input key to be operated in advance on the side of the heating cooker 1, which is suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or when the preview information A is received from the communication terminal 200. In any case, after the user US performs a confirmation operation on the heating cooker 1 side (whether or not the specific input key is operated), the recipe data CD is Since the process proceeds to the acquisition operation, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 related to the second disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second disclosure is as follows:
It has specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M determined for each cooking menu, a notification means 90, and a control device 40 that executes cooking using recipe data CD acquired from the outside,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40
(1) Memorize that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated (see step SG1B in FIG. 61);
(2) When the notification signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is received, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is activated to receive the notification signal A (201). Determine whether it has been operated before (see step SG5A in FIG. 61),
If the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the notice signal A has been operated before receiving the notice signal A (201), selection information A (202) is transmitted (see FIG. 61). (see step SG5A).

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US has previously operated a specific input key to be operated that is suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the heating cooker 1 side, the heating cooker 1 side by such user US Since the process proceeds to the acquisition operation of the recipe data CD after confirming whether or not a specific input key has been operated in advance, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 61, if the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the notice signal A is operated before the notice signal A (201) is received, the process shown in FIG. Since the display operation in step SG4 is not performed, it is possible to avoid creating unnecessary misunderstandings (interpreting that the operation of a specific input key is required again) in the user US who is facing the heating cooker 1. It is the composition.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in this Embodiment 1 is as follows:
The heating means HM1 to HM3 are heated using a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M, a notification means 90, a communication section 51, and a recipe data CD acquired from the outside. and a control device 40 that controls and executes cooking,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a notification step SP2B (see FIG. 59) of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M when a notice signal A (201) corresponding to the cooking of the recipe data CD is received;
(2) After the notification step SP2B, it is determined whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M have been operated, and if it is determined that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M have been operated, the confirmation information A ( 202), a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting the
(4) a restriction step of starting a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 45) when the confirmation information A (202) is transmitted;
The configuration was to execute the steps sequentially.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking device 1 notifies the specific input key to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US in accordance with the advance notice information A from the communication terminal 200, Since the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US is guided, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, when one recipe data CD is selected using the specific input key 153M or the like, a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring the recipe data CD of another cooking menu cannot be started (FIGS. 45 and 61). reference).
Therefore, if you decide to obtain a specific recipe data CD and press the input key 153M, you may inadvertently enter another cooking menu (such as a control menu for another cooking mode) while setting a cooking menu. (including a control menu for the independent cooking mode), it is possible to stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooking system related to the third disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooking system related to the third disclosure is as follows:
A heating cooker 1 having a communication unit 51 and a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M for permitting reception of recipe data CD regarding the food to be cooked via the communication unit 51;
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) On the terminal side display unit 216, the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are sequentially displayed,
(2) The first screen 216A displays a recipe data CD regarding the selected cooking item;
(3) When the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B, and on the second screen 216B, the identification that should be performed before receiving the recipe data CD is performed. displaying preview information A (201) indicating input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M;
(4) Displaying an input key 237 on the second screen 216B that allows the transmission of the selected recipe data CD;
(5) When the input key 237 is operated, setting information A regarding the recipe data CD selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking device 1;
After turning on the main power switch 20 of the heating cooker 1,
(1) a key identification step SP2A of detecting that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated;
(2) When the notification signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is activated to receive the notification signal. a confirmation step SP3 that determines whether or not it has been operated before receiving A;
Execute sequentially,
When the heating cooker 1 confirms that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated in the confirmation step SP3, transmitting selection information A (202);
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the heating cooker 1 detects that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated after turning on the main power switch 20, and detects that the specific input keys 152L, which should be inputted, before acquiring the recipe data CD. , 152R, and 153M are operated, selection information A (202) can be automatically transmitted in order to obtain the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. Therefore, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooking system disclosed in Embodiment 1 is as follows:
A cooking device 1 having a communication unit 51 and a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153 for permitting reception of recipe data CD regarding the food to be cooked via the communication unit 51;
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) On the terminal side display unit 216, the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are sequentially displayed,
(2) The first screen 216A displays a recipe data CD regarding the selected cooking item;
(3) When the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B, and the specific input to be operated on the second screen 216B before receiving the recipe data Display preview information A (201) showing keys 152L, 152R, and 153,
(4) Displaying on the second screen 216B an input key 240 for transmitting the selected recipe data;
(5) When the input key 240 is operated, setting information A regarding the recipe data CD selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking device 1;
When the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153 shown on the second screen 216B are operated, the heating cooker 1 transmits selection information A (202) and enters the reception restriction period (TZ1: FIG. 45). , see FIG. 60);
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the cooking device 1 can present specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance in response to the operation by the user US. Therefore, it is possible to notify by the advance notice information A from the communication terminal 200 and guide the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US to the correct input key (for example, 153M) of the input operation unit 15.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability. It also prevents you from inadvertently receiving another cooking menu (such as a control menu for another cooking mode) during the process of setting one cooking menu, and prevents you from receiving a desired recipe data CD. can be executed.

Furthermore, the heating cooking system disclosed in this Embodiment 1 has the following features:
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The input operation sections 15L, 15M, and 15R of the heating cooker 1 include an individual operation section 15M that corresponds to only one of the heating means, and a shared operation section 15L, 15R that corresponds to a plurality of the heating means. ,
Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R in the individual operating sections 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M in the common operating section 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, a first cooking program (induction heating cooking program) is selected from the storage device 40 and first menu information (induction heating cooking menu) is displayed on the display section 15. It is possible to display
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, the second cooking program (for cooperative cooking, combined cooking, induction heating) is selected from the storage device 41, and the second menu information (cooperative cooking) is displayed on the display section 16. (cooking menu, combined cooking menu, induction heating menu).
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) In response to the input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and 216A),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, the second screen 216B is displayed;
(3) On the second screen 216A, whether or not the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed on the second screen 216B is selected is displayed. The selection request information shown is displayed (see B in FIG. 56),
(4) When a transmission command is received after the selection of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M is completed (step SG7, see FIG. 59), the specific recipe data CD is transmitting to the heating cooker 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 selects the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US. 201) can be presented according to the corresponding information KID. Therefore, when the advance notice information A is received from the communication terminal 200, the correct specific input key is notified by the notification means 90, and the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US can be correctly guided.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, the heating cooking device 1 illustrated in the first embodiment uses the key specifying section 21 (light emitting sections 21M, 21L, 21R) of the notification means 90 to determine the input operation to be performed in advance according to the operation of the user US. The specific input keys in the sections 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) can be individually notified.
This guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3 (to the correct specific input key), thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

In the first embodiment, when the communication terminal 200 receives the selection information A (202), the communication terminal 200 changes the setting information A regarding the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A to the cooking device 1. If it is determined that the setting information A has been transmitted to the heating cooker 1 (see step SG11 in FIG. 59), transmission success information 244A indicating that the setting information A has been successfully transmitted is transmitted to the heating cooker 1. A configuration characterized by displaying on three screens 216C (see step SG12 in FIG. 59) was adopted.

With this configuration, the transmission status of the recipe data CD can also be confirmed on the communication terminal 200 side on the terminal side display section 216 (third screen 216C).
With these, it is possible to realize a heating cooking system that improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 shown in Embodiment 1 (according to the first disclosure and the second disclosure) employs the following configuration.
That is, the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment has the following features:
The input operation section 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation section 15 during the period in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the control device 40 transmits the recipe data CD via the communication section 51. The configuration is characterized in that it enables the acquisition of the recipe data CD, and receives a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types of cooking modes (cooperative, combined, independent) or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode compatible signal MC1,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode compatible signal MC1, the control device 40 enables the acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and receives a control condition setting command from the user US. This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With such a configuration, the input operation section 15 can control the timing at which various recipe data CDs are acquired from the outside. Furthermore, the touch-type input keys (153M, etc.) on the input operation section 15 can be used to switch to the voice input mode, so that the troublesome input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This makes it possible to improve the operability and reduce the workload of the user US.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 related to the sixth disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the sixth disclosure is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2 capable of heating and cooking at a plurality of heating locations (above the top plate 3 and inside the heating chamber 6), respectively;
a plurality of input operation units 15 (15L, 15R, 15M) provided for each of the plurality of heating locations;
Specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M are arranged on each of the input operation units 15 (15L, 15R, and 15M);
at least one display section 16 (16L, 16R, 16M) disposed on each of the input operation sections 15 (15L, 15R, 15M);
A control device 40 that executes cooking using a recipe data CD acquired from an external source,
The specific input keys (15L, 15R, 15M) are determined for each type of cooking menu,
After the main power is turned on, the control device 40
(1) Displaying the standby initial screen 16MH on at least one of the display units (16L, 16R, 16M);
(2) Displaying on the standby initial screen 16MH at least one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M that require an input operation when starting acquisition of the recipe data;
(3) a key identification step SP2A of detecting that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH are operated;
(4) When a notice signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, check whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M defined in the specific cooking menu have been operated. A confirmation step SP3 (step SG5A) to determine,
Execute sequentially,
Furthermore, if it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M have been operated, the input key corresponding to the input operation section 15 (15L, 15R, 15M) in which the input key is arranged is After receiving the notice signal A (201) on the display section 16 (16L, 16R, 16M), the control device 40 displays information indicating that the selection information A (202) has been transmitted or the recipe data. Displaying at least one of the information indicating the receiving process;
(See especially FIG. 61).

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 153M) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the side of the heating cooker 1 in advance, or if the input key from the communication terminal 200 is In any case, when a specific input key to be operated is operated after receiving advance notice information A (201), the user US performs a confirmation operation on the heating cooker 1 side (whether or not the specific input key is operated or not). ) (step SG5A in FIG. 61), the process proceeds to the recipe data CD acquisition operation (step SG8), thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.
Further, the heating cooker 1 displays and informs the user US of at least one of the information indicating that the selection information A (202) has been transmitted or the information indicating the receiving process of the recipe data. Therefore, the level of understanding of the user US can be further improved.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 has the following features:
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven at a time difference to perform one cooking,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 28) to select the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the input operation unit 15, when the permission conditions (see FIG. 29) are satisfied. displays a first specific screen 16M1 on the display unit 16 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1;
The control device 40 issues command 2 from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (see FIGS. 17 and 18). If received, the display section 16 displays information on at least one of food components and nutritional component amounts regarding a specific cooking item (see FIG. 24) that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. It had a configuration to do so.

That is, in the stages shown in FIGS. 20 to 23, when the user US issues a command to display either food components or nutritional components using voice input, or when the operation support information 170 is displayed (see FIG. 20), when the input key 158M or 159M is touched, the first specific screen 16M1 is temporarily switched to the display screen of FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B), and the food component display screen 16M1A is displayed. and the nutritional information display screen 16M1B can be displayed.

With this configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is selected using the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is possible to easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to the cooking menu. Can be done. Therefore, the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US can be improved.

For example, users US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on food ingredient amounts and nutritional ingredient amounts, depending on their family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to improving their eating habits. can.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 has the following features:
A mode in which the identification information 167 of one cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak"), a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing food ingredients, and a dedicated nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B showing nutritional ingredients are switched and displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 disclosed in this Embodiment 1, the control device 40 includes a heating control section 43 that controls the heating operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and a heating control section 43 that controls the heating operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM1. a data acquisition unit 53 that acquires the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51;
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during the initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select the cooperative cooking menu KM3 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, the control device 40 selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 if permission conditions are satisfied. displaying a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") on the display section 16 as a first specific screen 16M1;
When the control device 40 receives the command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the control device 40 determines the food ingredients or nutrients related to the cooking menu. , displays at least one of the information (food ingredient display screen 16M1A or nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within a first limit period TX;
The input operation unit 15 determines whether it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode compatible signal MC1,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode compatible signal MC1 from the input operation section 15 during the display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 controls the acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication section 51. and receiving a command to set the control conditions by voice from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56;
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") using the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is possible to easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of each food item. . Therefore, the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US can be improved. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on food components and nutritional components, depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to improving dietary habits.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received by a special operation by the user US, the timing of data acquisition from the outside is controlled.
In other words, the recipe data CD can be acquired when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within the first limit period TX (see especially FIG. 38). Therefore, the recipe data CD will not be received inadvertently due to the proximity of the communication terminal 200 or the like. Therefore, the user US's sense of security can be improved.

Further, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 153M, 154M) of the input operation section 15 are also used as the selection section for the voice input mode 1.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) of the input operation section 15, and it is possible to easily switch to voice input mode 1 by the user US. This can be prevented. In addition, in the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L, the input keys 153R and 153L that can select voice input mode 1 may be set as specific input keys.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 are satisfied. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, firepower level, target temperature, heating time, etc.) for the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not satisfied. Therefore, the step is not forcibly returned to the stage of the initial screen 16MH during the first standby. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation section 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even if the user US has his or her hands occupied during the cooking process and cannot perform touch operations, he or she can give instructions by voice, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside is that the input key 180 and one input key (for example, the specific input key 153M) of the touch input section is satisfied when the operation is performed within the first time limit (TX).

That is, the initial standby period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). For example, the maximum time is 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US had interrupted the operation of the input operation section 15 for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 would automatically be in a state where no input could be made (the main power switch 20 could not be forcibly turned on). open). Therefore, there is no possibility that cooking control data or the like is acquired from outside without the user US's knowledge, and safety is improved.

The input operation section 15 is provided with an input key 180 as a selection section for voice input mode 2, and an input key (for example, input key 158M) for instructing to display information on the food component data DD. Therefore, the operability for the user US is good.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of Embodiment 1, the input key 180 and the input key (for example, input key 158M) for instructing to display information on the food component data DD are connected to the central operation unit M. In the configuration in which the central display section 16M is located near the center display section 16M, when the user US is standing in front of the central operation section 15M and is cooking, the user US can visually recognize the range that can be operated by the user US. The necessary display section and operation section are present within the range, and the user US can perform operations without moving his or her standing position. As a result, benefits such as being able to reduce the physical burden on the user US during cooking can be expected.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the control device 40 controls the input key 180 when the input key 180 is not operated, and one specific input key (153M) of the input operation section 15 also If the controller is not operated within the time limit (TX), at least one of cutting off the main power supply or instructing the notification unit 90 to perform an alarm operation is executed. (See automatic shutoff process 1 in step SL11 in FIG. 38).

That is, as explained in FIG. 39, the elapsed time from the step (SS10) of determining whether the input key 180 or the specific input key 153M that can switch to voice input mode 1 has been operated is, for example, 30 minutes. It is limited to within Alternatively, the limit on the elapsed time from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is set to within 30 minutes.

Therefore, if the user US forgets to perform an input operation or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 may forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm for safety reasons. It has a configuration that improves safety.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation section 15 has a function setting key 151KP,
When the function setting key 151KP is operated, the control device 40 shifts to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode has a configuration in which it is possible to set the necessity or condition for displaying the food component or nutritional component on the central display section 16M.

With this configuration, the functions can be set according to the user US's wishes, proficiency level, etc.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 is configured to acquire new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied starts or until the cooking process ends. A cooking device 1 has been disclosed which is characterized by limiting (setting a reception restriction period TZ1).

With this configuration, by selecting the two heating means, each of the independent cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be sequentially executed without mutual interference. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, since there is a restriction unit 55, once the recipe data is acquired for one specific cooperative cooking menu A, the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu B can be acquired immediately before the start of the cooking process or at the cooking process. The control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire the information during the process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including a control menu for a complex cooking mode and a control menu for an individual cooking mode) will not be accidentally received in the middle of cooperative cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion on the part of the user US or interference with the operation of the cooking device 1 due to reception.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 includes input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the independent cooking mode KM3, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2, and input key 153M for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1. It disclosed a configuration in which each of these was provided separately.

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected individually using each input key (input means), so even if the heating cooker 1 has an increased number of heating sources, the operability of the user US can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed,
If the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 after the recipe data is acquired but before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again. The structure was characterized by the following.

This prevents you from inadvertently receiving another cooking menu (including the control menu for complex cooking mode and the control menu for single cooking mode) during cooperative cooking, and prevents you from receiving a recipe data CD that has been stably received. Can execute cooking menu.

Furthermore, if the recipe data CD of another cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, and the user US may be misled or confused. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, if cooperative cooking mode KM1 is canceled, the recipe data CD that was previously acquired and not used for heating cooking can be canceled and the desired recipe data CD can be acquired. You can avoid confusion with acquisition and cancellation.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) Display the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16,
(2) When the touch input keys 153M and 154M for selecting either the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD obtained from the communication section 51 is restricted. Restricted by section 55,
(3) When the input keys 153M and 154M are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
(4) With the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 displayed, moving to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation section 15;
(5) During the initial standby period TP, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to one time;
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M and 154M is touched, upon receiving the audio input mode compatible signal MC1 issued from the input operation section 15 in accordance with the touch state, This is a configuration in which a transition is made to a "control condition voice input mode" for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, when the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, if the selection input keys 153M and 154M are operated after that, the first specific screen dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode or the complex cooking mode can be displayed. It is easy to understand that recipe data can be acquired from the outside by displaying the second specific screen 16M1 and 16M2.
You can also switch to voice input mode using some of the input keys.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid confusion or misunderstanding in the input operations of the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until the start of cooking, and it is expected that the usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, when the heating cooking device 1 of the first embodiment finishes the input process for one heating cooking and starts heating cooking, the voice input mode is automatically canceled and the default setting touch input mode is set. When starting input for the next heating cooking, there is no need to touch an input key or the like just to cancel the voice input mode, making it easy to use.

In addition to what has been described above, the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) At least one input key capable of selecting "voice input mode 1" (operated by "long press") is provided for each heating cooking menu. In other words, the total number of menus corresponds to three types: the cooperative cooking menu, the "RG menu group" in FIG. 18 (excluding the "IH menu group" in FIG. 12), and the control menu group for the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3. There are four.
That is, for selecting voice input mode 1, a total of four input keys 153M (for cooperative cooking mode), 154M, 153L, and 153R are provided.

(2) The control menu group of the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3 can be executed by heating cooking using the heating port 4R using the right operating section 15R and heating cooking using the left heating port 4L using the left operating section 15L. Input keys 153L and 153R are provided corresponding to the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, respectively, which can select "voice input mode 1" (can be operated by "long press").

(3) Although it has three input operation units, one input operation unit (for example, central operation unit 15M) can be used with an input key (for example, 154M) that allows you to select “voice input mode 1” on that operation unit. ), the input process of the other input operation sections (in this case, the left and right operation sections 15L, 15R) cannot be started, and therefore, the voice input mode 1 cannot be selected either. However, in the above case, if heating cooking is being performed using the other input operation units (in this case, the left and right operation units 15L and 15R), the "touch input" operation of the input keys on that input operation unit will not work. It is possible. Therefore, changing the heat power or stopping heating during cooking can be performed without any restrictions.

In other words, if you press one input key (for example, 154M) to set the "voice input mode" on any one of the multiple input operation sections, "Start new cooking" will be activated on the other input operation sections. ” cannot be started. Input operations other than the voice input mode are possible on the input operation unit that is already in the process of heating and cooking. Therefore, heating cooking in progress can be controlled by operations other than voice input (touch, press) (for example, stopping heating, changing heat power, etc.).

With this unique configuration, it is possible to avoid simultaneous voice inputs on one input operation section and another input operation section, so when cooking in two places at the same time, or when cooking in one place. In addition, when another heating cooking is to be started, input commands do not interfere with each other, and reliable input operations can be performed, resulting in high safety.

Embodiment 2.
62 to 71 show a cooking device and a heating cooking system according to the second embodiment. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 61 are given the same reference numerals.

In the second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 is different from the first embodiment. Additionally, the configuration of the cloud server 300 has also been changed.

Also in this second embodiment, when acquiring recipe data (including the above-mentioned "display condition data") from an external communication terminal 200, etc., the restriction unit 55 controls the input function and display function of the cooking device 1 side. Limit some. For this purpose, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands via the communication unit 51 in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300.

FIG. 62 will be explained.
A refrigerator 331 and a heating cooker 1 are installed inside the kitchen 601, and the refrigerator 331 and the heating cooker 1 can each exchange information with the wireless router 340 by wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 is also an access point for a network NW such as the Internet. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 located in an external space.
In this sixth embodiment, the cloud server 300 described in the first embodiment includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food ingredient information server 326, which will be described later. .

The cooking device 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD through wireless communication 330BT with the communication terminal 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 but also cooking control data of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the like.

The communication terminal 200 can also perform direct wireless communication with the wireless router 340 in this second embodiment. This communication terminal 200 has the same basic configuration as the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As described in the first embodiment (FIG. 53), the communication terminal 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224. In the second embodiment, these notification data 223 and remote control data 224 are downloaded from the first server 321 that is connected to the first server 321, which is the information providing means, through the network NW. It may be something you have acquired.

In addition, the cooking device database 217 stores food component/nutrient data 226, and this food component/nutrient data 226 is sent to a second server from a food component information server 326 that provides various food component information. It was obtained via the server 322. The code DD is food component information (component data) that includes both food components and nutritional component data.

The food component information server 326 may use, for example, data from the "Japanese Food Standard Composition Table" published by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commanding a heating cooking operation, to the cooking device 1, respectively.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input section 222 (see FIG. 53) that converts voice from the user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks to the communication terminal 200, the voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation section 215 (see FIG. 53).

When the heating cooker 1 is activated, the user US gives speech information to the communication terminal 200 by voice, extracts a desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301, and sends the desired recipe data CD via the communication terminal 200. can be provided to the heating cooker 1.

For example, since the party receiving the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "〇〇〇 (an example of a name or nickname for identifying the second server 322), a cooperative cooking recipe, etc. ``Search for'', etc.
The utterance information “〇〇〇, search for a recipe” is one type of external command information that can be applied to the cooking device 1.

Further, the utterance information “〇〇〇, search for a cooperative cooking recipe” is information specifying the cooking mode for the heating cooker 1.

Further, the utterance information "〇〇〇, look for a recipe that can be made using a microwave and IH" is utterance information that extracts possible cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

These utterance information are utterance information that can be converted into standard commands prepared in advance at the second server 322.

Speech information issued by the user US to the communication terminal 200 is converted into text data in the communication terminal 200, and is transmitted to the second server 322 in the text data (voice input signal VS) format of the speech information.

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A, and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the storage unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts text data of speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (also referred to as "command data") prepared as standard commands. The "command" here includes an instruction to extract recipe data for executing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. Note that the input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting to extract the recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301. Further, it is a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal 200 when it is desired to know various data regarding the operating state of the heating cooker 1 (for example, the contents of the cooking process and the degree of progress). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

Note that the second server 322 does not require any special control or processing unique to the cooking device 1, so existing servers such as servers for various systems such as an AI assistant, an intelligent assistant, or a smart speaker can be used. can.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 62 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the heating cooker 1, and provides special control and processing specific to the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as Since the user has a good understanding of the cooking device control information (hereinafter referred to as "cooking device control information"), it is possible to accurately grasp the operating state of the cooking device 1 (including both heating operation and non-heating operation). The storage unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating state data OS, which will be described later, the actual operating state of the cooking device 1 can be accurately analyzed on the first server 321 side.

The first server 321 stores various "operating status data" OS from the cooking device 1 as described later.
is configured to be acquired at any time via the wireless router 340.

The operating state data OS includes data indicating ON/OFF of the main power switch 20, selection data of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and further information on the top plate 3 and the heating chamber 6. Contains the latest temperature measurement data, etc.

The recipe data providing server 301 can exchange information with the first server 321 by wireless communication. Note that a "system control server" serving as a control means for making these recipe data providing server 301, first server 321, etc. cooperate with each other is not shown.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be integrated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

In the first server 321, each cooking device 1 is registered in advance, and the operating state data OS transmitted from each cooking device 1 is acquired in association with the user US of the cooking device 1. It is configured to do this.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually performing wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 includes a control unit 321C. The control unit 321C decodes the inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322.
Further, the first server 321 analyzes the operating state data OS transmitted from a large number of cooking appliances 1 and the user identification information of each cooking appliance 1 . That is, the cooking device 1 of each user US can be specified from the information in the user identification information database held in the storage unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a database related to control of each cooking device 1 registered in advance in the storage section 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by the heating cooker 1 is not compatible with the heating cooker 1, it is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if there is an inquiry signal SN from the communication terminal 200, the first server 321 sends specific operation support data GS to the communication terminal 200 as a set with data such as the model identification number. Send via server. For this reason, for example, if there is an input from the communication terminal 200 of control conditions that are not compatible with a specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 will not accept such input, or will not accept it. Notification is made to the communication terminal 200 with the reason why there is no such information. Therefore, in the voice input mode, if the control conditions input (voiced) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range allowed by the cooking device 1, a notification is sent to the communication terminal 200. The configuration is such that the input of another control condition is requested.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the second server 322 with the recipe data CD of a specific cooking menu acquired from the recipe data providing server 301. This will be explained in detail later.

In this second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting voice input is arranged on the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like the input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, FIG. 63 will be explained.
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device 1, and corresponds to FIG. 10 of the first embodiment.
As is clear from FIG. 63, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal analysis section 58 shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment. In other words, this control device 40 does not have a function of receiving an audio signal from the outside and analyzing it.

Further, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal receiving section 56 shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation section 15 of this second embodiment does not have a function of receiving an audio signal from the outside. The rest of the configuration is the same as that shown in FIG. 10 of Embodiment 1, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 64 will be explained.
FIG. 64 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation section 15M. This FIG. 64 corresponds to FIG. 11 of the first embodiment. Note that the right operation section 15R and left operation section 15L have basically the same configuration as the central operation section 15M.

As is clear from FIG. 64, the control device 40 includes an input signal analysis section 52. The input signal analysis section 52 includes an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if it is 5 seconds or more after a predetermined threshold (for example, 5 seconds), the input mode determination unit 52C It is determined that the input mode is "input mode 1". If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press" operation.

The "measurement time data MJ" inputted from the input operation section 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode compatible signal.

On the other hand, each input operation section 15L, 15M, 15L including the central operation section 15M is provided with a time measurement section 15T. The measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement section 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis section 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measurement unit 15T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches with his or her finger to when he or she releases the finger, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52.

The input mode determining unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (signal corresponding to audio input mode), and when determining that the setting conditions for "audio input mode 1" are satisfied, input mode switching signal MC2 is set to It is output to the input control section 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or longer than a threshold value (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the setting conditions for audio input mode 1 are satisfied, and the input mode switching signal MC2 is output.

15D is a storage section. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters for the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, etc. as described above, program information for determination processing, and the like.

15E is a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmitter 15F transmits the above-described unique identification signal of the input key, measurement time data MJ of "touch time", etc. to the input signal analyzer 52 of the control device 40.

In FIG. 64, the touch detection section 15A, time measurement section 15T, storage section 15D, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks. Each of these functions may be realized by software.

In FIG. 64, the input mode determination section 52C is depicted as a part of the input signal analysis section 52, but it may be configured separately in hardware. Further, for example, each function of the input mode determination section 52C, input signal analysis section 52, etc. may be realized by software of one microcomputer.

Further, in FIG. 64, the central operation section 15M is explained as an example, but the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L. Therefore, the input key identifying section 15A in the right operating section 15R includes data identifying the input key present in the right operating section 15R in the signal from the input key and transmits it to the control device 40. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing section 70 enters an input standby state in preparation for receiving any input from the first server 321 regarding the recipe data CD.

In FIG. 64, the touch detection section 15A, time measurement section 15T, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but instead of having separate hardware configurations, they can be implemented, for example, by software of one microcomputer. Each of these functions may be realized.

In this second embodiment, since mutual authentication is performed between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1, when the cooking device 1 is started, the cooking device 1 sends a signal for automatic connection (“ When the heating cooker 1 and the communication terminal 200 transmit the "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200. Note that the scan signal may be transmitted from the communication terminal 200 side.

Once the connection between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200 is established, the state in which the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200 can directly communicate wirelessly with each other continues. If the communication terminal 200 moves with the movement of the user US and becomes distant from the heating cooker 1, it may become temporarily unable to communicate, but if it returns to a communicable range (distance), The connection status will be automatically restored.

During the period from the time when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the specific input key 151KP is pressed (for example, to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1), acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically not possible. prohibited. Recipe data CD cannot be acquired. (However, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu performed using the left and right operation units 15L and 15R can be obtained by operating the specific input keys 152L and 152R).

Moreover, no recipe data CD can be acquired from the communication terminal 200 during the period after the main power switch 20 is turned on until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed.

When the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD, the cooking device 1 temporarily stores the recipe data in a predetermined storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42 . Furthermore, reception of the aforementioned notification data 223 and remote control data 224 is also permitted, and they are linked (processed so that they can be identified in a one-to-one relationship) with the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille"). The data is temporarily stored in the storage unit 42.

Next, FIG. 65 will be explained.
FIG. 65 is a plan view of the center display section, the center operation section, the left and right operation sections, and the center heating status display section of the cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment.
One of the features of this second embodiment is the display section 16. As shown in FIG. 65, the display section 16 includes three parts: a left display section 16L, a center display section 16M, and a right display section 16R.

The three display sections 16L, 16M, and 16R have no difference in display function, effective area of the display screen, and planar shape. In other words, the functions of the central display section 16M shown in Embodiment 1 are also possessed by the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R. Immediately after the main power is turned on to the heating cooker 1, the initial standby screen at startup is not displayed only on the central display section 16M, but also on the right operation section 16R and left operation section 16L at the same time. The contents will be displayed.

First specific screens 16M1, 16L1, and 16R1 are displayed on the central display section 16M, left display section 16L, and right display section 16R at appropriate timings.
Similarly, the second specific screens 16M2, 16L2, 16R2 and the third specific screens 16M3, 16L3, 16R3 are also displayed at appropriate timings. However, as will be explained below, the central display section 16M has temporal priority in some display timings.

The central display section 16M displays a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 are combined. Also, displays related to cooking in the individual cooking mode KM3 and the combined control mode are displayed.
The left display section 16L displays information regarding the left heating port 4L and the left operating section 15L.
The right display section 16R displays information regarding the right heating port 4R and the right operation section 15R. Note that, in FIG. 65, illustration of the input key 180 for selecting the voice input mode common to all input operation units is omitted.

The integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, and the right side display section 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and related information when operating in the cooperative control mode is displayed.

In the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 64, the cooking courses can be broadly divided into a course in which a microwave grill-related "compound cooking mode/single cooking mode" is selected, and a course in which a "cooperative cooking mode" is selected. There are two.

As shown in FIG. 64, the central operation unit 15M, as in the first embodiment, operates in an independent cooking mode KM3 of the microwave heating source (microwave oscillation unit) 11, an independent cooking mode KM3 of the radiant heat heating means 12, Various input keys that are shared by four cooking modes, composite cooking mode KM2 and cooperative cooking mode KM1, are grouped together.

The second feature of this second embodiment is the input key 151KP. The input key 151KP shown in FIG. 65 is the input key for the function setting mode explained in Embodiment 1, but when the user US receives the preview information A (201) of the recipe data CD at the same time, the user US responds. It is also a specific input key that can send a signal (selection signal A). Note that the function setting mode can be selected only when the input key 151KP is "long pressed". Furthermore, the input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

Next, FIG. 66 will be explained.
FIG. 66 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M of the heating cooker 1.
The first feature of this second embodiment is that the input key 151KP is the (only) "specific input key" in the central operation section 15M. On the touch operation surface of this input key 151KP, characters explaining the function "preparation for reception" are written (on the upper surface of the central operation section 15M).
The input key 153M located to the right of the input key 151KP is used to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1, similar to the input key 153 in the first embodiment. However, as explained in FIG. 64, the input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

Further, two input keys 155M and 154M on the right side are used to select the composite cooking mode KM1. In addition, the functions of these three input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and include the function of selecting a cooking menu or a control menu by touch operation.

As explained in Embodiment 1, the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M have the function of allowing a "voice input mode" to be selected by a "long press" operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M), explanatory characters for the function "voice input" are written.

FIG. 66 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M at a stage in the middle of acquiring recipe data CD of a cooking menu using the central operation section 15M from the communication terminal 200.
Reference numeral 174 is a receiving operation display section, which in this scene indicates that the receiver is on standby to receive recipe data CD from the outside. Here, "on standby" refers to a state in which the operation of receiving the recipe data CD has not actually started yet.
Reference numeral 175 indicates operation support information, and in this scene, pressing the input key 151KP is displayed in text to guide the user US in the recipe data acquisition operation and to support the progress of the operation. Note that, in order to transmit the selection information A (202) described in Embodiment 1, this reception operation display section 174 is displayed from the stage when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is inputted in the confirmation step SP3. . In other words, the reception operation display screen 16MM is displayed.

Next, FIG. 67 will be explained.
FIG. 67 shows an example of a specific display screen that displays that recipe data for "hamburger", one of the cooking menus cooked in cooperative cooking mode KM1, has been received from communication terminal 200.

FIG. 67(A) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the reception operation display screen 16MM. The standby initial screen 16MH is switched to a reception operation display screen 16MM, which shows that a recipe reception operation from the outside is in progress, as shown in FIG. 67(A).
In FIG. 67(A), 16F is a plurality of progress marks that appear in the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation. There are two types of progress marks 16F: black triangles and white triangles. In FIG. 67(A), 174 is a receiving operation display section, and in this scene, it is displayed in text that the receiver is in the middle of receiving recipe data CD from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), immediately after the start of the cooking control data reception operation, there is only one black triangular progress mark 16F, but as the reception operation progresses, the number gradually increases, and finally Five black triangles (progress mark 16F) are lined up. Note that as the number of black triangular progress marks 16F increases, the same number of white rectangular progress marks 16F disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size or color of one figure, or may be expressed by animation.
FIG. 67(B) is a schematic diagram showing the first specific screen 16M1 immediately after receiving the recipe data CD.
As shown in FIG. 67(B), auxiliary information 179 is displayed in a wide area where the second area 23 and third area 24 are combined.
Three types of auxiliary information 179 are displayed.
One is reception information 179F indicating that the recipe data CD for "hamburger steak" for which cooking step 1 is to be performed at the right heating port 4R has been received.
The second is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.
The third item is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted. If the mode is not the voice input mode, this voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed. Note that this voice input mode can be selected when the input keys 153M, 154M, etc. are pressed after the external recipe identifying section 173 is displayed.

As described in the first embodiment, also in the second embodiment, the external recipe identification unit 173 determines that the cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. It is easy to see that.

In the example of FIG. 67(B), the reference information 179E indicates that the standard temperature at which a hamburger is first preheated is 180°C. The preheating temperature setting can be changed by the user US by voice input (for example, by saying "preheating 190° C.").

When the recipe data CD is determined to be a "disallowed process" as a result of the determination of the permission conditions, the receiving operation display section 174 changes to a disallowed display 174F indicating that the receiving operation has failed, as shown in FIG. 67(C).
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 67(B), the reason for not allowing the recipe data CD was that the setting value of the peak cut power was less than 5000W among the permission conditions. It prompts you to change settings using setting key 151KP.

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the information of the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (cooking a hamburger in the cooperative cooking mode KM1). case).

Instead of the reception operation display screen 16MM shown in FIG. It is also possible to display the information in multiple stages. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, the number of LEDs lit is one, and as the receiving operation progresses, the number of LEDs lit is increased. Alternatively, the progress is expressed by blinking the LED or switching the lighting color. Thereby, the completion of the reception operation may be notified to the user US in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

Next, FIG. 68 will be explained.
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M in the process of receiving recipe data. This figure is a modification of the display format shown in FIG. 67.
FIG. 68 shows the process of receiving recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. For all heating cooking modes including the composite cooking mode KM2, the display design of the receiving operation display screen 16MM is unified as shown in FIG. 68(A). In other words, a wide display area is secured by combining the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Immediately after starting to receive recipe data CD from the outside, the standby initial screen 16MH switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, which shows that the reception operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 68(A).
Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section, which displays in text that the recipe data CD is being received from the outside. The information displayed on the reception operation display section 174 may include the cooking mode name, the name of the control menu, the identification information 160, 167, and the like. In FIG. 67, "Microwave heating" is displayed, and it can be confirmed at this stage that the cooking is using the heating chamber 6.

When the recipe data CD is determined to be "disallowed" by the determination of the permission condition (permission condition 3, etc.), as shown in FIG. The display changes to information (disapproval information) 174F.
174A is reception support information. In this Figure 68(B), the reason for not allowing the recipe data CD was that the setting value of the peak cut power was less than 5000W among the permission conditions, so the improvement method was displayed and the user US It is recommended to change the setting of the peak cut function of the cooking device 1 using the setting key 151KP.

In addition, in FIG. 68, an example has been explained in which "permission condition 1" is used as the criterion for "disapproval processing" of heating cooker 1, but this is the control of complex cooking mode KM2 using heating chamber 6 This is the case for the menu (microwave heating "warm"). Conditions other than these may be added to the criteria for "permission condition 1".

Next, FIG. 69 will be explained.
FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system of the second embodiment.
FIG. 69(A) is an explanatory diagram of the first screen 216A that displays identification information (cooking name, etc.) regarding one cooking menu selected by the user US, and information on the heating means to be used, etc. .

As explained in detail in FIG. 56(A) of Embodiment 1, the first screen 216A displays the cooking time, quantity (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.), ingredients, and preparation for one cooking menu (food to be cooked). , how to prepare (the name of the cooking mode to be selected with the heating cooker 1, the input operation section, etc.), and various other information are displayed.

When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216A, the notification information A (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1 in response to the input by the touch operation. is sent.

The second screen 216B that starts to be displayed after the notification information A (201) is transmitted is information that requests the heating cooker 1 to determine whether or not to transmit the recipe data CD related to the selected cooking menu. Contains. In the example of FIG. 69, since the central operation section 15M is used in the cooking process 1, the user US needs to operate the specific input key 151KP of the central operation section 15M after receiving the notice information A (201). be.

In FIG. 69(A), 236 is process information indicating one type of heating source, which is part of the "how to make" process described above. In the example of FIG. 69(A), it can be seen that cooking is performed in a control mode called "range grill" (complex cooking mode KM2). Cooking with a "range grill" is cooking using both the microwave oscillator 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12, and is a type of automatic cooking.
237 is a confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A. When this is touched, the communication terminal 200 switches the display content from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B in response to the input by the touch operation.
234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information (one of the display menus) on the first screen 216A. In FIG. 69(A), "heating chamber menu" is displayed to indicate that the heating chamber 6 is used for cooking.

Next, FIG. 69(B) will be explained.
When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216A in FIG. 69(A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and The display switches to the second screen 216B shown in B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the second screen 216B. In FIG. 69(B), "preparation for transmission of heating chamber settings" is displayed to indicate that the setting information of the heating chamber 6 is being prepared for transmission.
Reference numeral 240 is an input key (icon) for instructing transmission, and when this is pressed, the recipe data of the cooking menu selected in FIG. 69(A) is transmitted to the cooking device 1.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 69(B) displays the preparation work on the cooking device 1 side for the user US. Specifically, it shows operating the central operating section 15M for use in cooking process 1, and recommends pressing the "preparation button on the central operating section". This "preparation button" refers to the input key 151KP shown in FIG. 65.
Incidentally, at this point in time, the heating cooker 1 has already received the advance notice A (201) and makes the light emitting section 21M of the central operation section 15M emit light in preparation for the user's operation of pressing the input key 151KP. The light emission of the light emitting unit 21M is an operation support operation corresponding to step SG13 described in FIG. 60 of the first embodiment.

When the input key 151KP is pressed, in response to this operation, the cooking device 1 sends "selection information A ( Confirmation information A)" 202 is transmitted.
Therefore, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B displayed in FIG. 69(B) is pressed, the recipe data CD of the one cooking menu selected in FIG. 69(A) is sent to the heating cooker 1. Ru.

Next, FIG. 70 will be explained.
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the display content on the terminal side display section 216 shown in FIG. 69.
In the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 70, 201 is the preview information A (201). A part of this preview information A (201) has already been transmitted to the cooking device 1 on the first screen 216A before the second screen 216B is displayed. That is, the heating cooker 1 has acquired both or one of the information that the central operation section 15M and the heating chamber 6 are to be used. Therefore, in the cooking device 1, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the corresponding input key 151KP starts blinking light emission.

As shown in FIG. 70, the preview information A (201) includes information requesting that the central operation unit 15M used in this recipe (cooking) be operated before transmitting the recipe data CD. .
In the example of FIG. 70(B), it is displayed that the input operation section 15 to be operated is the central operation section 15M. Furthermore, in the actual central operation section 15M, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151KP is blinking, and in the central operation section 15M, the other light emitting sections 21M are not blinking or emitting continuous light. .
Therefore, by emitting light and highlighting it as shown in the preview information A (201) in FIG. be able to. As a result, the input key 151KP can be identified more reliably than in the example of FIG. 69(B), and a reliable input operation by the user US can be expected.

Next, FIG. 71 will be explained.
FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing another example of display content on the terminal side display section 216 shown in FIG. 69.
If the communication terminal 200 has already received a signal indicating that the specific input key to be operated is being operated before the input key 237 shown in FIG. 69(A) is pressed, the signal shown in FIG. A second screen 216B is displayed.
The second screen 216B in FIG. 71 notifies that the specific input key (on the heating cooker 1 side) that should be operated to obtain the recipe data CD has already been operated. Therefore, it can be seen that there is no need to operate the specific input key in the cooking device 1 again. If it is OK to send the recipe data CD as it is, a message is displayed indicating that the input key 240 for sending should be pressed.

The second screen 216B in FIG. 71 is displayed when the specific input key (for example, 151KP) operated in the "key identification step SP2A" and the specific input key (for example, 151KP) in FIG. This is a case where the "specific input key" (for example, 151KP) corresponding to the "specific cooking menu" when the confirmation key (icon) 237 is touched on the first screen 216A in A) matches.
The operation information of the specific input key in the key specifying step SP2A is transmitted from the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal 200 at the time of the operation. That is, in this communication terminal 200, the operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A is acquired in advance. Therefore, the central processing unit 212 determines that the specific input key (on the heating cooker 1 side) that should be operated to obtain the recipe data CD has already been operated, and displays the second screen 216B in FIG. let

Next, FIG. 72 will be explained.
FIGS. 72A and 72B are explanatory diagrams 3 showing display contents on the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system.
In the third screen 216C shown in FIG. 72(A), 239 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the third screen 216C. In this FIG. 72(A), "transmission result of heating chamber" is displayed to indicate the situation after the setting information of the heating chamber 6 is transmitted.
FIG. 72(A) is a display screen of the transmission result, and is a dedicated screen that is always displayed after transmitting the recipe data CD.

There are two types of display screens for the transmission results. The first screen is the screen shown in FIG. 72(A). This is a stage in which the final results transmitted from the heating cooker 1 have not yet been received, and the contents transmitted from the communication terminal 200, especially the cooking menu and the main control conditions (heating time, microwave output value), are not yet received. The content is displayed.
The second screen is the screen shown in FIG. 72(B). This is a stage in which the communication terminal 200 has received the transmission result (determination result) from the cooking device 1 and has determined whether the transmission of the recipe data CD is successful or not. Information indicating the success or failure of the transmission will be displayed.

In FIG. 72(A), 525 is a transmission information display section, which displays the name (identification information) of the transmitted cooking menu and two types of control conditions (heating time and microwave output value) as shown in the figure. ) are displayed in a list. At the same time, the sending action "Sent" is also displayed. 332 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting a return to the first menu display screen.

333 is the input of a storage command for storing the transmitted cooking menu inside the communication terminal 200 or in the first server 321 so that it can be easily extracted when searching for a cooking menu at a later date. It is a key (icon). When this is pressed, the "sent" cooking menu shown in FIG. 72(A) is stored in the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321 together with setting information such as control conditions. For example, recipe data stored in the storage unit 220 (see FIG. 53) of the communication terminal 200 in order of transmission date and time for only 30 days, and old recipe data exceeding that period, is stored in the storage unit 321R of the first server 321 (see FIG. 62). may be sequentially stored by user US or device identification information.

Next, FIG. 72(B) will be explained.
507A is an auxiliary information display section A. In the example of FIG. 72(B), the reason for the "disapproval process" from the heating cooker 1 is briefly explained in text.
507B is an auxiliary information display section B displayed near the auxiliary information display section 507A. FIG. 72(B) shows an example in which the cooking device 1 obtains status information indicating that the heating chamber 6 is in a high temperature state and performs a process of disallowing the recipe data CD. As a countermeasure to this non-permission process, it is recommended that the door 7 of the heating chamber (grill storage) 6 be opened. Since this measure lowers the temperature of the heating chamber 6, it can be expected that no error will occur if the recipe data CD is sent again.

In FIG. 72(B), 541 is a voice input mode display section indicating that the communication terminal 200 is set to the voice input mode. At the stage when the voice input mode display section 541 is displayed, if the user US speaks directly to the voice input section 222, input can be performed using that voice.

In FIG. 72(B), 542 is extracted by the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 with reference to information in the cooking device database 217 according to the content of the “disapproval processing” from the cooking device 1. This is reference information and is a type of operation support data GS (see FIG. 62).

When the heating cooker 1 notifies the user of "disapproval processing", the heating cooker 1 sends a unique error code (such as a simple number) to the communication terminal 200, and the error code is sent to the central processing of the communication terminal 200. The device 212 may check the error code in the cooking device database 217 and display the reference information 542.

In the example shown in Fig. 72(B), instead of using the control menu ``Auto Microwave'', which detects the temperature of the food to be cooked and automatically stops heating, ``Manual Warming'', in which the user individually specifies the heating time, is selected. This indicates that it can be heated. In other words, users are recommended to set "time" as a control condition. Note that the heating time (control condition) in the case of manual heating may be determined by inputting a specific cooking name from the communication terminal 200 to the first server 321 and obtaining reference information regarding the time from the first server 321.

In FIG. 72(B), 543 is an error notification (error display) indicating the fact that a notification of “disapproval processing” from the cooking device 1 has been received. In addition, this error notification occurs when it occurs due to the actual condition of the cooking device 1 (temperature, peak cut conditions, etc.) as in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1", and when it occurs due to a communication failure in the network NW or wireless communication 330BT. is shown in both cases.

In the above description, the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone performs wireless communication 330BT with the cooking device 1 using Bluetooth (registered trademark). Another method is to connect the communication terminal 200 to the NFC input/output section (not shown) on the heating cooker 1 side, since it has an NFC input/output section 221 (see FIG. 53) for short-range wireless communication. You may input by directly approaching or touching.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, the second embodiment discloses the cooking device 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 illustrated in this second embodiment is as follows:
It has specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP defined for each cooking menu, a notification means 90, and a control device 40 that executes cooking using recipe data CD acquired from the outside,
After the control device 40 turns on the main power switch 20,
(1) a key identification step SP2A that detects that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When the notification signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input key (for example, 151KP) defined in the specific cooking menu is pressed to receive the notification signal A (201). a confirmation step SP3 (step SG5A) for determining whether or not it has been operated before and after reception;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting the selection information A (202) via the communication unit 51;
This configuration is characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 151KP) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the heating cooker 1 side in advance, or if the input key from the communication terminal 200 is In any case, when a specific input key (for example, 151KP) to be operated is operated after receiving advance notice information A, such a confirmation operation on the heating cooker 1 side by the user US (such as a confirmation operation of the specific input key) Since the process proceeds to the acquisition operation of the recipe data CD after determining whether or not the user has performed the operation, it is possible to prevent operation errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 related to the second disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is as follows:
It has specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP defined for each cooking menu, a notification means 90, and a control device 40 that executes cooking using recipe data CD acquired from the outside,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40
(1) Memorize that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP have been operated;
(2) When the notification signal A (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is received, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is activated to receive the notification signal A (201). Determine whether it has been operated on before,
If a specific input key (for example, 151KP) specified in the cooking menu notified by the notice signal A has been operated before receiving the notice signal A (201), selection information A (202) is transmitted. This configuration is characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 151KP) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the heating cooker 1 side in advance, such user US Since the process proceeds to the recipe data CD acquisition operation after confirming whether or not a specific input key (for example, 151KP) on the heating cooker 1 side has been operated, this prevents operational errors by the user US and improves usability. be able to.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when it is confirmed that the specific input key to be notified by the advance notice signal A (201) has been operated in the communication terminal 200 before the advance notice signal A (201) is transmitted, the As explained in the example of the second screen 216B of No. 71, since the notification (display) requesting the operation of a specific input key again is not performed, the information that causes unnecessary misunderstanding for the user US who is facing the heating cooker 1 is not displayed. This can be expected to have the effect of avoiding the provision of In other words, it is possible to prevent the user US from misunderstanding that it is necessary to operate the specific input key again.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 illustrated in Embodiment 1 has the following features:
The heating means HM1 to HM3 are heated using a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP, a notification means 90, a communication section 51, and a recipe data CD acquired from the outside. and a control device 40 that controls and executes cooking,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a notification step SP2B of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP when a notice signal A (201) corresponding to the cooking of the recipe data CD is received;
(2) After the notification step SP2B, it is determined whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP have been operated, and if it is determined that the specific input keys have been operated, confirmation information A (201) is transmitted. Confirmation process SP3,
(3) When the confirmation information A (202) is transmitted, information regarding reception of the recipe data CD is displayed on the display unit 16 of the notification means 90 (progress marks 16F, 174, see FIG. 67). The configuration is as follows.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 can select a specific input key for confirmation (for example, 151KP) to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US based on advance notice information from the communication terminal 200. A (201) and guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3, thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, the heating cooker 1 having the following configuration was disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is as follows:
A plurality of specific input keys 151KP, 152L, 152R,
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
storage device 41;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The storage device 41 holds correspondence information KID of the specific input key for each cooking menu,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) When preview information A (201) regarding the cooking menu is obtained from the communication unit 51, a key identification step SP2A of extracting the one to be operated from among the specific input keys 151KP, 152L, and 152R based on the correspondence information KID and,
(2) a notification step SP2B in which the notification means 90 notifies information that allows identification of the specific input key extracted in the key identification step;
(3) a confirmation step SP3 of determining whether the specific input keys 151KP, 152L, 152R notified by the notification means 90 have been operated, and transmitting selection information A (202) if it is determined that they have been operated; to execute sequentially,
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking device 1 selects a confirmation input key (for example, 151KP) to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US based on the preview information A ( 201) and guide the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes and improve usability.

Furthermore, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is configured such that after transmitting the confirmation information A (202) in the confirmation step SP3, the process moves to a reception step SP4 in preparation for receiving the recipe data CD. Met.
Therefore, as described in the second embodiment, by pressing the confirmation specific input key (151KP), the user can directly proceed to the process of receiving the recipe data CD, which is convenient for the user US.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, the heating cooker 1 having the following configuration was also disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooking system disclosed in Embodiment 2 is as follows:
It has a plurality of input operation sections 15L, 15M, 15R, a display section 15 (15L, 15M, 15R), a communication section 51 that exhibits a communication function, a plurality of heating means HM1 to HM3, and a storage device 41. heating cooker 1,
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The input operation sections 15L, 15M, 15R include an individual operation section 15M corresponding to only one of the heating means, and a common operation section 15L, 15R corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
The heating cooker 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R in the individual operation sections 15L and 15R, and has a second specific input key 151KP in the shared operation section 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, a first cooking program (induction heating cooking program) is selected from the storage device 40 and first menu information (induction heating cooking menu) is displayed on the display section 15. It is possible to display
By selecting the second specific input key 151KP, the second cooking program (for cooperative cooking, compound cooking, induction heating) is selected from the storage device 41, and the second menu information (cooperative cooking) is displayed on the display section 16. (cooking menu, combined cooking menu, induction heating menu).
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) In response to the input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and 216B),
(2) The second screen 216A shows whether or not the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 151KP corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed on the second screen 216A are selected. The selection request information shown is displayed (see B in FIG. 69),
(3) transmitting the specific recipe data CD to the heating cooker 1 upon receiving a transmission command at the time when the selection of the first specific input key or the second specific input key is completed;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 selects specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US. It can be presented according to the data (correspondence information KID). For this reason, it is possible to notify by the advance notice information A from the communication terminal 200 and to guide the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US to the correct specific input key of the input operation section 15.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second embodiment is as follows:
A plurality of specific input keys 151KP, 152L, 152R,
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The notification means 90 includes a key specifying section 21 (light emitting sections 21M, 21L, 21R) for specifying the specific input keys 151KP, 152L, 152R, and a condition display section for displaying the cooking control conditions based on the recipe data CD. 16 (liquid crystal display parts 16M, 16L, 16R),
The control device 40 includes:
(1) After the communication establishment step SP1, the specific input keys 151KP, 152L, and 152R to be used are selected according to the advance notice information A (202) acquired from the communication section 51 by the light emission (continuous lighting) of the key specifying section 21. (blinking, etc.), a notification step SP2B;
(2) sequentially executing a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) after operating the input key (151KP) identified by the key identifying unit 21;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 selects the specific input keys (151KP, etc.) to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US, based on the notification information A (201KP, etc.) from the communication terminal 200. ), the notification section 90 (the light emitting operation of the key identification section 21) can issue the notification. Therefore, the user US is guided to a specific input key (such as 151KP) in order to perform an input operation correctly in an operation scene, thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, similarly to the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the cooking device 1, after turning on the main power switch 20, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide standby common information to user US.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, the recipe data CD regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (including the recipe data of the control menu of the complex cooking mode KM2 and the individual cooking mode KM3) can be received.
By controlling the timing of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside, it is possible to avoid inadvertently receiving recipe data CD of another cooking menu while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the function setting input key 151KP also serves as a specific input key. That is, since the central operation section 15M is also used to obtain the recipe data CD for cooking using the central operation section 15M, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) of the input operation section 15, thereby reducing operability by the user US. It is possible to prevent things that may lead to

In this second embodiment, similarly to the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the restriction section 55 stores new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed. It was a configuration characterized by restricting the acquisition.
That is, when one recipe data CD is selected using the specific input key 151KP or the like, a reception restriction period TZ1 and an additional recipe data CD acquisition restriction period TZ2 are set, and the acquisition process of recipe data CD of another cooking menu is set. is a configuration that cannot be started.

This prevents you from inadvertently receiving another cooking menu (including the control menu for complex cooking mode and the control menu for single cooking mode) during cooperative cooking, and prevents you from receiving a recipe data CD that has been stably received. Can execute cooking menu.

Furthermore, if the recipe data CD of another cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, and the user US may be misled or confused. It can be prevented. Therefore, usability for the user US is improved.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, when the operation shifts to acquiring the recipe data while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the reception operation is performed as explained in FIGS. 67 and 68. The display screen automatically switches to a 16MM display.

Furthermore, since a plurality of progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, the user US can easily understand that the operation is to acquire the recipe data CD. This has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings, incorrect operations, etc.

Note that in addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the audio notification section 51 may provide audio notification. Further, the progress mark is not limited to one in which the shape and number change over time as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, but may be in a form in which the display color changes, for example.

In this second embodiment, the same practical effects as those obtained in the first embodiment can be obtained for the parts having the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 73 is a configuration diagram of a heating cooking system according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a longitudinal sectional view of the central part of the cooking device used in the heating system of FIG. 73. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the second unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 77 is an enlarged view of the input operation section and the display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74, viewed from the front (front) side. FIG. 78 is a plan view 1 of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. FIG. 79 is a time chart showing the operations of the cooking device and the communication terminal in chronological order. FIG. 80 is a planar explanatory diagram 2 of the state after the cooking device shown in FIG. 74 acquires the recipe data, viewed from above. FIG. 81 is a plan view 3 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. FIG. 82 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation section and the display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 when viewed from the front (front) side. Note that parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of Embodiments 1 and 2 described in FIGS. 1 to 72 are given the same reference numerals.

In Embodiment 3, the overall configuration of cooking device 400 is different from Embodiments 1 and 2, and is a tabletop or stationary heating device. The input operation unit 15 also includes a plurality of input keys corresponding to a plurality of cooking modes and objects to be cooked. The input key employs a press type configuration rather than a touch input type.

Before a detailed explanation of this third embodiment, the definitions of terms and the basic configuration of common items will be explained below.
The heating cooker 400 of the third embodiment is composed of two units: a first unit 401 and a second unit 402 that is used while being placed on top of the first unit 10.
Furthermore, the first unit 401 can perform heating cooking even when the second unit 402 is not placed thereon. In other words, heating and cooking can be performed independently without depending on the second unit 402.

The second unit 402 can perform cooking only when placed on the first unit 401. In other words, it depends on the first unit 401.

In the heating cooker 400 of the third embodiment, the second unit 1 stores mainly rice, grains, beans, etc. in the inner pot 405, and the cooking menu is mainly for rice cooking. Therefore, in the following description, the second unit 402 may be referred to as a "rice cooking unit".

The first unit 401 includes an input operation section 420, which will be explained with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.
The second unit 402 includes two input operation sections 421 and 429, which will be explained with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. These three operation units 420, 421, and 429 have a plurality of input keys corresponding to a plurality of cooking modes and objects to be cooked. The input keys include a touch input type input key and a press input type input key. This will be explained later.

The first unit 401 inductively heats an object to be heated, such as a general pot, using a heating coil (IH coil) 424 based on the principle of induction heating. Therefore, in the following description, the first unit 401 may be referred to as an "induction heating unit". However, the heat source of the first unit 401 may be a heat source based on other principles, such as a radiant heater, an infrared heater, a sheathed heater, a gas combustion burner, or the like.

The second unit 402 is a container that is heated by the first unit 401 and in which operations such as rice cooking, boiling, and heating cooking are performed. Can move from place to place (e.g. on the dining table).

The first unit 401 can perform induction heating cooking by itself, and can also heat the second unit 402. Since the first unit 401 may or may not be moved to another location by the user US, it may be of a so-called "built-in" type, which is built into and fixed to kitchen furniture such as a sink.

In the heating cooker 400 of this third embodiment, the first unit 401 can receive control data from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.) via the second unit 402.

The control data is roughly divided into two types.
The first control data is recipe data CD related to a heating cooking program for executing cooking such as rice cooking.

The recipe data CD in this third embodiment includes a program A for executing a specific cooking menu using the first unit 401 and a program for executing a specific cooking menu in the second unit 402. and a program C for executing a common heating cooking operation using both the first unit 401 and the second unit 402.

Another type of control data is remote control data (remote control signal). This remote control data can be used to check whether or not the reserved rice cooking has been completed (by specifying the rice cooking time), as well as the cooking results (start time, end time, power consumption value, number of times the rice has been cooked, number of times the rice has been cooked, etc.) When a user requests (inquires about) data (such as the weight of rice) at any time, the data is provided to the cooking device 400 via wireless communication from the communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc. Furthermore, it is a command to stop the warming operation after cooking rice. This command is also given to the cooking device 400 by wireless communication.

In Embodiment 3, "multiple cooking" means that the heating place or heating environment (container or heating chamber containing the food) for one food item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) is different; It also refers to cooking that uses the same heating source more than once. For example, first, put only vegetables and meat in a pot, add seasonings, etc., and pre-cook it, then combine the vegetables and meat with another ingredient (for example, rice) and seal it tightly. It is cooked by heating it in a shaped container or inner rice cooker (in this case, the food to be cooked is also called ``takikomi rice''). In the heating cooker 400, the cooking mode (operation pattern) in which multiple cooking is performed is sometimes referred to as multiple cooking mode KMM.

The detailed configuration of the third embodiment will be described below.
First, FIG. 73 will be explained.
FIG. 73 shows an overall configuration diagram of the heating cooking system including the heating cooking device 400.
The heating cooker 400 includes a first unit 401 that is placed on kitchen furniture such as a dining table, and a second unit 402 that is removably placed on the first unit 401 and has a cylindrical or square box-like appearance. It is composed of two components.

The first unit 401 has a built-in first communication section 430A that performs infrared communication, and the second unit 402 has a built-in second communication section 431A that performs infrared communication.
By performing infrared communication between the first communication section 430 and the second communication section 431, various control data can be exchanged between the first unit 401 and the second unit 402.
The second unit 402 includes a bottomed inner pot 405 for storing rice, grains, ingredients, etc. to be cooked during heating cooking (including rice cooking; the same applies hereinafter). .
The inner pot 405 has an opening over its entire upper surface, and is made of magnetic metal or carbon material to be heated by induction. The magnetic metal in this case includes a material called a cladding material made by laminating thin plates of magnetic stainless steel and aluminum.
In FIG. 71, 426 is a wireless communication unit (communication module) as described in the first embodiment.

FIG. 74 will be explained.
FIG. 74 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 400 at the left and right center portions. Further, in FIG. 74, cross-sectional representation (hatching) of some components is omitted.

In the arrow shown by a solid line in FIG. 74, it is assumed that the "front" direction is the front (front) direction of the second unit 402 and the first unit 401. "Back" indicates the opposite back (back) direction.

As shown in FIG. 74, the second unit 402 is simply placed on the top plate 422 that constitutes the upper surface of the first unit 401, and is not fixed with a connecting means such as a screw, so it cannot be lifted up. If so, it can be easily separated from the top surface of the first unit 401.
The first unit 401 is a member on which the second unit 401 is placed, and has a truncated conical shape as a whole, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the second unit 402 includes a main body 403 having a cylindrical (cubic) shape, and a lid body 404 connected to the main body 403 by a hinge portion (not shown) centered around a hinge shaft 416. , a handle (not shown), a cylindrical inner pot 405 with an open top, an inner pot temperature detection means 406, a power supply means 407 mainly composed of a power transmission coil, a power reception coil 408, and a lid body. Rice cooking conditions and the like are input by the user US using the open/close button 409, the lid heating means 410, the inner pot side heating means 411, the second display section 412, which is an example of the notification means 70, and the third display section 413. A second operating section 421 and a third operating section 429 are provided.
The third operation section 429 is arranged on the front side of the second unit 402, and is an operation section for instructing the measurement of the weight of the food to be cooked such as rice, which will be described later, and for instructing the calculation of energy consumption. It is. The inner pot side heating means 411 is arranged to surround the entire periphery of the inner pot 405.

This third operation section 429 is equipped with three push button type (press type) input keys. That is, the input key 429A for measurement (not shown), the input key 429B for display (not shown), and the calculation of calories according to the weight of rice (also referred to as cooked rice) after finishing rice cooking are performed. A calorie calculation input key 429C (not shown) for issuing commands is arranged. The weighing input key 429A (not shown) is used for a measurement start command to measure the weight of rice, water, etc. before cooking.
The display input key 429B (not shown) is an input key for instructing display of the weight measurement results. The calorie calculation input key 429C is an operation key for instructing calculation of calories according to the weight of cooked rice. When the calorie calculation input key is pressed, the calorie calculation result is automatically displayed on the third display section 413.

In FIG. 74, reference numeral 404 denotes a lid rotatably supported on the main body 403 by a horizontally extending hinge shaft 416. A sub-control device 440 is housed inside the lid 404, which is opened to at least a vertical position around the hinge shaft 416.

A display section such as a liquid crystal display substrate constituting the second display section 412 is disposed at the center of the upper surface of the lid body 1B, so that display contents can be checked from above the lid body 404.
423 is a large opening formed in the bottom surface of the main body 403, and the entire bottom surface of the inner pot 405 is exposed downward. Note that the opening 423 may be covered with a thin heat-resistant plastic plate or the like instead of being exposed in this manner.

A first display section 418 is arranged on the front side of the first unit 401, and is composed of a liquid crystal display screen and the like. As is clear from FIG. 74, in the first unit 401, an input operation section 420 is arranged immediately below the first display section 418.
The input operation section 420 will be referred to as a "first operation section 420" in the following description. The input operation section 421 will be referred to as a "second operation section 421" in the following description. The input operation section 429 will be referred to as a "third operation section 429" in the following description.

Reference numeral 448 denotes a temperature detection means, which detects the temperature of the top plate 422 by receiving a measurement signal from a thermistor (temperature sensor) 433 that is brought into contact with the top plate 422 at two locations, front and rear. This temperature detection signal is input to main controller 480, which will be described later.

At the four corners of the bottom surface of the first unit 401, measuring sections 427 of a weight measuring means 428, which will be described later, are arranged. There are four measurement units 427 in total. Measurement data from the four measuring sections are collected into a weight measuring means 428 having one measuring circuit (not shown), and the weight is calculated. Note that the measurement unit 427 will be referred to as a "weight sensor" in the following description, and the reference numeral 427 will be used.

In the internal space of the first unit 401, a control board 434 on which the main controller 80 is mounted is arranged at a position apart from the induction heating coil (IH coil) 424. An inverter circuit 435 is mounted on the control board 434 together with a heat sink (not shown) for heat radiation. The inverter circuit 435 is a circuit that supplies high frequency current to the IH coil 424. Therefore, the inner pot 405 generates heat due to the interlinkage of the magnetic flux generated from the IH coil 424.

Note that the first unit 401 has a built-in first communication section 430 that performs infrared communication, but it is not shown in FIG. 74. Further, the second unit 402 includes a second communication section 430B that performs infrared communication with the first communication section 430A, but this is also not shown.
Further, inside the first unit 401, a cooling fan (not shown) is built-in and rotationally driven by a drive motor 443, which will be described later. Therefore, outside air for cooling is introduced from the intake port (not shown) on the bottom of the first unit 401 and exhausted from the exhaust port (not shown) on the back, thereby cooling the inverter circuit 435 and IH coil 424. It has become so.

Next, FIG. 75 will be explained.
FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a control-related configuration of the first unit 401. As shown in FIG.
Reference numeral 80 denotes the main control device, which is configured with a microcomputer as its core having a central processing unit (CPU: not shown), and includes storage means 480R such as a semiconductor storage device (flash memory, ROM, RAM), etc. , a built-in clock means (clock circuit) 480T for calculating time.

The central processing unit (CPU) contains a control program that determines the operation of the central processing unit (CPU) itself, information on heating sequences for each type of cooking (rice cooking, stewing, boiling water, etc.), and a heating cooker. 400 on the network NW.
Further, the control program of the central processing unit has control conditions such as thermal power, energization (heating) time, target heating temperature, etc. for each rice cooking sequence such as a water absorption process and a rice cooking (boiling) process. It also has control programs for each cooking menu, such as stew cooking. In other words, this central processing unit holds recipe data CDs for various types of cooking.

A computer program for the central processing unit (CPU) that controls the entire heating control operation of the main controller 80 and various control data tables are stored in the storage means 480R. Note that this storage means 480R may also store data of correspondence information KID specifying either one of the two specific input keys 450, 471 for each cooking menu, similarly to the storage means 440R. With this configuration, the main controller 80 specifies the specific input keys 450 and 471 when the preview information B (201) regarding the cooking menu is acquired (via the second unit 402), as will be described later. Information (notice information B) extracted from one of the specific input keys 450 and 471 can be generated using the corresponding information KID.

A sub-control device 440, which will be described later, generates various command signals in response to inputs from the second operation section 421 and the third operation section 429, and inputs them to the main control device 480. For example, by using the second operation unit 421, cooking of polished rice is selected, the cooking method switch 464 is pressed, and the user's setting results are inputted to the sub-control device 440 at any time.

That is, when cooking using the second unit 402, the sub-control device 440 generates data in response to input results from the second operation section 421 and the third operation section 429. This data is input to the main controller 480 as a recipe data CD that determines the cooking menu for a specific cooking (in this case, cooking white rice) when the rice cooking start switch (input key) 467 is finally pressed. be done. In response to this, the main controller 480 determines control conditions for the IH coil 424 by referring to the various control data tables described above.

Continuing, FIG. 75 will be described.
The heated object temperature detection means 436 includes an infrared temperature sensor 436S (not shown) that receives infrared rays emitted from the outer surface of the inner pot 405 and measures the temperature when the second unit 401 is mounted. has been done. This temperature sensor 436S can also measure the temperature of general pots, frying pans, etc. other than the second unit 402, so the main controller 480 can also control the temperature of objects to be heated (general metal pots, etc.). Note that the infrared temperature sensor 436S is not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75. The infrared temperature sensor 436S is located inside the first unit 401 and estimates the temperature by receiving infrared rays transmitted through the top plate 422 and radiated from an object to be heated such as the inner pot 405 or a commercially available metal pot. It is.

480C is a calorie calculation unit that receives data on the total weight of the second unit 402 and first unit 401 measured by the weight measurement means 428 and calculates the consumed energy corresponding to the weight of the cooked rice.
480D is a calorie storage unit that automatically stores the calorie value calculated by the calorie calculation unit 480C. This storage section uses a nonvolatile memory such as a semiconductor storage element.

Note that on the first unit 401 side shown in FIG. 75, a calorie calculation section 480C and a calorie storage section 480D are provided to calculate the calorie value of rice after cooking, but these two are not necessarily necessary. . This is because the second unit 402 can calculate the calorie value.

480A is a control data storage unit. Note that this storage section includes a first storage area in which the recipe data CD received by the first unit 401 via the communication section 426 of the second unit 402 is temporarily stored, and a recipe data CD in the first storage area. A second storage area is provided in which some of the control conditions are corrected by input from the first operating section 420 or the second operating section 421, and the revised recipe data CD is stored. .

When a command to start cooking is received, the main controller 480 controls energization of the IH coil 424 using the recipe data CD in the second storage area. Note that, in order to analyze the contents of the data CD after receiving the recipe data CD, there is a temporary storage memory for first storing the recipe data CD, but this memory is not shown in FIG.

The control data storage unit 480A stores a rice-cooking computer program that controls the entire rice-cooking control operation including conditions such as heating power, energization time, target heating temperature, etc. for water absorption process, rice cooking (boiling) process, etc.

485 is a data acquisition unit. This data acquisition unit 485 receives the recipe data CD acquired from the outside by the second unit 402 via the infrared communication unit 430, and stores the recipe data CD in the storage unit 480R.
The acquired recipe data CD is stored in units of "understanding period" selected in advance by the user US, such as one week.

441 is a commercial AC power supply with a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz and a voltage of 100 V or 200 V, for example. The power supply unit 442 receives power from the commercial power supply 441 via a power cord and a plug (none of which are shown). The power supply unit 442 has a built-in rectifier circuit and the like, and has a function of converting power into multiple types of predetermined voltage power. Note that a main power switch 460 (not shown) that is opened and closed by the user US is also built in.

435 is the inverter circuit, which receives power from the power supply section 442, generates high frequency power, and supplies it to the IH coil 424. The inverter circuit 435 is equipped with various electrical components such as semiconductor power control elements and switching elements.
Reference numeral 420 denotes the first operation section, which uses the plurality of press-type electronic switches (specific input keys 450, etc.) (see FIG. 77) as input means.

Reference numeral 444 denotes a notification means, which includes a display means 452 and a voice notification means 455 such as a voice synthesis device.
The display means 452 includes a first display section 418 and a light emitting display section 451.
Further, as the display means 452, a light emitting display section 453 of a specific input key (input key for menu selection) 450 is also provided.
The first display section 418 includes a liquid crystal display screen.
The light emitting display section 453 illuminates the vicinity of the specific input key 450 from below using a laser light emitting diode element (LED). The light emitting display section 451 similarly illuminates four locations using LEDs, and displays the magnitude of the firepower in four stages depending on the number of illuminated locations (see FIG. 77). The first display section 418 can display the state and conditions of the induction heating operation (eg, heating power value, heating time) using letters, numbers, graphics, and the like. In addition, identification information (160, 167, etc.) indicating whether or not the recipe data CD has been received and the cooking targeted by the recipe data CD can be visually confirmed.

The light-emitting display section 451 and the light-emitting display section 453 are part of the display means 452, but because they perform display operations in response to input operations on the first operation section 420, in FIG. It is shown as being included in the figure.

Although not shown, the voice notification means 455 includes a buzzer that emits sound, a voice synthesizer, a speaker, and the like. As described above, the first display section 418 is disposed adjacent to the first operation section 420, and when the user US operates the first operation section 20, the input result can be visually checked immediately.

The first reference position determining means 430 of the first unit 401 is a component that forms a pair with the second reference position determining means 431 of the second unit 402.
The first reference position determination means 430 determines whether the second unit 402 is placed at a predetermined position of the first unit 401. This first reference position determination means 430 uses optical means, and includes an infrared communication section (first communication section) 430A on the first unit 401 side and an infrared communication section (first communication section) on the second unit 402 side. 2 communication unit) 431A, and based on the communication result, the main controller 480 determines whether or not the reference position is appropriate.

This third embodiment also includes a third reference position determining means 454 that uses magnetic means. The third reference position determining means 454 utilizes a combination of a permanent magnet (not shown) installed on the bottom of the second unit 402 and a reed switch 447 installed on the top of the first unit 401. When one unit 401 is placed at the reference position, the reed switch 447 is turned on by the magnetic force of the permanent magnet (not shown), so the main controller 80 detects this ON signal and the unit 401 is placed at the reference position. This is a configuration that determines that something is true.

443 is a drive motor for a cooling fan (not shown). This cooling fan has the effect of introducing cold outside air into the interior space of the first unit 401 and dissipating the heat generated in the inverter circuit 435 and the IH coil 424 into the air.

407 is a power transmission coil. This power transmission coil 407 supplies power from the first unit 401 to the second unit 402. A power receiving coil 408 is disposed on the bottom surface of the second unit 402 in a non-contact manner (in close proximity) to the power transmitting coil 407 .

Reference numeral 448 denotes a top plate temperature detecting means that measures the temperature by bringing a temperature sensor section into contact with the top plate 422, and a thermistor is used for the temperature sensor section, for example. Data on the temperature detection results is transmitted to the main controller 480.
The weight measuring means 428 is a processing circuit (also referred to as a "measuring circuit") that calculates the weight of the rice cooking unit (second unit) 402 based on the four weight sensors 427 described above and the output voltages from those sensors. (not shown) and.

Next, FIG. 76 will be explained.
FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the control-related configuration of the second unit 402.
In FIG. 76, reference numeral 440 denotes a sub-control device, which is configured with a microcomputer as its core, and includes a storage means 440R such as a semiconductor storage device (flash memory, ROM, RAM), and a timekeeping means (clock circuit) for calculating the time. ) 440T is built in.

When cooking rice, there is a computer program for rice cooking that controls the entire rice cooking control operation, including conditions such as heat power, power supply time, target heating temperature, etc. during the rice absorption process and rice cooking (boiling) process, and a rice cooking computer program that measures the weight of the rice. A computer program for weight measurement, a self-inspection program, and a computer program for dealing with abnormalities are not stored in the storage means 440R. The storage means 440R stores data tables for various controls used in the rice cooking computer program and "setting data" for setting the control parameters and the like.

For example, when the specific input key 450 that can also set the cooking method shown in FIG. A data table of control parameters corresponding to the "memory mode" is stored in the storage device 440R as the "setting data".

The storage means 440R stores correspondence information KID that specifies one of the two specific input keys 450 and 471 for each cooking menu. Therefore, as will be described later, when the sub-control device 440 acquires preview information B (201) regarding the cooking menu, the sub-control device 440 uses the correspondence information KID that specifies the specific input keys 450 and 471 to , 471 can be determined to be the input key to be operated. Then, selection information B (202) can be generated.

440C is a calorie calculation unit that receives the weight data of the second unit 402 measured by the weight measurement means 428 and calculates the consumed energy corresponding to the weight of the cooked rice.
440D is a storage unit that automatically stores the calorie value calculated by the calorie calculation unit 440C.
461 is a lid sensor that detects opening of the lid 404, and is installed near the lid opening/closing button 409. When the mechanical lock of the lid 404 is removed, a lid opening signal is transmitted from this sensor to the sub-control device 440.

Reference numeral 421 denotes the second operating section, which includes various push-type switches 488 to 494 and 471 provided on the lid 404.
Reference numeral 462 denotes an audio input means that converts audio from a microphone (not shown) into an audio signal and inputs the signal to the sub-control device 440.

463 is a human sensor that detects the presence of a person, and is a type of non-contact input means. As is clear from FIG. 74, this human detection sensor detects the presence of a person by emitting infrared rays from above and near the cover opening/closing button 409 to a certain irradiation range in front. . The human detection sensor 463 itself may automatically change its direction in the left and right direction, so that it can detect people in a wide range in the left and right direction. Further, the orientation may be automatically changed in the vertical direction so that people can be detected in a wide range in the vertical direction.

The human sensor 463 is an infrared sensor that detects infrared rays emitted from a person or an ultrasonic sensor. If an infrared sensor is used, the ``Jamoji'' used by the user to serve the rice becomes hot due to the temperature of the rice after it has been cooked, and since it senses that temperature, it can distinguish it from other cold objects. Cheap.

The human sensor 463 also serves as a "non-contact input means" for calorie notification, and when the lid 404 is opened, it serves as a "non-contact input means" for the sub-control device 440, which will be described later. automatically switches to.

Reference numeral 465 denotes a notification unit, which includes a first display section 412, a second display section 413, and a voice notification section 466 including a voice synthesis device. Although not shown, the audio notification section 466 includes a buzzer and a speaker that emit sound.

Reference numeral 406 denotes an inner pot temperature detection means that contacts the inner pot 403 and measures its temperature, and uses a thermistor as a temperature detection element. Data on the temperature detection results is transmitted to the sub-control device 440 each time.

Reference numeral 468 denotes a power feeding means that receives power from the power receiving coil 408, and is composed of a secondary battery. For example, it is composed of a lithium ion storage battery or the like.

The first reference position determination means 33 determines whether the rice cooking unit 1 is placed at a predetermined position of the induction heating unit 10. The determination result of the first reference position determining means 33 is output to the sub-control device 50. Note that the sub-control device 50 may have the functions of the reference position determining means 33.

The first reference position determining means 431 on the second unit 402 side has the second communication section 431A. This first reference position determination means 431 communicates with the first reference position determination means 430 on the first unit 401 side using optical means such as infrared communication (via the second communication section 431A). do.
469 is an NFC input/output unit for short-range wireless communication. When the NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 53) on the communication terminal 200 side is brought close to or in contact with the communication terminal 200, control data can be acquired from the outside.

470 is a light emitting display section. This light-emitting display section 470 is a part of the notification means 465, and illuminates a specific input key 471 arranged on the second operation section 421 from below in a particularly conspicuous manner at a predetermined timing with a light-emitting element such as an LED. It is.

The sub-control device 440 is not limited to the configuration including the storage means 440R and the clock means 440T. For example, the storage means 440R and the clock means 440T may be configured separately from the sub-control device 440, and the outputs of the storage means 440R and the time-measurement means 440T may be input to the sub-control device 440 from the outside.

Further, in the audio notification means 466, the audio (guide audio) is output at a preset volume or a volume set by the user. Additionally, the volume can be set to multiple levels.

For example, the sub-control device 440 sets the inner pot 405 to an initial temperature based on the temperature detected by the inner pot temperature detection means 406, the threshold temperature stored in advance in the sub-control device 40, and the temperature detected by the outside air temperature detection means 472. The time required for the temperature to drop below the threshold temperature is calculated, the heat retention possible time is determined, and the heat retention possible time is displayed on the second display section 412 or the third display section 413. The higher the temperature detected by the inner pot temperature detection means 406 is than the threshold temperature, the longer it will take for the temperature of the inner pot 405 to reach the threshold temperature when the second unit 402 is removed from the first unit 401. Therefore, the heat retention time is set to be long.

In this way, by displaying the possible heat retention time on the second display section 412 etc., the user US can be urged to eat the food to be cooked (such as rice) promptly, or the second unit 402 can be It is possible to prompt the user to return to step 401 and keep the food to be cooked (rice) warm. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the temperature of the cooked rice will fall below the threshold temperature stored in advance in the sub-control device 40 and the taste of the rice will deteriorate.

Next, FIG. 77 will be explained.
FIG. 77 is a front view of the first unit 401 seen from the front side, and depicts the vicinity of the first operation section 420 and first display section 418.
In the first input section 420, operation sections (push button sections) for a plurality of push-type electronic switches (input keys) are arranged in a horizontal row at regular intervals when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 418 is the aforementioned first display unit including a liquid crystal display screen and the like. 451 are (four) light emitting display sections illuminated by LEDs.

Reference numeral 450 denotes the specific input key in the first operation section 420, which also serves as a cooking menu selection input key. This input key requires operation when acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.), but this will be explained in detail later.
By operating the specific input key 450, a cooking menu such as boiling water, boiling, frying, etc. can be selected.

When the recipe data CD provided from the outside via the communication unit 426 is either the program A or the program C, the specific input key 450 is used to input the program A. Alternatively, it also serves as a "cooking mode selection means 1" for selecting cooking according to the program C.
However, the cooking mode according to program C is the above-mentioned "multiple cooking" mode. Specifically, there are two types of cooking process 1.
The first type is a case where the first unit 401 is in charge of the cooking process 1, and as described above, the specific input key 450 can be used to command the start of the recipe data acquisition operation.
The second type is a case where the second unit 402 is in charge of the cooking process 1, and the specific input key 471 can be used to command the start of the recipe data acquisition operation.

When the second unit 402 is in charge of cooking step 1 of the cooking using the program C, the specific input key 450 is used to request the acquisition of the program C (to the sub-control device 440 via the main control device 480). It cannot be commanded. This can be done by operating the specific input key 471 described in FIG. 78 at a predetermined timing (within time).

That is, the specific input key 450 becomes a "program A selection section" when cooking using the program A is selected. Similarly, when cooking according to the program C is selected, the section becomes the "program C selection section".

Although the specific input key 450 has one operation unit as shown in FIG. 77, it has multiple functions (selection of cooking menu, permission to acquire recipe data CD regarding programs A and C) as described above. However, this can be realized by coordinating with the display on the first display section 418. Note that this point will be explained in detail later.

In FIG. 77, 473 is an input key for instructing the weight measurement means 428 to measure weight. Although this input key can be operated when the second unit 402 is not placed, the weight of the second unit 402 alone cannot be measured. When this input key 473 is pressed, the total weight of the object (metal pot, etc.) to be heated such as cooking or boiling water being carried out on the top plate 422, and the weight of food materials, etc. can be measured.

Therefore, using this input key 473, the user can conveniently measure the total weight of the pot or container placed on the top plate 422. Moreover, if the measurement is performed without the second unit 402 placed thereon, it can also be used as a scale for measuring the weight of food before starting cooking.

Reference numeral 474 is an input key for calorie notification that calculates the energy consumption amount of the food based on the weight measured by the weight measuring means 428.

The input key 473 for instructing the weight measurement and the input key 474 for calculating the energy consumption of the food constitute a fourth operation section 478.

In FIG. 77, 475A and 475B are thermal power setting switches (input keys) that adjust the output power of the inverter circuit 435 to the IH coil 424. The input key 475A for reducing the thermal power is placed on the left side, and the input key 475A for reducing the thermal power is placed on the left side. The input key 475B for raising is arranged on the right side.

Note that in this first unit 401, when a cooking menu is selected using the input key for menu selection and induction heating is started, a standard heat value corresponding to the cooking menu is determined in advance, and the input key 475A , 475B, the induction heating operation will continue as is with its standard heating power. However, depending on the temperature detected by the heated object temperature detection means 436, the main controller 480 may automatically increase or decrease the heating power or stop heating.

476 is an input key for commanding the start of induction heating cooking. Reference numeral 477 is an input key for canceling the previous input in the first operating section 420 (including the fourth operating section 478) or arbitrarily stopping the operation during induction heating cooking.

In FIG. 77, 460A is an operating section of the main power switch (not shown). When this operation section 460A is operated, a main power switch (not shown) in the power supply section 442 shown in FIG. 75 can be opened and closed.

In FIG. 77, 481 is recipe data receivable information (receivable mark), which is displayed in the first display section 420 when the recipe data CD can be received from the outside.

Reference numeral 482 is a program display section, and if any of the three types of programs A to C can be specified, it may be identified by letters such as "A", "B", and "C". Note that instead of displaying characters such as "A", "B", and "C", identification information for specifying the cooking menu, abbreviation, etc. may be displayed using symbols or characters. Note that the information displayed on the program display section 482 is information before the cooking device 400 actually acquires the recipe data CD, and after acquiring the recipe data CD, the target cooking menu is not displayed. In order to display more details, symbols such as A, B, and C are not displayed.

The information displayed on the program display section 482 is included in the advance notice information B (201) when the advance notice information B (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 400.

Next, the second operation section 421 and the second display section 412 will be explained based on FIG. 78.
FIG. 78 is a plan view of the lid 404 of the cooking device 400. A second display section 412 composed of a liquid crystal display screen or the like is arranged in the center of the lid 404.

The second display section 412 displays time information, a rice type display section 484, a hardness display section 486, and a menu display section 487. Further, on the left side outside the second display section 412, there are a rice type switch (input key) 488, a hardness switch (input key) 489, and a menu switch (also serving as a "specific input key") 471. An off/keep warm switch (input key) 490 and a cancel switch (input key) 491 for canceling the previous input are provided.

On the outside and right side of the second display section 412, there are a rice cooking start switch (input key) 467, a reservation switch (input key) 492, a time switch (input key) 493 for setting the time, and a calorie notification to be described later. A switch (input key) 494 is provided, respectively.

After the rice cooking operation has started, when the off/warm switch 490 is pressed, a command signal to stop rice cooking is issued to the sub-control device 440. Further, after the warming operation is started, when the off/warming switch 490 is pressed, a command signal to stop warming is issued. In this third embodiment, the control program is such that the warming process is automatically executed for a certain period of time (for example, 1 hour, 3 hours, 6 hours, etc.) following the heating process (main control (according to the rice cooking operation control program stored in the device 480).

In FIG. 78, 495 is data receivable information (receivable mark), which is displayed in the second display section 412 when it becomes possible to receive recipe data CD, which will be described later, from the outside.

496 is a program display section, which is displayed after receiving the "notice information B" 201 of the recipe data CD. The "notice information B" 201 here is information equivalent to the "notice information A" (201) (see FIG. 60) described in the first embodiment.
The information on this program display section 496 is included in the preview information B (201) and is received by the second unit 402 from the communication terminal 200. As a result of the sub-control device 440 analyzing the notice information B (201), if any of the programs A to C can be identified, it can be identified using letters such as "A", "B", "C", etc. Also good. Note that instead of displaying the characters "A", "B", "C", etc., the identification information for specifying the cooking menu may be displayed using symbols or characters.

After the program display section 496 is displayed on the second display section 412 as shown in FIG. 78, that is, after preview information B (201) of the recipe data CD is displayed, pressing the cancel switch 491 causes The information displayed in the program display section disappears immediately. After this, the specific recipe data CD displayed on the program display section 496 cannot be obtained from the communication terminal 200. To retrieve it again, you need to repeat the operation from the beginning.

The calorie notification switch 494 is for commanding the second display section 412 to display a calorie value. Further, the audio notification device 466 is instructed to notify the calorie value by audio. In other words, this calorie notification switch (input key) 494 is a switch that instructs the sub-control device 440 to notify the calorie value. Basically, the calorie value when this switch 494 is pressed is displayed on the second display section 412.

After finishing the rice cooking process or the steaming process, which will be described later, when the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed, the sub-control device 440 will press the input key 462A of the voice input means 462 (described later) on the second operation section 421, and the cancel button. (excluding switch 491) does not accept input from various switches (input keys). In other words, the rice type switch 488, hardness switch 489, menu switch 471, rice cooking switch 467, reservation switch 492, and time switch 493 are maintained in a state in which input is not possible.

The cancel switch 491 switches to the function of the cancel switch 471 from the time when the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed and the mode shifts to the "calorie notification mode." Therefore, if the cancellation switch 471 is pressed after shifting to the "calorie notification mode", the "calorie notification mode" is canceled and the function as the cancellation switch 471 is canceled.

Further, after finishing the rice cooking process or the steaming process, the mode automatically shifts to the keep warm mode, but when the off/keep warm switch 490 is pressed, the keep warm mode is canceled. Therefore, when rice cooking is finished, if you do not want to open the lid 404 and set the keep warm mode, it is better to press the off/keep warm switch 490. It should be noted that each time these operations are performed, the audio notification means 466 of the notification means 465 provides audio guidance on the operation details, and a corresponding display is also displayed on the first display section 412 each time.

As is clear from the above description, when the calorie notification switch 494 is pressed, the sub-control device 440 is set to the "calorie notification mode" unless the cancel switch 491 is pressed thereafter. The sub-control device 440 is set to a "calorie notification mode" in which it sequentially measures the weight of the rice, calculates the amount of energy, and reports the calorie value.

If you accidentally set the "calorie notification mode", you can press the cancel switch 491, but you can also press the cancel key (not shown) provided on the third operation section 429 to cancel the "calorie notification mode". Can be canceled.

After acquiring control data CD such as recipe data from the outside, if the control data is to be canceled, the cancel switch 491 may be pressed. If this is pressed, the acquired control data will not be used for subsequent heating cooking (the corresponding data will be deleted from the storage means 440R and the recipe data storage section 480A).

Note that the third operating section 429 also has an input key (not shown) corresponding to the calorie calculation key 494, and the "calorie notification mode" can be set from the third operating section 429 as well. Omitted. Note that when the calorie notification mode is set in the third operation unit 429, the calorie value is displayed by the third display unit 413 unless the user sets it in advance. If the user performs a predetermined operation in advance, the calorie calculation results can be displayed simultaneously on both the second display section 412 and the third display section 413.

462A is the operation unit of the voice input means 462 (see FIG. 76), and when this is pressed, the voice notification means 466 displays a message saying "Switched to voice input mode", and from now on, the user US will not be able to You can input by speaking (voice information). Note that if the operation unit 462A is pressed again, the voice input mode is canceled. The voice notification means 466 gives a message that "voice input mode has been cancelled."

469 is an NFC input/output unit that performs near field communication (NFC), and when an information communication processing terminal device (communication terminal 200) equipped with an NFC function approaches or comes into contact with it, communication can be performed. An antenna portion is embedded in the lower part of the case that constitutes the upper surface of the lid 404.

During the period from the time when the rice cooking unit 1 is separated from the top of the induction heating unit 10 to the time when it is placed on the induction heating unit 10 again, the cumulative amount of calorie values calculated by the calorie calculation unit 440C is , the data can be read by bringing the communication terminal 200 close to or in contact with the short-range wireless communication unit 469, and the data can be transferred to the communication terminal 200. That is, for example, if the weight of rice is measured and the calorie value is reported 10 times in total, the 10 calorie values can be read out in a time-series data format on the communication terminal 200 side. You can also read out the total value of the 10 calorie measurement results.

Further, the calorie value data is included as one of the "cooking implementation data" AD transmitted from the wireless communication unit 426 to the outside.

The wireless communication unit (input/output means) 469 that performs near field communication (NFC) can select any of the various rice cooking menus (for example, 7 types in total such as white rice cooking and porridge) using the second unit 402. One is an input means used for one-touch selection using the communication terminal 200 with an NFC function.

In other words, the rice cooking menu can be selected by manual operation using the menu switch 471, which also serves as a specific input key, but the wireless communication section 426 can also acquire data all at once in the form of a recipe data CD.

In this heating cooker 400, when recipe data CD is acquired from the wireless communication section 262, heating cooking can be performed in the following manner.
(1) It is possible to implement a cooking menu (for example, "boiling water") in the independent cooking mode KM1 using only the first unit 401. However, it is necessary to put the second unit 402 into a separated “second state”.
(2) A cooking menu (for example, "cooking rice") in the independent cooking mode KM1 using only the second unit 402 can be implemented. However, it is necessary to start the heating operation while maintaining the "first state" in which the second unit 402 is placed on the first unit 401.
(3) It is also possible to select a cooking menu in which the first unit 401 and the second unit 402 are used together, like the multiple cooking mode KMM.

In other words, although the various recipe data CDs themselves cannot be acquired by the first unit 401 except through the wireless communication section 26, the second display section 412 of the second unit 402 and the first unit 401 Various types of cooking can be performed by the cooperative operation of the first display section 418.

The rice type switch 488 is an input means for setting the type of rice to be cooked. Each time the rice seed switch 488 is pressed, the display on the rice seed display section 484 changes to "white rice," "unrinsed rice," "brown rice," and "sprouted brown rice." Information regarding the type of rice set by the rice type switch 488 is input to the sub-control device 440, which will be described later.

In FIG. 78, the rice variety switch 488 is also written with "brand". Although the specific brand of rice can be specified with this switch 488, only one of the two types of input functions (brand and rice type) can be selected depending on how the switch 488 is pressed. Note that detailed explanation will be omitted.

The hardness switch 489 is an input means for setting the "hardness of rice" at the time of cooking. Each time the hardness switch 489 is pressed, the display on the hardness display section 486 changes in the order of "hard," "normal," and "soft." The information (setting data) regarding the hardness of the cooked rice inputted to the hardness switch 489 is inputted to the sub-control device 440, which selects the hardness of the cooked rice.

When the above-mentioned "hard mode" is set, a control parameter corresponding to the "hard mode" described later is selected and the rice cooking operation is performed.
Moreover, when "soft" is set, the control parameter corresponding to the "soft" mode, which will be described later, is selected and the rice cooking operation is performed. In the third embodiment, the hardness switch 489 and the sub-control device 440 constitute hardness selection means.

The heating cooker 400 shown in the third embodiment is capable of cooking rice in at least two types: a "soft mode" and a "hard mode" in which rice is cooked harder than the soft mode. However, control parameters may be prepared to allow more detailed adjustment.

The menu switch 471 is an input means for setting a rice cooking menu. Every time this menu switch 471 is pressed, the display on the menu display section 487 changes to "risotto," "porridge," and "rice cooked." Further, information regarding the rice cooking menu set by the menu switch 471 is input to the sub-control device 440.

The menu switch 471 also serves as a "cooking mode selection means 2" for selecting either cooking according to the program B or cooking according to the program C.

The menu switch 471 also has a function of selecting cooking according to the program B, so in this case it is also referred to as a "program B selection section." Similarly, the menu switch 471 also has a function of selecting cooking according to the program C (provided that the second unit 402 is in charge of cooking step 1), and is therefore also referred to as a "program C selection section."

One of the features of this third embodiment is that the menu switch 471 also has a function of allowing recipe data CDs for all cooking fields of two types of programs (programs B and C) to be acquired from outside. That's true. For this reason, this menu switch 471 is called a "specific input key."
Similarly, the first unit 401 also has a specific input key 450. This specific input key 450 has a function of permitting acquisition of recipe data CD regarding programs A and C, as explained with reference to FIG. These feature points will be explained in detail later.

The menu switch 471 has a single operation section that the user US touches with his or her fingertips, as shown in FIG. 78, but has multiple functions (selection of cooking mode, selection of programs B and C) as described above. However, this can be realized by cooperating with the second display section 412.

As explained in FIG. 78, the menu switch 471 selects one rice cooking menu from among the rice cooking menus (10 types such as white rice, risotto, and seasoned rice) using only the second unit 402. It is a means of selection. However, the action of operating the menu switch 471 and the menu switch 450 (see FIG. 77) serves as a trigger for acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside. This point will be explained in detail later.

The off/keep warm switch 490 is an input means for switching the end/start of the keep warm operation. The rice cooking switch 467 is an input means for instructing the start of rice cooking. The reservation switch 492 is an input means for setting rice cooking reservations, and the time switch 493 is an input means for setting times such as the current time and the reserved rice cooking time. Information set by these various switches is input to the sub-control device 440.
The various switches 488 to 494, 462, and 471 are push-type input means, but they may be changed to touch-type switches.

In FIG. 78, 470 is a light emitting display section. The light emitting display section 470, which is a part of the notification means 465, illuminates the specific input key 471 arranged on the second operation section 421 from below in a particularly conspicuous manner at a predetermined timing with a light emitting element such as an LED. In addition, when illuminating, not only continuous light emission but also flashing may be used. The state in which light is emitted is shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 79 will be explained.
FIG. 79 is a time chart showing the operations of the cooking device 400 and the communication terminal 200 in chronological order in the heating system of the third embodiment.
In FIG. 79, steps T1 to T23 are main operation steps of cooking device 400 and related operation steps of communication terminal 200.

The user US turns on the main power switch of the first unit 401 (step T1). The main controller 480 of the first unit 401 is activated and determines whether the second unit 402 is placed in the correct position. Specifically, the first communication unit 430A of the first reference position determining means 430 transmits a predetermined confirmation signal in the form of an infrared signal to the second communication unit 431A (step T2).

When in the "first state" described above, a predetermined response signal (infrared signal) is sent back to the first unit 401 from the second communication section 431A. Through such mutual confirmation using infrared signals between the first unit 401 and the second unit 402, the main controller can determine whether or not the second unit 402 is placed at a predetermined position of the first unit 401. 480 makes a determination (step T3).
Note that the determination result of the main controller 480 is output to the sub controller 440 as an infrared signal from the first communication unit 430. Note that the sub-control device 440 may include a reference position determination function.

In the heating cooker 400, when the main controller 480 confirms that there are no abnormalities, including the state of the second unit 402, using signals from various sensors, it indicates that the heating cooking device is ready. The initial screen 16MH is displayed on both the first display section 420 and the second display section 412 (steps T6 and T7).

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side, mutual authentication with cooking device 400 has been completed in advance, so upon receiving a connection request signal from cooking device 400, a predetermined communication state can be established. Note that such a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) is not illustrated. This communication establishment step may be automatically started by the cooking device 400.

On the other hand, when the communication terminal 200 establishes a communication state with the heating cooker 400, it recognizes the heating cooker 400 and displays a cooking menu search screen and the like on the terminal side display section 216. Therefore, the user can search for the desired cooking menu (recipe data) by operating the search screen. That is, the communication terminal 200 can display the search screen 216P on the terminal-side display unit 216, and display the search results in response to the input operation by the user US (step T5). Note that the recipe data search results may be presented at a time before the steps T6 and T7, or at a later time as shown in FIG. 79.

If the user US selects only the specific (one) cooking menu that he or she wants to cook, the display switches to the first screen 216A. At this point, the setting information for executing one specific cooking menu is temporarily held in the recipe selection section 232.
The first screen 216A at step T9 displays the enter key 237 as described in FIG. 56(A) of the first embodiment.

When the user US touches the confirmation key 237, the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and confirms the cooking menu (step T9), and displays the second screen 216B in place of the first screen 216A. It is displayed on the side display section 216.

On the other hand, when the confirmation key (icon) 237 of the cooking menu is pressed, preview information B (201) is generated in the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 and sent to the cooking device 400 (step T11). . In addition, although FIG. 79 shows an example in which step T10 of the transmission command by the user US is provided immediately after step T9, this step T10 is omitted and the user presses the confirmation key (icon) 237 of the cooking menu as described above. Accordingly, the preview information B (201) may be automatically transmitted.

When the second unit 402 of the cooking device 400 receives the preview information B (201) via the wireless communication section 426, the second unit 402 displays the contents on the second display section 412. For example, the operation support information 175 is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (step T12).
Further, the second unit 402 transfers the contents of the preview information B (201) from the second communication section 431A to the main control device 480 via the first communication section 430A. Then, the main controller 480 displays the contents of the advance notice information B (201) on the first display section 418 (step T13). In this case, depending on the recipe menu, operation support information 175 as shown in FIG. 80 is displayed, but the input key specified by the operation support information 175 is the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401.

In this case, the preview information B (201) includes, as described in Embodiment 1, a "specific input" that must be directly operated by the user US on the heating cooker 400 before acquiring the recipe data CD. Contains correspondence information KID that can identify the "key".
In this third embodiment, the correspondence information KID indicates that the specific input key to be operated by the user US is either the input key 450 of the first unit 401 or the input key 471 of the second unit 402. is shown. Note that the process of analyzing the preview information B (201) and determining that the "input key to be operated" is the specific input key 450 or 471 may be executed by the sub-control device 440 or by the main controller. It may also be executed by the control device 480.

When the second unit 402 of the cooking device 400 receives the preview information B (201) via the wireless communication unit 426, the second unit 402 displays the contents on the second display unit 412. For example, the operation support information 175 is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (step T12).
Further, the second unit 402 transfers the contents of the preview information B (201) from the second communication section 431A to the main control device 480 via the first communication section 430A. Then, the main controller 480 displays the contents of the advance notice information B (201) on the first display section 418 (step T13). In this case, depending on the recipe menu, operation support information 175 as shown in FIG. 80 is displayed, but the input key specified by the operation support information 175 is the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401. Note that, as described above, since the preview information B includes the correspondence information KID, the information of the specific input key displayed in the operation support information 175 always matches.

According to the operation support information 175, the input key (specific input key) 450 of the first operation section 420 of the first unit 401 is pressed (step T14B). Alternatively, the input key (specific input key) 471 of the second operation section 421 of the second unit 402 is pressed (step T14A). As a result of this confirmation operation, the cooking device 400 (second unit 402) transmits selection information B via the wireless communication section 426 (step T15).

In the communication terminal 200, the reception of the selection information B is displayed on the terminal side display section 216 (second screen 216B) (step T16). For example, it is displayed on the second screen A (216B1) as shown in FIG. 58(A).

Next, when the send key 240 on the second screen 216B of the communication terminal 200 is pressed, a recipe data CD for executing a specific cooking menu (for example, "rice cooked with 〇〇") is sent from the communication terminal 200. They are transmitted all at once (step T17). That is, "command data" (setting information B) for setting cooking device 400 to a specific state is transmitted from communication terminal 200 all at once.

In this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 426 of the cooking device 400 is housed in the lid 404 of the cooking device 400 in the form of an adapter, so the wireless The communication unit 426 is also referred to as a "communication adapter."

When the communication adapter 426 receives the command data (step T19), the communication adapter 426 then acquires status information of the cooking device 400 itself. This status information is information indicating the status of main controller 480 of cooking device 400. Therefore, the information confirms the driving state of the IH coil 424, for example.
In order to collect such status information, when the second unit 402 receives the command data, it transfers it to the first unit 401 (by an infrared signal transmitted from the second communication section 431A to the first communication section 430A). .

The first unit 401 collects its own state information and transmits it to the communication adapter 426 of the second unit 402 via the first communication section 430. After this, confirmation data may be communicated multiple times between the first unit 401 and the second unit 402 via the first communication section 430A and the second communication section 431A. The communication adapter 426 analyzes the contents of the status information provided from the first unit 401 and the command data received from the communication terminal 200, and determines whether there is any problem in executing heating cooking according to the received command data. Determination is made (step T21).

When the heating cooker 400 determines that there is no problem in cooking, the communication adapter 426 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step T22). This transmission process corresponds to sending the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 55). If the determination result is that there is a problem with the cooking process, a signal (disapproval notification) is sent from the communication adapter 51 of the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal 200 indicating that the recipe data CD cannot be received. Send data. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 55).

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the content of the "permission notification" or "non-permission notification" from the cooking device 1. Then, those contents are displayed on the third screen 216C (step T23).

As illustrated in FIG. 79, if data for a specific cooking menu (for example, "〇〇 cooked rice") is obtained from recipe data, that cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu. . In the first unit 401 and the second unit 402, after the initial standby screen is displayed on the first display section 418 and the second display section 412 (step T6 or T7), the recipe data CD is displayed as a specific one. Only the cooking menu is limited. That is, during the initial standby period TP, only one cooking menu can be acquired from the outside.

Note that when cooking is performed using a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, the control conditions (for example, adjusting the hardness of rice, etc.) can be changed using the first operating section 420 or the second operating section 421 before starting cooking. Although the user US can change the control conditions as appropriate, there are some cooking menus in which the control conditions cannot be changed.
In addition, the "tolerable setting range" of the control conditions is set in advance on the heating cooker 400 side, and even the cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "allowable setting range". .

Furthermore, in the multiple cooking mode KMM, there is a limitation on the input operation section for inputting control conditions by pressing operations.
For example, if the recipe data CD is related to the program C, it corresponds to the "multiple cooking" mode described above. In this case, when the first unit 401 is in charge of the cooking process 1, the control conditions can be adjusted using the first operation section 420.
Further, when the second unit 402 is in charge of the cooking process 1, the control conditions can be adjusted using the second operation section 421.

For the cooking menu (for example, "rice cooking") performed in the "first state" where the second unit 402 is placed, heating cooking can be started by pressing the rice cooking switch (input key) 467 of the second operation section 421. can.
In the cooking menu performed in the "second state" of only the first unit 401, heating cooking can be started by pressing the input key 476 of the first operation section 420.

Next, FIG. 80 will be explained.
FIG. 80 is a plan view 2 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. The second display section 412 shows both the state of "notification step SP2B" before acquiring the recipe data CD and the state of "receiving step SP4" in the middle of acquiring the recipe data CD. Therefore, cooking has not yet started.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the second unit 402 receives the preview information B (201) via the wireless communication section 426, it displays this content on the second display section 412, but in that case, As shown in FIG. 80, operation support information 175 is displayed.
The operation support information 175 in this case requests that the "menu button" be pressed before acquiring the recipe data CD. In other words, the user US is requested to press the specific input key 471.

At this stage, the specific input key 471 is lit continuously or blinks from below with a light emitting element (not shown) to make it stand out from the other input keys as shown in FIG. 80 by the light emitting display section 470. illuminated.
Furthermore, after the specific input key 471 is pressed, the display of the operation support information 175 disappears when the operation of receiving the recipe data CD actually starts. Instead, the reception operation display section 174 is displayed on the second display section 412. Furthermore, a progress mark 412F indicating the degree of progress of the receiving operation is displayed. This progress mark 412F corresponds to the progress mark 16F of the first embodiment.

The second unit 402 transfers the contents of the preview information B (201) from the second communication section 431A to the main control device 480 via the first communication section 430A. Then, the main controller 480 displays the contents of the advance notice information B (201) on the first display section 418 (step T13). In this case, depending on the recipe menu, operation support information 175 as shown in FIG. 80 is displayed, but the input key specified by the operation support information 175 is the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401.

In FIG. 80, the color of the push button surface of the input key 462A (of the voice input means 462) in the second operation section 421 changes as shown in outline (due to the light emitting display section not shown). This indicates that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode from the time the specific input key 471 is operated.

Next, FIG. 81 will be explained.
FIG. 81 is a plan view 3 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 74 viewed from above. It shows the state of "standby step SP5" after acquiring the recipe data CD.
Auxiliary information 179 is displayed on the second display section 412. In the case of the "multiple cooking" mode KMM, as shown in FIG. 81, the user US can easily understand the cooking steps by contrasting and displaying the cooking contents for each of the plurality of cooking steps. That's what I do. Note that although the display example in FIG. 81 concerns the second display section 412, the display contents of the first display section 420 and the operation of the first operation section 420 will be explained with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 82 will be explained.
FIG. 82 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the input operation section and the display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 74 when viewed from the front (front) side.
This FIG. 82 shows the first display section 418 of the first unit 401 at the stage of step T13 in FIG.
When the second unit 402 obtains the advance notice information B (201) from the communication terminal 200, it notifies the main control device 480 (step T13).
The main controller 480 displays the operation support information 176 on the first display section 418 . The operation support information 175 includes information instructing the operation of the specific input key 450, as shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 82, the guidance message is to press the "menu" button, but this "menu button" is only the specific input key 450 in the first unit 401.

When this specific input key 450 is pressed (step T14A in FIG. 80), a command to transmit selection information C is issued from the main controller 480, and the first communication section 430 sends an infrared ray to the second communication section 431A. The selection information C is transmitted by a signal. In response to this selection information C, selection information B (202) is transmitted from the second unit 402. Note that the contents of the selection information C and the selection information B do not need to be completely the same, but at least the selection information B includes information indicating that the specific input key 450 has been operated.

When the second unit detects that the specific input key 471 has been operated and then transmits selection information A (201), it shifts to a standby state.
On the other hand, if it is necessary to operate the specific input key 450 in the first unit 401,
When the input key 450 is operated, the second unit 401 detects it, and thereafter transmits selection information A (201) and shifts to a standby state.
In these two cases, after transitioning to the standby state, at the stage when reception of the recipe data CD is started, the reception operation display screen 16MM is displayed on the first display section 418 and the second display section 412. Begins.

During such a reception operation of the recipe data CD, other operation support information is displayed on the first display section 418 and the second display section 412 so that the second unit 402 is not moved from above the first unit 401. 176A (see FIG. 82). Note that the operation support information 176A may be displayed after the operation support information 176, or may be displayed at the same time. Further, in FIG. 82, only an example displayed on the first display section 418 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82, in step T13, the main controller 480 causes the light emitting display section 453 to continuously light up or blink so as to emphasize the presence of the specific input key 450. As a result, the user US looking at the first operation unit 420 can quickly identify the input key that the user is instructed to operate on the communication terminal 200. Note that, as shown in FIG. 82, at the stage of steps T13 and T14B, the other input keys (473, 474, etc.) are not guided to operate by lighting, blinking, etc. by the light emitting display section 453 described above.
In addition, during the period when the light-emitting display section 453 lights up or flashes to prompt the operation of the specific input key 450, the input keys 473, 474, 475A, 475B, and 476 that do not require input operation have no input function. Disabled. That is, the output from the first operating section 420 is limited by the main controller 480.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, the third embodiment discloses the cooking device 400 according to the third disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 400 according to the third disclosure is as follows:
A first unit 401 incorporating a first operation section 420, a first display section 418, a first communication section 430A, a heating source (IH coil) 424, and a storage means 480R;
a second unit 402 that is capable of heating and cooking operation using the heat source 424 in a first state placed on the first unit 401;
Equipped with
The second unit 402 includes a second display section 412, a second operation section 421, a second communication section 431A, a wireless communication section 426 that performs wireless communication with an external communication device, and a storage section 440R. and a sub-control device 440,
The first unit 401 includes a main controller 480 that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section 426,
The first operating section 420 and the second operating section 421 have specific input keys 450 and 471, respectively,
At least one of the storage means 480R of the first unit 401 and the storage means 440R of the second unit 401 has correspondence information KID that specifies the specific input keys 450 and 471 for each cooking menu. Ori,
After the main power switch is turned on, the sub-control device 440
(1) a key identification step SP2A of detecting that one of the specific input keys 450, 471 has been operated;
(2) When the notification signal B (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input keys 450, 471 defined by the specific cooking menu are activated to receive the notification signal B (201). a confirmation step SP3B that determines whether the operation has been performed before the reception of the notification signal B or after the reception of the notification signal B;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3B that the specific input keys 450 and 471 have been operated, transmit selection information A (202) from the wireless communication unit 426 after receiving the advance notice signal B. ,
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 400 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates the specific input keys 450 and 471 to be operated in advance on the side of the cooking device 400, which is suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or if advance notice information from the communication terminal 200 is received. In either case, when the specific input keys 450 and 471 to be operated are operated after receiving B, the confirmation operation on the heating cooker 400 side by the user US (whether or not the specific input key is operated) is confirmed. After that, the process proceeds to the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD, so that it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, the sub-control device 440 of the cooking device 400 of the third embodiment is configured to start the reception restriction period TZ1 when the selection information A (202) is transmitted to the external communication terminal 200.
Therefore, if you decide to obtain a specific recipe data CD and press the input key 471, you may accidentally enter another cooking menu (such as a control menu for another cooking mode) while setting a cooking menu. (including the control menu for the independent cooking mode), and can stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, the sub-control device 440 of the heating cooker 400 of the third embodiment is
(1) When preview information B (201) regarding the cooking menu is obtained from the wireless communication unit 426, a key identification step SP2A of extracting one of the specific input keys 450 and 471 based on the correspondence information KID;
(2) a notification step SP2B of notifying information for identifying the specific input key extracted in the key identification step on the first display section or the second display section;
Execute sequentially,
Further, the sub-control device 440 is configured to transmit selection information B (202) indicating that the specific input keys 450, 471 notified in the notification step SP2B have been operated. .

With this configuration, the cooking device 400 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 444, 465 (first display section 420, second display section 412) of the heating cooker 400 selects the specific input keys 450, 471 to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US on the communication terminal. The notification is made using advance notice information B from 200.
Therefore, since the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US is guided by visual information on the first display section 420 or the second display section 412, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability. can.
Furthermore, since the selection information B (202) is transmitted, the communication terminal 200 that receives this can check the preparation status of the heating cooker 400 side and transmit the recipe data CD to the heating cooker 400 at an appropriate timing. .

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 3, the heating cooker 400 of the following form was disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 400 disclosed in Embodiment 3 is as follows:
A first unit 401 that includes a first operation section 420, a first communication section 430A, and a heating source (IH coil) 424;
a second unit 402 that can be heated by the heat source 424 when placed on the first unit 401;
The second unit 402 includes a second display section 412, a second input section 421, a second communication section 431A, and a wireless communication section that performs wireless communication with an external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200). 426, and
The first unit 401 includes a main controller 480 that operates according to the recipe data CD acquired from the wireless communication section 426,
The second unit 402 receives the recipe data CD from the wireless communication unit 426 after completing the preparation state through communication between the first communication unit 430A and the second communication unit 431A in the first state. When advance notice information B (201) before reception is obtained, information on the specific operation of the second input section 421 (operation of the input key 471) is displayed on the second display section, and in this state, the second input section When the specific operation is performed from 421, selection information B (202) is transmitted from the wireless communication section 426, and the system shifts to a standby state for receiving the recipe data CD.

With this configuration, the cooking device 400 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, in the notification means 444, 465 (first display section 420, second display section 412) of the heating cooker 400, input keys (specific input keys 450, 471) to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US are displayed. is notified by advance notice information B from the communication terminal 200 to guide the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US, so that it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 400 disclosed in this third embodiment uses only the first unit 401 to heat and cook an object placed above the top plate 422 using the built-in heating source (IH coil) 424. can.
In addition, the second unit 402 is capable of heating the inner pot containing the food to be cooked using the heat source (IH coil) 424 when placed on the first unit 401 (first state). be.
In this way, depending on the content of cooking, it is possible to select whether to use the first unit 401 alone or in combination with the second unit 402 for cooking.
Further, the second unit 402 can be separated from the first unit 401 and moved to another location.
These separable forms can improve convenience for the user US.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 83 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the central part of the heating cooker used in the heating cooking system of Embodiment 4. FIG. 84 is a time chart showing the operations of the cooking device and the communication terminal in chronological order in the heating system according to the fourth embodiment. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configurations of Embodiments 1 to 3 described in FIGS. 1 to 82 are given the same reference numerals.

FIG. 83 will be explained.
The heating cooker 400 according to the fourth embodiment has an overall configuration similar to the heating cooker 400 according to the third embodiment, but the configuration of the first unit 401 is different.
The planar shape of the first unit 401 is a square, and the size of this planar shape is almost the same as the planar shape of the second unit 402. Therefore, in a state in which the second units 402 are stacked (first state), the entire upper surface of the first unit 401 is covered by the second unit 402.

The upper surface of the first unit 401 is almost entirely covered with a top plate 422 made of heat-resistant glass or plastic material, and the bottom surface of the second unit 402 is in contact with the top plate 422 in the first state. Or face each other with a small gap.
At the front end of the upper surface of the first unit 401, a stepped portion (recess) 445 is formed that has a constant width and continues to both left and right ends.
The first operation section 420 and the first display section 418 are arranged on this stepped section 445. The first display unit 418 is configured by providing touch keys (icons) in a liquid crystal display screen that also serves as a touch input panel.

A dimensional relationship is established such that a gap of at least several mm is always maintained between the first operating section 420 disposed in the stepped portion 445 and the bottom surface of the second unit 402 in the first state. It has become. Therefore, the first operating section 420 is not pressed on the bottom surface of the second unit 402 and an inadvertent input is not made.

The first operation unit 420 is provided with various input keys as described in FIG. 77 of the third embodiment. However, these input keys are provided on the display screen of the first display unit 418 using a touch input method.
In this fourth embodiment, the recipe data CD related to both the first unit 401 and the second unit 402 is acquired using the specific input key 471 of the second unit 402. Therefore, the input key 450 (see FIG. 77) of the first unit 401 only has a touch operation function when manually selecting a cooking menu, and in order to obtain the recipe data CD, There is no function to generate the selection information B (202) as described.

Next, FIG. 84 will be explained.
FIG. 84 is a time chart showing the operations of cooking device 400 and communication terminal 200 in chronological order. This FIG. 84 is similar to the content shown in FIG. 79 of the third embodiment, so the different points will be mainly described below.
The time chart shown in FIG. 84 differs from that shown in FIG. 79 in four points.
The first point is that the "standby initial screen" described in step T6 of FIG. 79 is not displayed. This is because, as can be seen from FIG. 83, in the first state, the first display section 418 is covered from above by the second unit 402, so even if it is displayed, the user US cannot see it. Therefore, it is not displayed because it is useless.

The second point is that the "notice information B (201)" described in step T13 of FIG. 79 is not displayed. The fact that this display is not displayed is the same as in step T6 described above, and there is no need to check the contents of the preview information B (201) on the first display section 418, and even if it is displayed, the user US cannot see it. It is. Even in a recipe menu where cooking process 1 is started in the first unit 401, the specific input key that requires a response input operation is not the specific input key 450 of the first unit 401, but the specific input key of the second unit 402. There is only an input key 471.

The third point is that "the specific input key 450 is not pressed" on the first operation unit 420 as described in step T14B of FIG. 79.
The fourth point is that there is no "notification" of the status confirmation result as described in step T20 of FIG. 79. This notification means displaying the status confirmation result on the first display section 418. As can be seen from FIG. 83, in the first state, the first display section 418 is covered from above by the second unit 402. Therefore, even if it were displayed, the user US would not be able to see it. Therefore, it is not displayed because it is useless.

Summary of Embodiment 4.
As is clear from the above description, the fourth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 400 related to the fifth disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 400 related to the fifth disclosure disclosed in the fourth embodiment is as follows:
A first unit 401 incorporating a first operation section 420, a first display section 418, a first communication section 430A, a heating source (IH coil) 424, and a storage means 480R;
a second unit 402 that is capable of heating and cooking operation using the heat source 424 in a first state placed on the first unit 401;
Equipped with
The second unit 402 includes a second display section 412, a second operation section 421, a second communication section 431A, a wireless communication section 426 that performs wireless communication with an external communication device, and a storage section 440R. and a sub-control device 440,
The first unit 401 includes a main controller 480 that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section 426,
The second operation unit 421 has a plurality of input keys 467, 493, 494, 488, 489, 490 and a specific input key 471,
After the main power switch is turned on, the sub-control device 440
(1) a key identification step SP2A that detects that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When a notice signal B (201) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input key 471 is operated before receiving the notice signal B (201), or a confirmation step SP3B that determines whether or not the operation has been performed after receiving the notice signal B;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3B that the specific input key 471 has been operated, transmitting selection information A (202) from the wireless communication unit 426 after receiving the advance notice signal B;
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 400 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, if the user US operates a specific input key to obtain the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the side of the heating cooker 400, or if the preview information B from the communication terminal 200 is In either case, when the specific input key 471 is operated after receiving the recipe data, the user US performs a confirmation operation on the heating cooker 400 side (whether or not the specific input key is operated), and then the recipe data CD Since the process proceeds to the acquisition operation, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, in the sub-control device 440 of the heating cooker 400 of the fourth embodiment, when the selection information A (202) is transmitted to the external communication terminal 200, similarly to the third embodiment, the reception restriction period TZ1 The configuration was to start.
Therefore, if you decide to obtain a specific recipe data CD and press the input key 471, you may accidentally enter another cooking menu (such as a control menu for another cooking mode) while setting a cooking menu. (including the control menu for the independent cooking mode), and can stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 400 shown in Embodiment 4 has the following features:
When advance notice information B (201) before receiving the recipe data CD is obtained from the wireless communication unit 426, the advance notice information includes correspondence information KID that specifies the specific input key 471. Information on the specific operation (operation of the input key 471) of the second input section 421 is displayed on the second display section (step T12; see FIG. 81), and in this state, the specific operation is performed from the second input section 421. If the confirmation information B (202) is sent from the wireless communication unit 426,
This configuration is characterized by the following.

That is, the sub-control device 440 of the second unit 402 is configured to transmit confirmation information B (220) indicating that the specific input key 471 notified in the notification step SP2B has been operated.

With this configuration, the cooking device 400 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the second display section 412 of the cooking device 400 can recognize the specific input key 471 to be operated in advance based on the preview information B from the communication terminal 200 in response to the operation by the user US.
Therefore, since the second display section 412 guides the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US with visual information, it is possible to prevent operation errors by the user US and improve usability.
Furthermore, since confirmation information B (202) is sent, the communication terminal 200 that receives this can check the preparation status of the heating cooker 400 side and transmit the recipe data CD to the heating cooker 400 at an appropriate timing. .

In this fourth embodiment, even if the recipe data CD that starts the cooking process 1 in the first unit 401 is received, the input from the first operation section 420 of the first unit 401 or the first There is no need to confirm the display content on the display unit 418. In other words, on the second unit 402 side that includes the wireless communication section 426, input operations for acquiring the recipe data CD can be performed using the second operation section 421, so regardless of the content of cooking, the By operating the specific input key 471 of the second operation section 421, the process proceeds to the process of receiving the recipe data CD.
As a result, the input work required by the user US is simpler than in the third embodiment, and it is expected that the operability will be further improved.

Embodiment 5.
FIG. 85 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, operations between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section 16M, central operation section 15M, and central heating status display section 17 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 85. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configurations of Embodiments 1 to 4 described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are given the same reference numerals.

FIG. 85 will be explained.
In FIG. 85, steps SF1 to SF2 indicate the operation of communication terminal 200. Steps SF3 to SF9 indicate the operation of the cooking device 1.
The storage unit 220 of the communication terminal 200 or the heating cooker database 217 includes identification information 167 corresponding to a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and correspondence for specifying a "specific input key" corresponding to each cooking menu. Information KID is stored.
Therefore, the first screen 216A showing the identification information of the cooking menu and the image display section 235 is displayed on the terminal side display section (terminal side display screen) 216 based on the preview information A (201).

In the communication terminal 200, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 (see FIG. 56) is pressed, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 obtains and generates the cooking menu from the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217. The preview information A (201) is sent to the cooking device 400 (step SF2). Note that FIG. 85 shows that the information stored in the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217 includes cooking menu identification information and specific input key correspondence information KID.

The operation of the heating cooker 1 starts from the next step SF3.
Step SF3 is a stage in which preview information A (201) is received via the communication unit 51.
Step SF4 is a step of determining advance notice information A (201) for performing processing corresponding to the above-described "key identification step SP2A" (see FIG. 59). In this determination step SF4, identification information corresponding to a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and correspondence information KID specifying a specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu are stored in the storage device 41 (or cooking device database 217). ) compared to the database stored in Thereby, it is determined that the information included in the transmitted advance notice information 201 is correct information based on the information held in the cooking device 1, and the process proceeds to step SF5. In addition, in the cooking device 1, the acquired preview information 201 is stored in the storage device 41 in order to be stored in association with subsequent reception of the recipe data CD.
Further, it is checked against operation history information stored in the storage device 41 to see if a specific input key to be operated has been operated.

Step SF5 is a processing step for performing processing corresponding to a part of the above-described "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 59). In step SF5, in response to the determination result in step SF4, information specifying a specific input key (for example, 153M) is generated and displayed on the display section 16 (for example, central display section 16M) to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the operation support information 175 indicates in text that it is the specific input key 153M. In addition, the light emitting unit 21M blinks to display

The next step SF6 is a processing step for performing processing corresponding to a part of the above-described "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 59).
Step SF6 is a stage in which the user US presses the specific input key (for example, 153M) displayed in step SF5. This operation is detected by the input operation section 15. For example, when the input key 153M is operated on the central operation unit 15M, as explained in the first embodiment (FIG. 11), the input key identification unit 15A and the input signal analysis unit 52 generate an input corresponding to the input key 153M. It is determined that the signal has been given to the control device 40 (input processing section 70) (step SF7).

As described above, when the correct specific input key (for example, 153M) to be input is operated, the restriction unit 55 generates a signal that sets the reception restriction period TZ1 of the recipe data CD.
As described in the first embodiment, the restriction unit 55 has the function of restricting the acquisition of recipe data CD. The restriction unit 55 allows the data acquisition unit 53 to communicate with the communication unit 51 during a standby period before starting cooking in various cooking modes (including the cooperative cooking mode KM1) (that is, before “cooking process 1”). It has a function of acquiring the advance notice information A (201) through the mobile terminal and restricting the acquisition of other advance notice information A (201) from the time when a specific input key (for example, 153M) as a response signal is operated.

That is, when the specific input key is operated in step SF6, even if another advance notice information A (201) is transmitted thereafter, it will not be treated as a regular signal. However, if, for example, the input key (for cancellation) 152M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed on the heating cooker 1 side immediately after step SF6, all steps from step SF3 to step SF7 will be canceled. , after that, it is possible to transmit new preview information A (201) from the communication terminal 200. Moreover, once the (final) cooking process of one cooking menu is completed, preview information A (201) for a new recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication section 51. In addition, as another modification, when the (first) cooking process 1 of the cooking menu is started, advance notice information A (201) for a new recipe data CD can be acquired from the communication section 51. You can also do it.

In the next step SF8, when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated in step SF6, the display unit 16 corresponding to the input operation unit 15 having the specific input key indicates that the operation of the specific input key has been received. Display. For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the operation support information 175A displays in text that the operation of the specific input key 153M has been accepted.
In the next step SF9, specific input key selection information A (202) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200. This step corresponds to the above-described "confirmation step SP3" (see FIG. 59).
Note that, as shown in FIG. 85, counting of the elapsed time of the time limit TX starts from the step SF4, which will be explained with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, FIG. 86 will be explained.
FIG. 86 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 85.
This FIG. 86 is an example where the specific input key is 153M. The necessity of operating the specific input key 153M is displayed on the central display section 16M corresponding to the central operation section 15M.
Immediately after receiving preview information A (201), the necessity of operating a specific input key is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86, the operation support information 175 is displayed in characters such as "Please press the blinking reception key." Note that the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to provide audio notification.

In synchronization with the display of the operation support information 175, as shown in FIG. 86, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the specific input key 153M goes into a blinking state, highlighting the presence of the specific input key 153M with light.

After this, when the user US presses the specific input key 153M, the central display section 15M starts displaying operation support information 175A such as "Reception command accepted" as shown in white text. . Note that in addition to or in place of such a display, the audio notification section 50 may start the notification.
Through these displays and audio notifications, the user US can visually confirm after the fact that he has reliably executed the operation of transmitting the selection information 202 by operating the specific input key 153M.

Next, FIG. 87 will be explained.
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 85.
This FIG. 87 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, but unlike FIG. 38, a step of determining whether or not a specific input key is operated is added, so this difference will be mainly described below.
Step SL20 is a stage in which preview information A (201) is received during connection with the outside (communication terminal 200). That is, this is the stage where the advance notice information A (201) is sent from the communication terminal 200 that has been registered and set in advance to provide a recipe data CD for a specific cooking. The determination of the contents of the preview information A (201) is started as described in step SF4 of FIG. 85.
The control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time from this point.

The next step SL21 is a process of determining whether the user US has operated a specific input key (for example, 153M). If the specific input key is operated, this step SL21 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL22.
In step SL22, it is determined whether or not the target recipe data CD has been received from the communication terminal 200. If it has been received, step SL22 becomes "Yes" and the step of acquiring the recipe data CD is completed.

In step SL21, if the specific input key (for example, 153M) is not operated, the process proceeds to step SL23. In step SL23, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL24. Step SL24 is "automatic shutoff processing 3" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 33). Note that the time limit TX of this step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes.

Further, even if the recipe data CD is not received in step SL22, the process proceeds to step SL23. In this step SL23, as described above, it is determined whether the time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL24. In other words, "automatic shutoff processing 3" is performed to automatically shut off the main power supply. Note that the time limit TX of this step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes as described above, but if step SL23 is reached via step 22, a time other than the above-mentioned time (10 minutes) may be set. It's okay.

Next, FIG. 88 will be explained.
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 85.
Since FIG. 88 corresponds to FIG. 56 of the first embodiment, the explanation will focus on the differences from FIG. 56.
What is shown in FIG. 88(A) shows a state in which the user US has already found recipe information for one desired cooking menu and displayed it. 234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information on the first screen 216A. 237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A.

When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu on this first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and displays the cooking menu on the first screen 216A. The display of 216A is switched to the display of second screen 216D as shown in FIG. 88(B).

The second screen 216D of this fifth embodiment is a pop-up screen that is automatically displayed immediately after touching the confirmation key (icon) 237 of the cooking menu, and appears so as to overlap the first screen 216A. do.
Although the display area of this pop-up screen 216D is slightly smaller than that of the first screen 216A, it is displayed so as to cover the image display section 235 and process information 236 shown in FIG. 88(A).

In FIG. 88(B), reference numeral 242 is an image diagram (schematic diagram) clearly showing the appearance of the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 88(B), heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R indicating three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R are displayed. A heating chamber mark (figure) 242G indicating the heating chamber 6 is also displayed.
Among the heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R, the heating port marks (figures) 242L and 242R corresponding to the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R are the heating port marks (figures) 242C of the central heating port 4C. Unlike, it is displayed in a red color. The reason why only the two heating ports 4L and 4R are emphasized is that in the future (using the recipe data CD), both of these two heating ports 4L and 4R can be used for cooking. This is to enable the user US to understand it intuitively.

243L is a left selection mark (icon) that issues a signal to select the left heating port 4L. When this is touched, the preview information A (201) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 includes information about using (selecting) the left heating port 4L. That is, the cooking device 1 can be provided with the correspondence information KID indicating that the input key 152L of the left operating portion 15L corresponding to the left heating port 4L is the above-described "specific input key."

243R is a right selection mark (icon) that issues a signal to select the right heating port 4R. When this is touched, the preview information 201 sent from the communication terminal 200 includes information indicating that the right heating port 4R will be used (selected). That is, the cooking device 1 can be provided with the correspondence information KID indicating that the input key 152R of the right operation section 15R corresponding to the right heating port 4R is the above-described "specific input key."

Since only one of the left selection mark (icon) 243L and right selection mark (icon) 243R can be selected, if the left selection mark (icon) 243L is touched for the first time in the state shown in FIG. 88(B), This means that the left heating port 4L has been selected, but if the right selection mark (icon) 243R is touched immediately after this, the selection of the left heating port 4L is canceled and the right heating port 4R is selected. become. Even if the order of operations is reversed, the same rule applies; only the latest selection operation is valid and is recognized by the central processing unit 212. Further, the data of the selection operation result is stored in the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217.

246 is an operation guidance display section, and in FIG. 88(B), the words "Please select one" and the words "Left" and "Right" are displayed at positions adjacent to the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R. is displayed. When the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R are operated, the pop-up screen 216D automatically disappears after a few seconds (referred to as a "grace time") and returns to the original first screen 216A, or returns to the second screen. Proceed to 216B. However, if the pop-up screen 216D does not automatically appear and disappear as shown in FIG. 88(B), an input key (icon) 247 for screen deletion may be provided. Note that during the grace period, the left selection mark 243L and right selection mark 243R may be touched many times, and the information of the one touched last will be displayed as a confirmation signal when the grace period has elapsed. It is transmitted from communication terminal 200 as .

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, the fifth embodiment discloses the cooking device 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
The heating means HM1 to HM3 are heated using a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M, a notification means 90, a communication section 51, and a recipe data CD acquired from the outside. and a control device 40 that controls and executes cooking,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a notification step SP2B (see FIG. 87) of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M when a notice signal A (201) corresponding to the cooking of the recipe data CD is received;
(2) After the notification step SP2B, it is determined whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M have been operated, and if it is determined that the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M have been operated, the confirmation information A ( 202), a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting the
(4) a restriction step of starting a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 85) when the confirmation information A (202) is transmitted;
to be executed sequentially,
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the heating cooker 1 notifies the specific input key to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US in accordance with the advance notice information A from the communication terminal 200, Since the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US is guided, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, when one recipe data CD is selected using the specific input key 153M or the like, a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring the recipe data CD of another cooking menu cannot be started (step SF7 in FIG. 85). reference).
Therefore, if you decide to obtain a specific recipe data CD and press the input key 153M, you may inadvertently enter another cooking menu (such as a control menu for another cooking mode) while setting a cooking menu. (including a control menu for the independent cooking mode), it is possible to stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

The control device 40 of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure had the following configuration in this fifth embodiment.
That is, the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1,
(1) When advance notice information A (201) regarding the cooking menu is obtained from the communication unit 51, a key identification step SP2A of extracting the one to be operated from among the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R based on the correspondence information KID (See step SF4 in FIG. 85) and
(2) a notification step SP2B (see step SF5 in FIG. 85) in which the notification means 90 notifies information that can identify the specific input key extracted in the key identification step SP2A;
(3) a step of determining whether the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notification means 90 have been operated (see step SF7 in FIG. 85);
(4) If it is determined that the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notification means 90 have been operated, confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) (see step SF9 in FIG. 85) The configuration was such that the following steps were executed sequentially.

With this configuration, as described above, specific input keys to be operated in advance can be accurately displayed on the display unit 16 in response to the operation by the user US. Since the user US is guided to perform an operation for a specific input key in the confirmation step SP3, it is possible to prevent the user US from making a mistake in operation and to improve usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 5, a heating cooking system related to the fourth disclosure was disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooking system disclosed in this Embodiment 5 is as follows:
A heating cooker 1 having a communication unit 51 and a plurality of specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R for permitting reception of recipe data CD regarding the food to be cooked via the communication unit 51;
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) On the terminal side display unit 216, the first screen 216A and the second screen 216D are sequentially displayed,
(2) Displaying recipe data regarding the selected cooking item on the first screen 216A;
(3) When the recipe data displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216D, and the specific input key to be operated before receiving the recipe data on the second screen 216D displaying preview information A (201, 246) indicating the corresponding heating section;
(4) The second screen 216D displays input keys 243L and 243R that can transmit the selected recipe data,
(5) When the input keys 243L and 243R are operated, setting information A regarding the recipe data selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking device 1;
The heating cooker 1, after turning on the main power,
(1) a key identification step SP2A that detects that the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R are operated;
(2) When the preview information A (201, 246) of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received from the communication terminal 200, the specific input key 153M defined by the specific cooking menu; a confirmation step SP3 of determining whether 152L and 152R are operated before or after receiving the notice information A;
Execute sequentially,
When the heating cooker confirms that the specific input key has been operated in the confirmation step SP3, transmitting selection information A (202);
The structure was characterized by the following.

Furthermore, the communication terminal 200
(1) In response to the input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and 216A) (see step SF1 in FIG. 85 and FIG. 88(A)),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, a second screen 216D (pop-up screen) is displayed (see (B) in FIG. 88);
(3) The second screen 216D has a left heating port 4L that can be used with the first specific input key 152L that corresponds to the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the second screen 216D. , or input keys 243L and 243R that can select any one of the right heating ports 4R that can be used with the first specific input key 152R (also serving as a selection mark), and a touch operation of these input keys 243L and 243L is requested. and an operation guidance display section 246, respectively.
(3) When a transmission command is received at the time when the touch input operation of the input keys 243L and 243R is completed, the specific recipe data CD related to the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is heated and cooked. transmitting to device 1,
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the cooking device 1 selects specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US. It can be presented according to the data (correspondence information KID). For this reason, it is possible to notify by the advance notice information A (201) from the communication terminal 200 and guide the user US's operation in the confirmation step SP3 to the correct input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, corresponding to the display section 16 of the heating cooker 1, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) of the communication terminal 200 displays the left heating port 4L or the first specific input corresponding to the first specific input key 152L. A configuration that displays input keys 243L and 243R that also serve as selection marks for selecting one of the right heating ports 4R corresponding to the key 152R, and an operation guidance display section 246 that requests a touch operation of the selection marks 243L and 243L. It is.
With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the user US from erroneously operating both the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200, and to improve the usability.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 5, as particularly explained with reference to FIG. 88(B),
In the heating cooker 1, at least one of the heating means HM1 to HM3 is configured to be able to perform heating operations independently of each other at the plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R,
On the other hand, in the communication terminal 200, the second screen 216B (pop-up screen 216D) displays input keys 243L and 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting any one of the plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R. The configuration was as follows.

Further, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to simultaneously display an operation guidance display section 246 that requests a touch operation of the input keys 243L, 243L. Thereby, before transmitting the recipe data CD, the cooking device 1 can know which heating port the user intends to use.
That is, by touch operation of the input keys 243L, 243L, data indicating whether it is the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L is included in the preview information A (201) and the corresponding information KID is sent to the cooking device 1. provided to. Thereby, the corresponding specific input key is identified on the heating cooker 1 and displayed on the display section 16.
With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the user US from erroneously operating both the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200, and to improve the usability.

In this fifth embodiment, the same practical effects as those obtained in the first to fourth embodiments can be obtained with respect to the parts having the same configuration as those in the first to fourth embodiments.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain each component of each circuit, part, and device that constitutes the heating cooker 1, 400 and the communication terminal device 200, data such as recipe data CD1, recipe data CD2, selection information A, selection information B, etc. Although the description has been given by attaching codes (1, 2, A, B) to the data and information, the two may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (e.g. hamburger recipe data CD) that is held from the beginning in the heating cooker 1, 400, and one recipe data (e.g. hamburger recipe data) acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51, 426. data CD) may have the same content.

Further, the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal (small portable personal computer) does not necessarily need to provide the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking device 1 or 400, and the communication terminal 200 itself The recipe data may be generated and retained.

In addition, in the complex cooking mode KM2, when the complex cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "defrosting") is basically selected, and a recipe data CD assuming a specific cooking item is selected. It wasn't something I would do. However, if the user US uses the cloud server 300 to select a recipe data CD for one food item in the complex cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the heating cooker 1, and uses the communication terminal 200 to select the recipe data CD for one item to be cooked, Alternatively, the heating cooker 1 may be made to acquire the information. This also applies to the independent cooking mode KM3.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplifying the explanation, reference numerals have been attached to correspond to the component parts and signals, but the reference numbers should not be interpreted as indicating that the component parts and signals are different from each other. In some cases, different codes were used in the explanation, but these codes were added for convenience of explanation, and the difference in the codes alone means that the contents of data, components, and functions are different from each other. isn't it.

Each circuit, component, and component of the device illustrated in the first to fifth embodiments above is functionally conceptual, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, in particular, the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, storage device 41, main control device 480, sub-control device 440, etc. It is possible to distribute and integrate the functions of each device and circuit, and the specific form is not limited to that shown in the diagram, but all or part of it can be functionally or physically divided into arbitrary units depending on the function and operating status. It can be configured in a distributed and integrated manner.

Each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware or may be a processor that executes a program stored in memory. The same applies to the main control device 480 and the sub control device 440.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor realizes each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 by reading and executing a program stored in the storage device 41. This also applies to the main controller 480 and the sub controller 440.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and heating control section 43. Note that the storage device 41 is typically a nonvolatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, and EEPROM.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage section 41 shown in FIG. 10 may not be held in the cooking device 1 but may be held in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the heating cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be changed according to the wishes of the user US or the manufacturer of the cooking device 1. It may also be possible to update it to a modified or improved version as appropriate. In this case, for example, the modified/improved program may be obtained through the communication unit 51.

One heating section (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 that heats and cooks on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion type burner. In this case, the gas flow valve is controlled by the control section.
Further, part or all of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In Embodiments 1 and 2, the input operation unit 15 was mainly described as a “contact input” in which the user US touches an input key to issue an input command, and a press (push button) type operation unit. It may also be a "non-contact input" operation unit that detects and inputs the finger or hand movements of the user US without contact.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method in which the user US's voice is recognized and input. In the case of the voice input method, the microphone and voice receiving section for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation section.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 of Embodiments 1 and 2 may give commands to the cooking device 1 via an input terminal device equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker. This also applies to the first operating section 420 and the second operating section 421 in the third and fourth embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the nutritional component data DD is displayed on the central display section 16M, but depending on the display screen of various cooking menus, the nutritional component data DD may be displayed on the display screen at other positions (for example, the right display section 16R or the left display section 16R). 16L, right firepower display section 17R).
In addition, although it was explained in the first embodiment that the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display section 16M, as in the second embodiment, if there is another display section, it is displayed on that display section. It's okay. For example, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed on the right display section 16R for the right heating port 4R immediately after the input key 153R is operated. This can also be applied to the left display section 16L.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment (FIG. 24), two types of main food components and nutritional components are displayed on the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B. may be displayed all at once (on one screen).

Further, the nutritional components and food components to be displayed may be limited to only specific nutritional components by the user US pressing the function setting key 151KP to enter the function setting mode. Furthermore, the input key 180 may be pressed to switch to voice input mode 2 and input by voice to narrow down the range to only specific nutritional components or food components.

Furthermore, at the stage when all the heating cooking steps are completed or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B are automatically changed according to a command from the user US. Either or both may be displayed.

The smart speaker and AI speaker exchange information wirelessly at any time with a support server in a network environment that is equipped with a voice translation function and a search function, such as the cloud server 300. The voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking device 1 is acquired as a voice signal, and the support server converts it into a command signal from the user US, and finally generates a command signal for the cooking device 1. be able to. Therefore, even if the user US is in the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the frequency of directly touching the input operation section 15 is limited because both hands are occupied while preparing for cooking or processing ingredients. It is also convenient because the heating cooker 1 can be operated using natural utterances (voices).

In the first and second embodiments, the input operation unit 15 is the means for selecting various control menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, second specific screen 16M2, and third specific screen 16M3. , it may be provided as a touch input key in the display screens of the central display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R, which are display means.

For example, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes complex cooking, a display screen for complex cooking is displayed, the name of the complex cooking menu is displayed on the display screen, and the menu selection section is selected by the user. A technology has been proposed in which menus can be selected by touching the screen directly with one's finger.

Therefore, menus for cooking that are possible in the complex cooking mode KM2 and cooperative cooking mode KM1, the name of the food to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2. The user US may directly touch the display area (also referred to as the "icon" area) with his or her finger to select the cooperative cooking mode menu or the like.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals, recipe data CD, etc. transmitted from the outside of the cooking device 1, and also transmits each operation signal and command signal from the cooking device 1 to the outside. Although the information is transmitted (operating status data OS), information indicating progress such as the start and end of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 may be transmitted each time. With this configuration, the user US can know the progress information (operating state data OS) via the communication terminal 200 or the like, improving convenience.

In addition to the heating cooker 1, a home gateway having a function of receiving data on the inventory search results of the refrigerator 331 is arranged as an information management device, and between the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 331, It may also be possible to connect via a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, so that the heating cooker 1 side can acquire the inventory information of the refrigerator 331 and use it for cooking.

Further, the cooking device database 217 and the remote control information generation unit 219 are not necessarily required as a configuration of the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone. For example, the first server 321 or the second server 322 may be equipped with a function equivalent to the heating cooker database 217 or the remote control information generation unit 219, and the communication terminal 200 may receive input (including voice input). In this case, the information may be transmitted to the cloud server 300 such as the first server 321 each time, and necessary response information may be obtained from the cloud server 300 side.

The cooking device 1 used to receive the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router, but the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router. , the heating cooker 1, 400 may receive the information. For example, a remote control for other home appliances (for example, a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as a relay device. Such remote controls are conveniently connected to a power source at all times. In this case, the relay device may have a built-in storage device (flash memory, etc.) that temporarily stores various data including commands sent from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. desirable. The configuration is such that various data transmitted from the heating cooker 1, 400 are temporarily stored in the storage device (flash memory, etc.).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 stores correspondence information KID that can identify a specific input key (for example, 153M) corresponding to the determined cooking menu in the storage unit 220 or the heating Although the notification information A (201) was generated by reading from the cooking appliance database 217, the communication terminal 200 does not need to have such corresponding information KID.
That is, if the heating cooker 1 (400) side has the correspondence information KID in the storage device 41, storage means 440R, 480R, etc., the cooking identification included in the received preview information A (201) By comparing with the information, it is possible to determine a specific input key (for example, 153M) to be operated on the cooking device 1 (400) side.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The heating cooker and heating cooking system according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in kitchens of ordinary homes but also in cooking areas of public facilities, stores, and the like.

1 Cooking device 2 Main unit 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detection section 11 Microwave oscillation section (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation section 15L Left operation section 15M Center operation section 15R Right operation section 16 Display section 16F Progress mark 16L Left display section 16M Center display Section 16M1 1st specific screen 16M1A Food ingredient display screen 16M1B Nutritional ingredient display screen 16M2 2nd specific screen 16M3 3rd specific screen 16MA Information screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Reception operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Fire power display section 17L Left fire power display section 17M Central heating status display section 17R Right fire power display section 20 Main power switch 20A Main power switch operation button (key)
21 Light emitting section 21L Light emitting section 21M Light emitting section 21R Light emitting section 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 25A to 25C Display information 26 Light emission control section 27 Light emitting element (light emitting element group)
30 Temperature sensor group 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmitting unit 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmitting unit 40 Control device 41 Display data storage unit 42 Recipe data storage unit 43 Heating control unit 50 Audio notification unit 51 Communication unit (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis section 53 Data acquisition section 54 Permission condition determination section 55 Restriction section 56 Audio signal reception section 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis section 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanatory text 60E Caution display 60H Recommended text 60N Common information during standby 60P Obtaining operation support information 70 Input processing section 90 Notification section 151L to 155L Input key 151M to 159M Input key 151R to 155R Input key 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating section identification section 171R Heating section identification section 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification section 174 Reception operation display section 174A Reception support information 174F Disallowance display 175 Operation support information 175A Operation support information 176 Operation support information 176A Operation support information 179 Auxiliary information 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
190 Icon 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 Notification information A
202 Selection information A (confirmation information A)
203 Preparation information A (preparation signal A)
210 Transmitting unit/receiving unit 211 Communication control unit 212 Central processing unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation section 216 Terminal side display section (terminal side display screen)
216A 1st screen 216B 2nd screen 216C 3rd screen 216D Pop-up screen (2nd screen)
217 Heating cooker database 218 Posture detection unit 219 Remote control information generation unit 220 Storage unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Audio input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food component/nutrient component data 230 Recipe data Acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food component data acquisition unit 234 Character display unit 235 Image display unit 236 Process information 237 Confirmation key (icon)
238 Input key (icon)
239 Character display section 240 Input key (for sending)
241 Input key for cancellation 242 Image diagram (schematic diagram)
242C Center heating port mark 242G Heating chamber mark 242L Left heating port mark 242R Right center heating port mark 243L Left selection mark 243R Right selection mark 246 Operation guidance display section 247 Input key for screen deletion 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data providing server 302 Recipe Database 310 Light emitting device for range (LED)
311 Light emitting element (LED) for grill
312 Oven light emitting device (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature caution light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature caution light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature caution light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output section (input/output interface section)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Storage unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Storage unit 326 Food component information server 330BT Wireless communication 330WF Wireless communication 331 Refrigerator 332 Menu screen display unit (icon)
333 Input key (icon)
340 Wireless router (access point)
400 Cooking device 401 First unit (lower unit)
402 Second unit (upper unit)
403 Main body 404 Lid 405 Inner pot 406 Inner pot temperature detection means 407 Power feeding means 408 Power receiving coil 409 Lid opening/closing button 410 Lid heating means 411 Inner pot side heating means 412 Second display section 413 Third display section 416 Hinge shaft 418 First display section 420 First operation section 421 Second operation section 422 Top plate 423 Bottom opening 424 IH coil 426 Communication section (communication module)
427 Weight sensor 428 Weight measurement means 429 Third operation section 430 First reference position determination means 430A First communication section (infrared transmitting/receiving section)
431 Second reference position determination means 431A Second communication section (infrared transmitting/receiving section)
433 Temperature sensor 434 Control board 435 Inverter circuit 436 Heated object temperature detection means 440 Sub-control device 441 Commercial power supply 442 Power supply section 443 Drive motor 444 Notification means 445 Step portion 447 Reed switch 448 Top plate temperature detection means 451 Light emitting display section 452 Display Means 453 Light emitting display section 454 Third reference position determination means 455 Audio notification means 460A Main power switch operation section 461 Lid sensor 462 Audio input means 463 Human detection sensor 464 Cooking method switch 465 Notification means 466 Audio notification section 467 Rice cooking switch (input key)
468 Secondary battery 469 NFC input/output section 470 Light emitting display section 471 Input key (menu selection key)
472 Outside air temperature detection means 473 Input key 474 Input key 475A Input key 475B Input key 476 Input key 477 Input key 478 Fourth operation section 480 Main controller 481 Recipe data receivable information 482 Program display section 484 Rice type display section 486 Hardness Display section 487 Menu display section 488 Rice variety switch (input key)
489 Hardness switch (input key)
490 Off/warm switch (input key)
491 Cancel switch (input key)
492 Reservation switch (input key)
493 Time switch (input key)
494 Calorie notification switch (input key)
495 Data receivable information (receivable mark)
496 Program display section 507A Auxiliary information display section A
507B Auxiliary information display section B
525 Menu screen display section (icon)
542 Reference information 543 Error notification (error display)
CD Recipe data CD1-CD2 Recipe data CN Cooking execution data DD Food composition information NW Network OS Operating status data SD1 Inventory data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Cancellation period of acquired recipe data TB3 Acquired recipe data Changeable period TMC Touch input mode selection section TX First time limit (first limit period)
TZ1 Recipe data reception restriction period TZ2 Additional recipe data acquisition restriction period US users.

Claims (72)

It has a specific input key determined for each cooking menu, a notification means, and a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) If a notice signal for a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, is the specific input key defined by the specific cooking menu operated before or after receiving the notice signal? a confirmation process to determine whether
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting selection information after receiving the notice signal;
A heating cooker characterized by: further comprising a storage device;
The storage device holds correspondence information of the specific input key for each cooking menu,
The control device includes:
(1) When the preview information is acquired, a key determination step of extracting a key to be operated from among the specific input keys based on the correspondence information in the storage device;
The cooking device according to claim 1, characterized in that: (2) a notification step of notifying information that allows the specific input key extracted in the key identification step to be notified by the notifying means; . The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein when the selection information is transmitted, a reception operation display section is displayed on a display section of the notification means, and the cooking device moves to a reception step in preparation for reception of the recipe data. . The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein a reception restriction period is started when the specific input key is operated or when the selection information is transmitted. 5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein when the recipe data is successfully acquired after operating the specific input key, the notification means notifies information indicating that the recipe data has been acquired. If the recipe data cannot be obtained after operating the specific input key, the notifying means sends at least one of a non-reception display indicating an unobtained state and reception support information indicating the cause or countermeasure. The cooking device according to claim 4, further comprising a notification. The specific input key has a function of selecting a voice input mode,
3. The control device according to claim 2, wherein when receiving a command to acquire the recipe data using the specific input key, the control device enters a standby state in which input from the outside is accepted in the voice input mode. Heating cooker. When the recipe data is successfully acquired, the control device notifies identification information of a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data and information indicating a setting status of the voice input mode by the notifying means; The heating cooker according to claim 7, characterized by: When the control device receives the command to acquire the recipe data, it determines whether permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the control device does not acquire the recipe data. The heating cooker according to claim 2. The control device displays a standby initial screen on the notification means after the main power is turned on;
3. The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the standby initial screen displays standby common information including information regarding the operation of the specific input key. further comprising a first input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode and a second input key for selecting a combined cooking mode,
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the first input key also serves as the specific input key. The control device displays a standby initial screen on the notification means after the main power is turned on;
By operating the first input key or operating the second input key, the display is switched from the standby initial screen state to the first specific screen of the cooperative cooking mode or the second specific screen of the composite cooking mode. The heating cooker according to claim 11, characterized in that: The heating cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the reception restriction period ends when a heating cooking operation is started. The specific input key has a function of selecting at least one of a cooking mode by the heating means, a cooking menu by the heating means, a control pattern of the heating means, and a heating port by the heating means. The heating cooker according to claim 4. The heating means has a first heating means that heats the object to be heated, and a second heating means that heats the object to be cooked in a heating chamber,
The control device is characterized in that it has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven at a time difference to perform one cooking operation. The heating cooker according to claim 4. 5. The control device according to claim 4, wherein the control device displays information on at least one of food components and nutritional components regarding a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data on a display section of the notification means. heating cooker. The specific input key is a touch type input key,
5. The input operation unit including the specific input key determines whether it is necessary to switch the voice input mode based on the touch state of the specific input key, and issues a signal corresponding to the voice input mode. heating cooker. The input operation section includes a touch detection section that detects a touch operation on the specific input key, a time measurement section that measures a continuous time of the touch operation, and a threshold value of the voice input mode based on the measurement result of the time measurement section. an input mode determination unit that determines whether the conditions are satisfied;
The cooking device according to claim 17, wherein the voice input mode compatible signal is transmitted based on the determination result of the input mode determination section. Displaying at least one of information A indicating that the voice input mode is set or information B regarding a range of selectable control conditions in the voice input mode on a display section of the notification means;
The cooking device according to claim 17, wherein the control device does not start the heating cooking operation unless input of the control conditions is completed. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the control device executes a receiving step in preparation for receiving the recipe data after transmitting the selection information. The notification means includes a display unit that displays operation support information in the notification step,
5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the display unit instructs the operation of the specific input key based on the operation support information. The notification means includes a display unit that displays operation support information in the notification step,
After transmitting the selection information, the control device executes a receiving step in preparation for receiving the recipe data,
5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein in the receiving step, the display section displays that the display section is on standby to receive the recipe data using a reception operation display section. 23. The cooking device according to claim 22, wherein in the receiving step, if the recipe data is not successfully acquired, the receiving operation display section displays that the receiving operation has failed. The input operation section includes a start key that commands the start of heating cooking, and a stop key that commands the end of heating cooking,
18. The heating cooking device according to claim 17, wherein when the start key is used to initiate heating cooking from the input operation section, the setting of the voice input mode is canceled. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the control device includes a permission condition determination unit that determines whether to permit acquisition of the recipe data after the confirmation step. 5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the control device displays information regarding acceptance of the recipe data on a display section of the notification means when transmitting the selection information. further comprising a plurality of heating means,
The heating means is capable of independently performing a heating operation at least at a first location and a second location,
5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein one specific input key is arranged corresponding to the first location and the second location. having one heating means for performing a cooking operation in a plurality of heating ports,
The heating means executes a heating cooking operation independently for each heating port by a first input operation section and a second input operation section corresponding to the heating port,
5. The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein one specific input key is arranged in each of the first input operation section and the second input operation section. The notification means includes a display section,
28. The cooking device according to claim 27, wherein the display portions are respectively disposed corresponding to the first location and the second location. The notification means includes a display section,
29. The cooking device according to claim 28, wherein the display sections are respectively arranged corresponding to the first input operation section and the second input operation section. It has a specific input key determined for each cooking menu, a notification means, and a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) remembering that the specific input key was operated;
(2) If a preview signal of the cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, determine whether a specific input key defined in the cooking menu has been operated before receiving the preview signal;
If a specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the notice signal has been operated before receiving the notice signal, transmit selection information;
A heating cooker characterized by: further comprising a storage device;
The storage device holds correspondence information of the specific input key for each cooking menu,
The control device includes:
(1) When the preview information is acquired, a key determination step of extracting a key to be operated from among the specific input keys based on the correspondence information in the storage device;
32. The cooking device according to claim 31, characterized in that: (2) a notification step of notifying information by which the specific input key extracted in the key identification step can be identified by the notification means is sequentially executed. . If the specific input key defined in the cooking menu has been operated before receiving the notice signal, the notification means notifies information regarding the operation of the specific input key before transmitting the selection information. The heating cooker according to claim 32, characterized in that. 33. The cooking device according to claim 32, wherein when the specific input key is operated, a reception restriction period is started. If the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the advance notice signal has not been operated before receiving the notice signal, the control device operates the specific input key before transmitting the selection information. 33. The heating cooker according to claim 32, wherein the notifying means notifies information regarding the necessity of the operation. If the specific input key notified by the notice signal has not been operated before receiving the notice signal, the control device determines the necessity of operating the specific input key before transmitting the selection information. 33. The cooking device according to claim 32, wherein information regarding the selection is notified by the notification means, and the selection information is transmitted after the specific input key is operated. The control device displays a standby initial screen on the notification means after the main power switch is turned on;
33. The cooking device according to claim 32, wherein the standby initial screen displays standby common information including information regarding the operation of the specific input key. a first unit incorporating a first operation section, a first display section, a first communication section, a heating source, and a storage means;
a second unit capable of performing a cooking operation using the heat source in a first state placed on the first unit;
Equipped with
The second unit includes a second display section, a second operation section, a second communication section, a wireless communication section that performs wireless communication with an external communication device, a storage means, and a sub-control device. , has
The first unit includes a main controller that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section,
The first operation section and the second operation section each have a specific input key,
At least one of the storage means of the first unit or the storage means of the second unit has correspondence information that specifies the specific input key for each cooking menu,
After the main power is turned on, the sub-control device
(1) a detection step of detecting that one of the specific input keys has been operated;
(2) If a notice signal for the cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received, the specific input key defined in the cooking menu is operated before the notice signal is received, or the notice signal a confirmation step of determining whether or not the information has been operated after receiving the information;
Execute sequentially,
If it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, transmitting selection information from the wireless communication unit after receiving the notice signal;
A heating cooker featuring: The cooking device according to claim 38, wherein the sub-control device starts a reception restriction period when transmitting the selection information. 40. The cooking device according to claim 38, wherein the specific input key provided on the second operation section has a cooking menu selection function. The second unit is characterized in that when the preview information is obtained, operation support information is displayed on the second display section, and the operation support information includes information instructing the operation of the specific input key. The heating cooker according to claim 38 or 39. The second display section displays auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information includes at least one of identification information of a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data or information on a cooking process. The heating cooker according to claim 38 or 39. 40. The cooking device according to claim 38, wherein the second unit includes a light emitting display section for emphasizing the presence of the specific input key. The cooking device according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the specific input key provided on the first input section has a cooking menu selection function. When the second unit obtains the preview information, it notifies the main control device, and the main control device displays operation support information on the first display section, and the operation support information The cooking device according to claim 38 or 39, further comprising information instructing operation of an input key. The first display section displays auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information includes at least one of identification information of a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data or information about a cooking process. The heating cooker according to claim 38 or 39. The second unit may request, on the first display section or the second display section, to maintain the second unit in the first state after the operation of the specific input key is completed and the transition is to a standby state. The cooking device according to claim 38 or 39, characterized in that the cooking device displays operation support information. 40. The reception restriction period is automatically canceled when a heating cooking operation is started or when a cooking process is completed for the cooking menu notified by the advance notice information. Heating cooker. The heating cooking according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the control device performs automatic cutoff processing if the specific input key is not operated within a time limit after starting the notification step. vessel. A heating cooker having a communication unit and a plurality of specific input keys for permitting reception of recipe data regarding the food to be cooked via the communication unit;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal is
(1) Displaying the first screen and the second screen sequentially on the terminal side display unit,
(2) displaying recipe data regarding the selected cooking item on the first screen;
(3) When the recipe data displayed on the first screen is selected, the display is switched to the second screen, and the specific input key to be operated before receiving the recipe data is shown on the second screen. Display preview information,
(4) displaying on the second screen an input key for transmitting the selected recipe data;
(5) When the input key is operated, setting information regarding the recipe data selected on the first screen is transmitted to the cooking device;
The heating cooker, after turning on the main power,
(1) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key has been operated;
(2) When the preview information of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received from the communication terminal, the specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu is pressed before or after receiving the preview signal. a confirmation step of determining whether or not it has been manipulated after receiving;
Execute sequentially,
When the heating cooker confirms that the specific input key has been operated in the confirmation step, transmitting selection information;
A heating cooking system featuring: 51. The heating cooker starts a reception restriction period in which, when the specific input key is operated, reception of the recipe data by other specific input keys is restricted thereafter. The heating cooking system described. The specific input key includes a first specific input key for cooking using a first heating means, and a second specific input key for cooking using a second heating means,
A claim characterized in that, when either the first specific input key or the second specific input key is operated, the heating cooker transmits the selection information indicating the operation of the specific input key. Item 50 or 51. The cooking system according to item 50 or 51. 52. The heating cooking system according to claim 51, wherein during the reception restriction period, reception of new recipe data using the first specific input key and the second specific input key is restricted. The heating cooker is characterized in that, after acquiring the advance notice information, if neither the first specific input key nor the second specific input key is operated within a time limit, automatic cutoff processing is performed. The heating cooking system according to claim 52. a first unit incorporating a first operation section, a first communication section, and a heating source;
a second unit that can be heated by the heat source in a first state placed on the first unit;
The second unit includes a second display section, a second input section, a second communication section, and a wireless communication section that performs wireless communication with an external communication device,
The second input section has a specific input key,
The first unit includes a main controller that operates according to recipe data acquired from the wireless communication section,
When the second unit receives preview information from the wireless communication unit after completing the preparation state through communication between the first communication unit and the second communication unit in the first state, the second unit 2 displaying information regarding the operation of the specific input key on the display unit, and transmitting selection information from the wireless communication unit when the specific input key is operated in the state;
A heating cooker featuring: 56. The cooking device according to claim 55, wherein the sub-control device starts a reception restriction period when transmitting the selection information. 56. The cooking device according to claim 55, wherein the specific input key provided on the second operation section has a cooking menu selection function. The second unit is characterized in that when the preview information is obtained, operation support information is displayed on the second display section, and the operation support information includes information instructing the operation of the specific input key. The heating cooker according to claim 55. The second display section displays auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information includes at least one of identification information of a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data or information on a cooking process. The heating cooker according to claim 55. 56. The cooking device according to claim 55, wherein the second unit includes a light emitting display section for emphasizing the presence of the specific input key. 56. The cooking device according to claim 55, wherein the specific input key provided on the first input section has a cooking menu selection function. After the second unit finishes operating the specific input key and enters a standby state, the second unit displays, on the second display, operation support information requesting to maintain the second unit in the first state. 57. The heating cooker according to claim 55 or 56, wherein the cooking device displays: . 57. The reception restriction period is automatically canceled when a heating cooking operation is started or when a cooking process is completed for the cooking menu notified by the advance notice information. heating cooker. The heating cooker according to claim 55 or 56, wherein the control device performs an automatic shut-off process if the specific input key is not operated within a time limit when the advance notice information is obtained. . A first heating means and a second heating means capable of heating and cooking at a plurality of heating locations, respectively;
a plurality of input operation units provided for each heating location;
specific input keys respectively arranged on the input operation section;
at least one display section disposed on each of the input operation sections;
A control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source,
The specific input key is determined for each cooking menu,
The control device, after turning on the main power,
(1) displaying a standby initial screen on at least one of the display units;
(2) Displaying on the standby initial screen at least one piece of information about the specific input key that requires an input operation when starting acquisition of the recipe data;
(3) a key identification step of detecting that the specific input key displayed on the standby initial screen has been operated;
(4) a confirmation step of determining whether or not a specific input key defined in the specific cooking menu has been operated when a preview signal of a specific cooking menu targeted by the recipe data is received;
Execute sequentially,
Furthermore, if it is confirmed in the confirmation step that the specific input key has been operated, after receiving the notice signal on the display section corresponding to the input operation section where the input key is arranged, The control device displays at least one of information indicating that selection information has been transmitted or information indicating a receiving process of the recipe data;
A heating cooker featuring: The heating locations each include a first location set above the top plate and a second location located below the top plate and configured inside a metal heating chamber. 66. The heating cooker according to claim 65. a first heating means for heating the object to be heated in the first place; a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber using microwaves; and a second heating means for heating the object to be heated in the heating chamber. 67. The cooking device according to claim 66, further comprising a third heating means. 68. The cooking device according to claim 67, wherein at least two heating ports of the first heating means are provided on the top plate, spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. 68. The cooking device according to claim 67, wherein the first heating means includes an induction heating coil. While displaying the standby initial screen, the control device enables both input functions of a first input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode and a second input key for selecting a composite cooking mode,
66. The cooking device according to claim 65, wherein at least one of the first input key and the second input key also serves as the specific input key. 71. The heating cooker according to claim 70, wherein the first input key or the second input key transmits a signal to the control device that can set a voice input mode according to an operation method. 68. The cooking device according to claim 65, wherein the display section displays the recipe data acquisition operation using a reception operation display section.

Images